2006 rl online reference owner's manual...

2006 RL Online Reference Owner's Manual Use these links (and links throughout this manual) to navigate through this reference. For a printed owner's manual, click on authorized manuals or go to www.helminc.com.

Contents

Owner's Identification Form

Introduction ..................................................................................................................................................... i

A Few Words About Safety .......................................................................................................................... ii

Your Vehicle at a Glance ...............................................................................................................................4Driver and Passenger Safety .......................................................................................................................7Proper use and care of your vehicle's seat belts, and Supplemental Restraint System.

Instruments and Controls...........................................................................................................................59Instrument panel indicator and gauge, and how to use dashboard and steering column controls.

Comfort and Convenience Features.......................................................................................................193How to operate the climate control system, the audio system, and other convenience features.

Before Driving .............................................................................................................................................295What gasoline to use, how to break-in your new vehicle, and how to load luggage and other cargo.

Driving ...........................................................................................................................................................309The proper way to start the engine, shift the transmission, and park, plus towing a trailer.

Maintenance .................................................................................................................................................347The Maintenance Schedule shows you when you need to take your vehicle to the dealer.

Taking Care of the Unexpected...............................................................................................................393This section covers several problems motorists sometimes experience, and how to handle them.

Technical Information ...............................................................................................................................423ID numbers, dimensions, capacities, and technical information.

Warranty and Customer Relations (U.S. and Canada) ..................................................................... 437A summary of the warranties covering your new Honda, and how to contact us.

Authorized Manuals (U.S. only)...............................................................................................................441How to order manuals and other technical literature.

Index ................................................................................................................................................................. I

Service Information Summary A summary of information you need when you pull up to the fuel pump.

This owner’s manual should beconsidered a permanent part of thevehicle and should remain with thevehicle when it is sold.

This owner’s manual covers allmodels of the Acura RL. You mayfind descriptions of equipment andfeatures that are not on yourparticular model.The information and specificationsincluded in this publication were ineffect at the time of approval forprinting. Honda Motor Co., Ltd.reserves the right, however, todiscontinue or change specificationsor design at any time without noticeand without incurring any obligationwhatsoever.

Owner’s Identif ication

OWNER

ADDRESS

V. I. N.

DELIVERY DATE

DEALER NAME DEALER NO.

ADDRESS

OWNER’S SIGNATURE

DEALER’S SIGNATURE

STREET

CITY STATE/PROVINCE ZIP CODE/POSTAL CODE

(Date sold to original retail purchaser)

STREET

CITY STATE/PROVINCE ZIP CODE/POSTAL CODE

California Proposition 65 Warning

This product containsor emits chemicals known to thestate of California to cause cancerand birth defects or otherreproductive harm.

Event Data Recorders

This vehicle is equipped with one ormore recording devices commonlyreferred to as event data recordersor sensing and diagnostic modules.

One of the best ways to enhance the enjoyment of your new vehicle is toread this manual. In it, you will learn how to operate its driving controls andconvenience items. Afterwards, keep this owner’s manual in your vehicle soyou can refer to it at any time.

Several warranties protect your new vehicle. Read the warranty bookletthoroughly so you understand the coverages and are aware of your rightsand responsibilities.

Maintaining your vehicle according to the schedules given in this manualhelps to keep your driving trouble-free while it preserves your investment.When your vehicle needs maintenance, keep in mind that your dealer’s staffis specially trained in servicing the many systems unique to your vehicle.Your dealer is dedicated to your satisfaction and will be pleased to answerany questions and concerns.

As you read this manual, you willfind information that is preceded bya symbol. Thisinformation is intended to help youavoid damage to your vehicle, otherproperty, or the environment.

Congratulations on your selection of the 2006 Acura RL. We are certain youwill be pleased with your purchase of one of the finest luxury vehicles in theworld.

Introduction

WARNING:

i

－－

－

－－

－

Your safety, and the safety of others,is very important. And operating thisvehicle safely is an importantresponsibility.

To help you make informeddecisions about safety, we haveprovided operating procedures andother information on labels and inthis manual. This information alertsyou to potential hazards that couldhurt you or others.

Of course, it is not practical orpossible to warn you about all thehazards associated with operating ormaintaining your vehicle. You mustuse your own good judgement.

You will find this important safety information in a variety of forms,including:

on the vehicle.preceded by a safety alert symbol and one of

three signal words: , , or .

such as Important Safety Reminders or ImportantSafety Precautions.

such as Driver and Passenger Safety.how to use this vehicle correctly and safely.

This entire book is filled with important safety information please read itcarefully.

These signal words mean:

A Few Words About Safety

Safety LabelsSafety Messages

Safety Headings

Safety SectionInstructions

DANGER WARNING CAUTION

ii

You WILL be KILLED or SERIOUSLYHURT if you don’t follow instructions.

You CAN be KILLED or SERIOUSLYHURT if you don’t follow instructions.

You CAN be HURT if you don’t followinstructions.

＊

＊

Your Vehicle at a Glance

4

CLIMATE CONTROLSYSTEM

AUDIO SYSTEM

POWER DOORLOCK MASTERSWITCH

INSTRUMENT PANELINDICATORS

ACCESSORYPOWER SOCKETS

HOOD RELEASE LEVER

POWER WINDOWSWITCHES

DRIVING POSITIONMEMORY SYSTEM

AIRBAGS

MIRROR CONTROLAUTO BUTTON

AUTOMATICTRANSMISSION

TRUNK RELEASEBUTTON

FUEL FILL DOOR RELEASEBUTTON

POWER REARMOONROOF SWITCH

SUNSHADE BUTTON

TILT BUTTON

HomeLink BUTTONSOnStar BUTTONS

REAR HEAD RESTRAINT

1:

CEILING CONSOLE

INTERFACE DIAL

(P.61)

(P.156)

(P.148)

(P.177)

(P.265)(P.252)(P.179 )

(P.190)

(P.152)

(P.149)

(P.297)(P.299)

(P.154)

(P.11, 26)

(P.194)

(P.203)

(P.195, 203, 256)

(P.313)

(P.188)

1

＊＊

＊

＊

2 :3 :

Canadian models onlyRefer to the navigation system manual.

Your Vehicle at a GlanceY

ourV

ehicleata

Glance

5

MIRROR CONTROLS

INSTRUMENTPANEL BRIGHTNESS

STEERING WHEELAUDIO CONTROLS

HANDSFREELINKBUTTONS

HORN

ADAPTIVE FRONT LIGHTINGSYSTEM (AFS) OFF SWITCH

VOICE CONTROLBUTTONS

HAZARD WARNINGBUTTON

WINDSHIELDWIPER/WASHER

VEHICLE STABILITY ASSIST (VSA)SYSTEM OFF SWITCH

COLLISION MITIGATIONBRAKE SYSTEM (CMBS)OFF SWITCH

PASSENGER AIRBAGOFF INDICATOR

REAR WINDOWDEFOGGER BUTTON

HEATED MIRRORBUTTON

CRUISE CONTROLBUTTONS

HEADLIGHTS/TURN SIGNAL/FOG LIGHTS

PADDLE SHIFTERS(P.315)

(P.139)

(P.155)STEERING WHEELADJUSTMENTS (P.143)

(P.279)

(P.230)

DISTANCE BUTTON (P.246)

(P.141)

(P.35)

(P.142) /

(P.155)

(P.234)/

(P.237)

ADAPTIVE CRUISECONTROL (ACC)BUTTONS

(P.71)

SEAT HEATERSWITCHESSEAT HEATER ANDSEAT VENTILATIONBUTTONS

(P.174) /

(P.175)

(P.141) (P.134)

(P.136)

(P.328)

(P.339)

MULTI-INFORMATIONBUTTONS

TM

3

2

－

This section gives you importantinformation about how to protectyourself and your passengers. Itshows you how to use seat belts. Itexplains how your airbags work. Andit tells you how to properly restraininfants and children in your vehicle.

.........Important Safety Precautions . 8.......Your Vehicle’s Safety Features . 9

.........Protecting Adults and Teens . 13.....1. Close and Lock the Doors . 13

...........2. Adjust the Front Seats . 14............3. Adjust the Seat-Backs . 15

...4. Adjust the Head Restraints . 165. Fasten and Position the Seat

.....................................Belts . 176. Maintain a Proper Sitting

................................Position . 18.....Advice for Pregnant Women . 19...Additional Safety Precautions . 20

Additional Information About.......................Your Seat Belts . 21

..Seat Belt System Components . 21

......................Lap/Shoulder Belt . 21Automatic Seat Belt

...............................Tensioners . 22..........Seat Belt E-pretensioners . 23

...............Seat Belt Maintenance . 25Additional Information About

...........................Your Airbags . 26......Airbag System Components . 26

How Your Front Airbags.........................................Work . 29

...How Your Side Airbags Work . 32How Your Side Curtain

..........................Airbags Work . 34..How the SRS Indicator Works . 34

How the Side Airbag Off......................Indicator Works . 35

How the Passenger Airbag...............Off Indicator Works . 35

.............................Airbag Service . 36...Additional Safety Precautions . 37

Protecting Children General................................Guidelines . 38

All Children Must Be...............................Restrained . 38

All Children Should Sit in a.................................Back Seat . 39

The Passenger’s Front Airbag.........Can Pose Serious Risks . 39

If You Must Drive with Several...................................Children . 41

If a Child Requires Close..................................Attention . 41

...Additional Safety Precautions . 41Protecting Infants and Small

...................................Children . 42.......................Protecting Infants . 42

.........Protecting Small Children . 44.....................Selecting a Child Seat . 45....................Installing a Child Seat . 46

...............................With LATCH . 47..........................With a Seat Belt . 49

..............................With a Tether . 51...........Protecting Larger Children . 52

...............Checking Seat Belt Fit . 52..................Using a Booster Seat . 53

When Can a Larger Child Sit in.........................................Front . 54

...Additional Safety Precautions . 55.............Carbon Monoxide Hazard . 56

...................................Safety Labels . 57

Driver and Passenger SafetyD

riverand

Passenger

Safety

7

－

You’ll find many safetyrecommendations throughout thissection, and throughout this manual.The recommendations on this pageare the ones we consider to be themost important.

Excessive speed is a major factor incrash injuries and deaths. Generally,the higher the speed, the greater therisk, but serious injuries can alsooccur at lower speeds. Never drivefaster than is safe for currentconditions, regardless of themaximum speed posted.

Having a tire blowout or amechanical failure can be extremelyhazardous. To reduce the possibilityof such problems, check your tirepressures and condition frequently,and perform all regularly scheduledmaintenance (see page ).

A seat belt is your best protection inall types of collisions. Airbags aredesigned to supplement seat belts,not replace them. So even thoughyour vehicle is equipped with airbags,make sure you and your passengersalways wear your seat belts, andwear them properly (see page ).

Children age 12 and under shouldride properly restrained in a backseat. Infants and small childrenshould be restrained in a child seat.Larger children should use a boosterand a lap/shoulder belt until theycan use the belt properly without abooster (see pages ).

While airbags can save lives, theycan cause serious or fatal injuries tooccupants who sit too close to them,or are not properly restrained.Infants, young children, and shortadults are at the greatest risk. Besure to follow all instructions andwarnings in this manual.

Alcohol and driving don’t mix. Evenone drink can reduce your ability torespond to changing conditions, andyour reaction time gets worse withevery additional drink. So don’t drinkand drive, and don’t let your friendsdrink and drive, either.

55

17

383

52

Important Safety Precautions

Always Wear Your Seat Belt

Control Your Speed

Keep Your Vehicle in SafeCondition

Restrain All Children

Be Aware of Airbag Hazards

Don’t Drink and Drive

8

Your vehicle is equipped with manyfeatures that work together toprotect you and your passengersduring a crash.

Some features do not require anyaction on your part. These include astrong steel framework that forms asafety cage around the passengercompartment; front and rear crushzones; a collapsible steering column;and tensioners that tighten the frontseat belts in a crash.

However, you and your passengerscan’t take full advantage of thesefeatures unless you remain sitting ina proper position and

. In fact, some safetyfeatures can contribute to injuries ifthey are not used properly.

The following pages explain how youcan take an active role in protectingyourself and your passengers.

Your Vehicle’s Safety Features

always wearyour seat belts

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

9

(1)

(2)

(2)

(4)

(5)(7)

(7)

(11)

(9)

(6)

(8) (3)

(6)(10)

(8)

(9)

(1) Safety Cage(2) Crush Zones(3) Seats and Seat-Backs(4) Head Restraints(5) Collapsible Steering Column(6) Seat Belts(7) Front Airbags(8) Side Airbags(9) Side Curtain Airbags(10) Door Locks(11) Front Seat Belt Tensioners/

Seat Belt E-pretentioners

Your vehicle is equipped with seatbelts in all seating positions.

Your seat belt system also includesan indicator on the instrument panelto remind you and your passengersto fasten your seat belts.

Seat belts are the single mosteffective safety device for adults andlarger children. (Infants and smallerchildren must be properly restrainedin child seats.)

Not wearing a seat belt properlyincreases the chance of seriousinjury or death in a crash, eventhough your vehicle has airbags.

In addition, most states and allCanadian provinces require you towear seat belts.

When properly worn, seat belts:

Keep you connected to the vehicleso you can take advantage of thevehicle’s built-in safety features.

Help protect you in almost everytype of crash, including frontal,side, and rear impacts androllovers.

Help keep you from being thrownagainst the inside of the vehicleand against other occupants.

Keep you from being thrown outof the vehicle.

Help keep you in a good positionshould the airbags ever deploy. Agood position reduces the risk ofinjury from an inflating airbag andallows you to get the bestadvantage from the airbag.

Of course, seat belts cannotcompletely protect you in everycrash. But in most cases, seat beltscan reduce your risk of seriousinjury.

Always wear your seat belt, andmake sure you wear it properly.


Seat Belts

Why Wear Seat Belts

What You Should Do:

10

Not wearing a seat belt properlyincreases the chance of seriousinjury or death in a crash, eventhough your vehicle has airbags.

Be sure you and yourpassengers always wear seatbelts and wear them properly.

CONTINUED

Your vehicle has a supplementalrestraint system (SRS) with frontairbags to help protect the heads andchests of the driver and a front seatpassenger during a moderate tosevere frontal collision. For moreinformation, see page .

Your vehicle also has side airbags tohelp protect the torso of the driver ora front seat passenger during amoderate to severe side impact. Formore information, see page .

Your vehicle also has side curtainairbags to help protect the heads ofthe driver, front passenger, andpassengers in the outer rear seatingpositions during a moderate tosevere side impact. For moreinformation, see page .

32

3429


Airbags

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

11

The most important things you needto know about your airbags are:

To dotheir job, airbags must inflate withtremendous force. So whileairbags help save lives, they cancause minor injuries or moreserious or even fatal injuries ifoccupants are not properlyrestrained or sitting properly.

Always wearyour seat belt properly, and situpright and as far back from thesteering wheel as possible whileallowing full control of the vehicle. Afront passenger should move theirseat as far back from the dashboardas possible.

The rest of this section gives moredetailed information about how youcan maximize your safety.

Remember, however, that no safetysystem can prevent all injuries ordeaths that can occur in a severecrash, even when seat belts areproperly worn and the airbags deploy.

They are designed to supplementthe seat belts.


Airbags can pose hazards.

What you should do:

Airbags do not replace seat belts.

Airbags offer no protection in rearimpacts, or minor frontal or sidecollisions.

12

－

The following pages provideinstructions on how to properlyprotect the driver, adultpassengers, and teenage childrenwho are large enough and matureenough to drive or ride in the front.

See pages for importantguidelines on how to properlyprotect infants, small children, andlarger children who ride in yourvehicle.

After everyone has entered thevehicle, be sure the doors areclosed and locked.

When the trunk is not tightly closed,the ‘‘TRUNK OPEN’’ indicator willstay on.

Your vehicle has door monitorindicators on the multi-informationdisplay to indicate when a specificdoor or the trunk is not tightly closed.You will see the appropriate indicatorand the message for each condition.

When one or more doors are nottightly closed, the ‘‘DOOR OPEN’’indicator will stay on.

38 42

CONTINUED

Introduction

Close and Lock the Doors1.

Protecting Adults and TeensD

riverand

Passenger

Safety

13

Adjust the driver’s seat as far to therear as possible while allowing you tomaintain full control of the vehicle.Have a front passenger adjust theirseat as far to the rear as possible.

Locking the doors reduces thechance of someone being thrown outof the vehicle during a crash, and ithelps prevent passengers fromaccidentally opening a door andfalling out.

Locking the doors also helps preventan outsider from unexpectedlyopening a door when you come to astop.

When both the trunk and one ormore doors are not tightly closed,the ‘‘DOOR & TRUNK OPEN’’indicator will stay on.

Adjust the Front Seats2.

Protecting Adults and Teens

14

If you sit too close to the steeringwheel or dashboard, you can beseriously injured by an inflating frontairbag, or by striking the steeringwheel or dashboard.

Adjust the driver’s seat-back to acomfortable, upright position,leaving ample space between yourchest and the airbag cover in thecenter of the steering wheel.

Passengers with adjustable seat-backs should also adjust their seat-back to a comfortable, uprightposition.

If you cannot get far enough awayfrom the steering wheel and stillreach the controls, we recommendthat you investigate whether sometype of adaptive equipment may help.

Once your seat is adjusted correctly,rock it back and forth to make surethe seat is locked in position.

See page for how to adjust thefront seats.

The National Highway Traffic SafetyAdministration and TransportCanada recommend that driversallow at least 10 inches (25 cm)between the center of the steeringwheel and the chest. In addition toadjusting the seat, you can adjust thesteering wheel up and down, and inand out (see page ).

151143

CONTINUED

Adjust the Seat-Backs3.


riverand

Passenger

Safety

15

Sitting too close to a frontairbag can result in seriousinjury or death if the frontairbags inflate.

Always sit as far back from thefront airbags as possible.

Adjust the driver’s head restraint sothe back of your head rests againstthe center of the restraint.

Have passengers with adjustablehead restraints adjust their restraintsproperly as well. Taller personsshould adjust their restraint as highas possible.

Properly adjusted head restraintswill help protect occupants fromwhiplash and other crash injuries.

See page for how to adjust thehead restraints.

See page for how to adjust theseat-backs.

Reclining a seat-back so that theshoulder part of the belt no longerrests against the occupant’s chestreduces the protective capability ofthe belt. It also increases the chanceof sliding under the belt in a crashand being seriously injured. Thefarther a seat-back is reclined, thegreater the risk of injury.

151

152

Adjust the Head Restraints4.


16

Improperly positioning headrestraints reduces theireffectiveness and you can beseriously injured in a crash.

Make sure head restraints arein place and positioned properlybefore driving.

Reclining the seat-back too farcan result in serious injury ordeath in a crash.

Adjust the seat-back to anupright position, and sit wellback in the seat.

If the seat belt touches or crossesyour neck, or if it crosses your arminstead of your shoulder, you need toadjust the seat belt anchor height.

Insert the latch plate into the buckle,then tug on the belt to make sure thebelt is securely latched. Check thatthe belt is not twisted, because atwisted belt can cause seriousinjuries in a crash.

This spreads the forces of a crashover the strongest bones in yourupper body.

Position the lap part of the belt aslow as possible across your hips,then pull up on the shoulder part ofthe belt so the lap part fits snugly.This lets your strong pelvic bonestake the force of a crash and reducesthe chance of internal injuries.

If necessary, pull up on the belt againto remove any slack, then check thatthe belt rests across the center ofyour chest and over your shoulder.

CONTINUED

Fasten and Position the SeatBelts

5.


riverand

Passenger

Safety

17

Improperly positioning the seatbelts can cause serious injuryor death in a crash.

Make sure all seat belts areproperly positioned beforedriving.

After all occupants have adjustedtheir seats and put on seat belts, it isvery important that they continue tosit upright, well back in their seats,with their feet on the floor, until thevehicle is parked and the engine isoff.

Sitting improperly can increase thechance of injury during a crash. Forexample, if an occupant slouches,lies down, turns sideways, sitsforward, leans forward or sideways,or puts one or both feet up, thechance of injury during a crash isgreatly increased.

This could causevery serious injuries in a crash.

See page for additionalinformation about your seat beltsand how to take care of them.

If a seat belt does not seem to workproperly, it may not protect theoccupant in a crash.

The front seats have adjustable seatbelt anchors. To adjust the height ofan anchor, press and hold the releasebuttons, and slide the anchor up ordown as needed (it has fourpositions).

Using a seatbelt that is not working properly canresult in serious injury or death.Have your dealer check the belt assoon as possible.

21

Maintain a Proper SittingPosition

6.Never place the shoulder portion of alap/shoulder belt under your arm orbehind your back.

No one should sit in a seat with aninoperative seat belt.


18

RELEASEBUTTON

When driving, remember to situpright and adjust the seat as farback as possible while allowing fullcontrol of the vehicle. When ridingas a front passenger, adjust the seatas far back as possible.

This will reduce the risk of injuriesto both you and your unborn childthat can be caused by a crash or aninflating front airbag.

Each time you have a checkup, askyour doctor if it’s okay for you todrive.If you are pregnant, the best way to

protect yourself and your unbornchild when driving or riding in avehicle is to always wear a seat belt,and keep the lap part of the belt aslow as possible across the hips.

In addition, an occupant who is out ofposition in the front seat can beseriously or fatally injured in a crashby striking interior parts of thevehicle or being struck by aninflating front airbag.

Advice for Pregnant Women


riverand

Passenger

Safety

19

Sitting improperly or out ofposition can result in seriousinjury or death in a crash.

Always sit upright, well back inthe seat, with your feet on thefloor.

If yourhands or arms are close to anairbag cover, they could be injuredif the airbag inflates.

Objects onthe covers marked ‘‘SRS AIRBAG’’could interfere with the properoperation of the airbags or bepropelled inside the vehicle andhurt someone if the airbags inflate.

If they do, theycould be very seriously injured in acrash.

Carrying hard or sharpobjects on your lap, or driving witha pipe or other sharp object inyour mouth, can result in injuriesif your front airbag inflates.

Devices intended to improveoccupant comfort or reposition theshoulder part of a seat belt canreduce the protective capability ofthe belt and increase the chance ofserious injury in a crash.

If a side airbag or aside curtain airbag inflates, a cupholder or other hard objectattached on or near the door couldbe propelled inside the vehicle andhurt someone.

Keep your hands and arms awayfrom the airbag covers.

Do not attach or place objects onthe front airbag covers.

Two people should never use thesame seat belt.

Do not place hard or sharp objectsbetween yourself and a frontairbag.

Do not put any accessories on seatbelts.

Do not attach hard objects on ornear a door.

Additional Safety Precautions


20

CONTINUED

If you turn the ignition switch to theON (II) position before your seatbelt is fastened, the beeper willsound and the indicator will flash. Ifyour seat belt is not fastened beforethe beeper stops, the indicator stayson without flashing.

If you do not fasten your seat beltwhile driving, the beeper will soundand the indicator will flash again atregular intervals. You will also see a‘‘FASTEN SEAT BELT’’ message onthe multi-information display (seepage ).

The lap/shoulder belt goes overyour shoulder, across your chest,and across your hips.

To unlock the belt, press the redPRESS button on the buckle. Guidethe belt across your body so that itretracts completely. After exiting thevehicle, be sure the belt is out of theway and will not get closed in thedoor.

To fasten the belt, insert the latchplate into the buckle, then tug on thebelt to make sure the buckle islatched (see page for how toproperly position the belt).

All seat belts have an emergencylocking retractor. In normal driving,the retractor lets you move freely inyour seat while it keeps sometension on the belt. During a collisionor sudden stop, the retractorautomatically locks the belt to helprestrain your body.

The seat belt systemincludes an indicator on the

instrument panel and a beeper toremind you and your passengers tofasten your seat belts.

Your seat belt system includes lap/shoulder belts in all five seatingpositions. The front seat belts arealso equipped with automatic seatbelt tensioners and, on models withACC, seat belt e-pretensioners.

17

79

Seat Belt System Components

Lap/Shoulder Belt

Additional Information About Your Seat BeltsD

riverand

Passenger

Safety

21

For added protection, the front seatbelts are equipped with automaticseat belt tensioners. When activated,the tensioners immediately tightenthe belts to help hold the driver anda front passenger in place.

The seat belts in all positions exceptthe driver’s have an additionallocking mechanism that must beactivated to secure a child seat (seepage ).

If the shoulder part of the belt ispulled all the way out, the lockingmechanism will activate. The beltwill retract, but it will not allow thepassenger to move freely.

To deactivate the lockingmechanism, unlatch the buckle andlet the seat belt fully retract. Torefasten the seat belt, pull it out onlyas far as needed.

The tensioners are designed toactivate in any collision severeenough to cause front-airbaginflation.

The tensioners can also be activatedduring a collision in which the frontairbags . In this case, theairbags would not be needed, but theadditional restraint could be helpful.

When the tensioners are activated,the seat belts will remain tight untilthey are unbuckled in the normalmanner.

If the front seat belt tensioners everactivate, they must be replaced asthe belts will no longer retractproperly.

49

do not deploy

Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners

Additional Information About Your Seat Belts

22

On model with Adaptive Cruise Control

CONTINUED

For added safety, the front seat beltsare equipped with thee-pretensioners that work incombination with the collisionmitigation brake system (CMBS) tomaximize the restraining ability ofthe belts. For more information onthe CMBS, see page .

To get the full benefit of thee-pretensioners, you and your frontpassenger must sit normally in yourseats and wear your seat beltsproperly (see page ).

The e-pretensioners do not activatewhen the seat belts are not worn orwhen the VSA off indicator on theinstrument panel is on.

If the automatic seat belt tensionersare activated by a collision, bothfront seat belts and all relatedcomponents must be replaced (seepage ). If only thee-pretensioners were activated, nocomponents need to be replaced.

If your vehicle gets too close to thevehicle ahead of it in your lane, thedriver’s e-pretensioner slightlyretracts the seat belt to alert thedriver of the approaching vehicle. Ifa collision with the vehicle in front ofyou is likely, the e-pretensioners onboth front seats retract the seat beltswith enough force to properlyrestrain you and your frontpassenger. After they activate, thee-pretensioners release the seat belts.

25

17

325


Seat belt E-pretensioners

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

23

In addition, the front passenger’se-pretensioner does not activatewhen the passenger’s airbag isautomatically turned off because theweight sensor detects a child in thefront passenger’s seat.


24

If a seat belt is worn during a crash,it must be replaced by the dealer. Abelt that has been worn during acrash may not provide the same levelof protection in a subsequent crash.

The dealer should also inspect theanchors for damage and replacethem if needed. If the automatic seatbelt tensioners activate during acrash, they must be replaced.

For safety, you should check thecondition of your seat belts regularly.

Pull each belt out fully, and look forfrays, cuts, burns, and wear. Checkthat the latches work smoothly andthe belts retract easily. If a belt doesnot retract easily, cleaning the beltmay correct the problem (see page

). Any belt that is not in goodcondition or working properly willnot provide good protection andshould be replaced as soon aspossible.

Acura provides a lifetime warrantyon seat belts for U.S. models. Seeyourbooklet for details.

379

Acura Warranty Information


Seat Belt Maintenance

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

25

Not checking or maintainingseat belts can result in seriousinjury or death if the seat beltsdo not work properly whenneeded.

Check your seat belts regularlyand have any problemcorrected as soon as possible.

＊

＊

On models with Adaptive Cruise Control:

Airbag System Components

Additional Information About Your Airbags

26

(1) (2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

(8)

(7)

(6)

(4)

(5)

(10)

(9)

(9)

(10) Occupant Position Detection System (OPDS) Sensors

(6) Driver’s Seat Position Sensor(7) Front Passenger’s Seat Weight Sensors(8) Passenger Airbag Off Indicator(9) Side Impact Sensors (First)

(1) Driver’s Airbag(2) Front Passenger’s Airbag(3) Control Unit(4) Front Seat Belt Tensioners/

Seat Belt E-pretensioners(5) Side Airbags

Your airbag system includes:

Two side airbags, one for thedriver and one for a frontpassenger. The airbags are storedin the outer edges of the seat-backs. Both are marked ‘‘SIDEAIRBAG’’ (see page ).

Two side curtain airbags, one foreach side of the vehicle. Theairbags are stored in the ceiling,above the side windows. The frontand rear pillars are marked ‘‘SIDECURTAIN AIRBAG’’ (see page

).

Two SRS (supplemental restraintsystem) front airbags. The driver’sairbag is stored in the center ofthe steering wheel; the frontpassenger’s airbag is stored in thedashboard. Both are marked ‘‘SRSAIRBAG.’’

32

34

CONTINUED

Additional Information About Your AirbagsD

riverand

Passenger

Safety

27

(12)

(15)

(14)

(13)

(11)

(13)

(13) Side Impact Sensors (Second)(14) Rear Safing Sensor(15) Side Curtain Airbags

(11) E-pretensioners Control Unit(12) Front Impact Sensors

An indicator on the instrumentpanel that alerts you that thepassenger’s side airbag has beenturned off (see page ).

An indicator on the dashboard thatalerts you that the passenger’sfront airbag has been turned off(see page ).

Emergency backup power in caseyour vehicle’s electrical system isdisconnected in a crash.

Weight sensors that monitor theweight on the front passenger’sseat. These automatically turn offthe passenger’s front airbag ifthey detect an infant or small childmay be in the seat (see page ).

Automatic front seat belttensioners (see page ).

Sensors that can detect amoderate to severe front impact orside impact.

Sensors that can detect whether achild is in the passenger’s sideairbag path and automatically turnthe airbag off (see page ).

A driver’s seat position sensor thatmonitors the distance of the seatfrom the front airbag. If the seat istoo far forward, the airbag willinflate with less force (see page

).

A sophisticated electronic systemthat continually monitors andrecords information about thesensors, the control unit, theairbag activators, the seat belttensioners, and driver and frontpassenger seat belt use when theignition switch is in the ON (II)position.

Front seat belt e-pretensioners(see page ).

An indicator on the instrumentpanel that alerts you to a possibleproblem with your airbags,sensors, seat belt tensioners (seepage ), or, on models with ACC,seat belt e-pretensioners (see page

).

31

22

35

35

35

35

34

23

23


28

CONTINUED

After inflating, the front airbags willimmediately deflate, so they won’tinterfere with the driver’s visibility,or the ability to steer or operateother controls.

The total time for inflation anddeflation is one-tenth of a second, sofast that most occupants are notaware that the airbags deployed untilthey see them lying in their laps.

During a frontal crash, your seat beltrestrains your lower body and torso,and the front airbag helps protectyour head and chest.

Although both airbags normallyinflate within a split second of eachother, it is possible for only oneairbag to deploy.

This can happen if the severity of acollision is at the margin, orthreshold, that determines whetheror not the airbags will deploy. Insuch cases, the seat belt will providesufficient protection, and thesupplemental protection offered bythe airbag would be minimal.

If you ever have a moderate tosevere frontal collision, sensors willdetect the vehicle’s rapiddeceleration.

If the rate of deceleration is highenough, the control unit will instantlyinflate the driver’s and frontpassenger’s airbags, at the time andwith the force needed.

Only the driver’s airbag will deploy ifthere is no passenger in the frontseat, or if the advanced airbagsystem has turned the passenger’sairbag off (see page ).35


How Your Front Airbags Work

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

29

Your front airbags are also dual-threshold airbags. Airbags with thisfeature have two deploymentthresholds that depend on whetheror not the occupant is wearing a seatbelt.

If the occupant’s belt is ,the airbag will deploy at a slightlylower threshold, because theoccupant would need extraprotection.

Your front airbags are dual-stageairbags. This means they have twoinflation stages that can be ignitedsequentially or simultaneously,depending on crash severity.

In a crash, both stageswill ignite simultaneously to providethe quickest and greatest protection.

In a crash, one stage willignite first, then the second stagewill ignite a split second later. Thisprovides longer airbag inflation timewith a little less force.

After a crash, you may see whatlooks like smoke. This is actuallypowder from the airbag’s surface.Although the powder is not harmful,people with respiratory problemsmay experience some temporarydiscomfort. If this occurs, get out ofthe vehicle as soon as it is safe to doso.

If the occupant’s belt is , theairbag will inflate at a slightly higherthreshold, when the airbag would beneeded to supplement the protectionprovided by the seat belt.


Dual-Threshold Airbags

not latched

Dual-Stage Airbags

more severe

less severe

latched

30

CONTINUED

Your front airbags are also advancedairbags. The main purpose of thisfeature is to help prevent airbag-caused injuries to short drivers andchildren who ride in front.

For both advanced airbags to workproperly:

Occupants must sit upright andwear their seat belts properly.

Do not spill any liquids on orunder the seats, cover the sensors,or put any cargo or metal objectsunder the front seats.

Back-seat passengers should notput their feet under the front seats.

Failure to follow these instructionscould damage the sensors or preventthem from working properly.

The driver’s advanced front airbagsystem includes a seat positionsensor under the seat. If the seat istoo far forward, the airbag willinflate with less force, regardless ofthe severity of the impact.

The passenger’s advanced frontairbag system has weight sensorsunder the seat. If the sensors detectan infant or small child may be in theseat, the system will automaticallyturn the passenger’s front airbag off.

If there is a problem with the sensor,the SRS indicator will come on, andthe airbag will inflate in the normalmanner regardless of the driver’sseating position.


Advanced Airbags

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

31

DRIVER’SSEATPOSITIONSENSOR

PASSENGER’SSEAT WEIGHTSENSOR

If you ever have a moderate tosevere side impact, the sensors willdetect rapid deceleration and signalthe control unit to instantly inflateeither the driver’s or the passenger’sside airbag.

Moving the front seat forciblyback against cargo on the seat orfloor behind it.

Hanging heavy items on the frontpassenger seat, or placing heavyitems in the seat-back pocket.

When the airbag is turned off, anindicator in the center of thedashboard will come on indicatingpassenger airbag ‘‘OFF’’ (see page

).

To ensure that the passenger’sadvanced front airbag system willwork properly,

This includes:

A rear passenger pushing orpulling on the back of the frontpassenger’s seat.

If there is no passenger in the frontseat, the airbag will be off. However,the passenger airbag off indicatorwill not come on.

Also, make sure the floor mat behindthe front passenger’s seat is hookedto the floor mat anchor (see page

). If it is not, the mat mayinterfere with the proper operationof the sensors and operation of theseat.

35

380


How Your Side Airbags Work

do not do anythingthat would increase or decrease theweight on the front passenger’s seat.

32

There will be some delay betweenthe moment the passenger movesinto or out of the airbag deploymentpath and when the indicator comeson or goes off.

A front seat passenger should notuse a cushion or other object as abackrest. It may prevent the cutoffsystem from working properly.

Only one airbag will deploy during aside impact. If the impact is on thepassenger’s side, the passenger’sside airbag will deploy even if thereis no passenger.

To get the best protection from theside airbags, front seat occupantsshould wear their seat belts and situpright and well back in their seats.

To reduce the risk of injury from aninflating side airbag, your vehicle hasan automatic cutoff system for thepassenger’s side airbag.

The side airbag may also shut off if ashort adult leans sideways, or alarger adult slouches and leanssideways into the airbag’sdeployment path.

Objects placed on the frontpassenger seat can also cause theside airbag to be shut off.

If the side airbag off indicator comeson (see page ), have thepassenger sit upright. Once thepassenger is out of the airbag’sdeployment path, the system willturn the airbag back on, and theindicator will go out.Although Acura does not encourage

children to ride in front, this systemis designed to shut off the sideairbag if a child leans into the sideairbag’s path.

35


Side Airbag Cutoff System

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

33

In a moderate to severe side impact,sensors will detect rapid decelerationand signal the control unit toinstantly inflate the side curtainairbag on the driver’s or thepassenger’s side of the vehicle.

If the impact is on the passenger’sside, the passenger’s side curtainairbag will inflate even if there are nooccupants on that side of the vehicle.

To get the best protection from theside curtain airbags, occupantsshould wear their seat belts and situpright and well back in their seats.

If the indicator comes on orflashes on and off while you drive.

If the indicator stays on after theengine starts.

If the SRS indicator does not comeon after you turn the ignitionswitch to the ON (II) position.

The SRS indicator alertsyou to a potential problem

with your airbags, seat belttensioners, or, on models with ACC,seat belt E-pretensioners.

If the indicator comes on at anyother time, or does not come on at all,you should have the system checkedby your dealer. For example:

When you turn the ignition to theON (II) position, this indicatorcomes on briefly then goes off. Thistells you the system is workingproperly.

How Your Side Curtain AirbagsWork

How the SRS Indicator Works


34

SIDE CURTAIN AIRBAG

CONTINUED

This indicator alerts you that thepassenger’s front airbag has beenshut off because weight sensorsdetect an infant or small child maybe in the front passenger’s seat. Itdoes mean there is a problemwith the airbag.

You will also see a ‘‘CHECKAIRBAG SYSTEM’’ message on themulti-information display (see page

). This indicator alertsyou that the

passenger’s side airbag has beenautomatically shut off. It doesmean there is a problem with yourside airbags.

If you see any of these indications,the airbags and seat belt tensionersmay not work properly when youneed them.

When you turn the ignition to theON (II) position, the indicator shouldcome on briefly and go out (see page

). If it does not come on, stays on,or comes on while driving without apassenger in the front seat, you willalso see a ‘‘PASSENGER SIDEAIRBAG OFF’’ message on themulti-information display. Have thesystem checked (see page ).

63

78

78


How the Passenger Airbag OffIndicator Works

How the Side Airbag OffIndicator Works

not

not

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

35

PASSENGER AIRBAG OFF INDICATOR

CanadaU.S.

CanadaU.S.

Ignoring the SRS indicator canresult in serious injury or deathif the airbag systems ortensioners do not work properly.

Have your vehicle checked by adealer as soon as possible ifthe SRS indicator alerts you toa possible problem.

Even if yourairbags do not inflate, your dealershould inspect the driver’s seatposition sensor and the frontpassenger’s weight sensors tomake sure they are operatingproperly.

If no one is riding in the front seat,the airbag will be automatically shutoff. However, the indicator will notcome on.

Your airbag systems are virtuallymaintenance free, and there are noparts you can safely service.However, you must have yourvehicle serviced if:

Any airbagthat has deployed must bereplaced along with the controlunit and other related parts. If afront airbag inflates, the seat belttensioners must also be replaced.

Do not try to remove or replaceany airbag by yourself. This mustbe done by your dealer or aknowledgeable body shop.

Take your vehicle to anauthorized dealer as soon aspossible. If you ignore thisindication, your airbags may notoperate properly.If the indicator comes on with no

passenger in the front, or with anadult in the seat, there may be aproblem with the advanced airbagsystem. Have the vehicle checked byyour dealer as soon as possible.

The passenger airbag off indicatormay also come on and off repeatedlyif total weight on the seat is near theairbag cutoff threshold.

If this happens, have the passengerride properly restrained in a backseat. If the passenger must ride infront, move the seat as far to therear as possible, have the passengersit upright and wear the seat beltproperly.


If your vehicle has a moderate tosevere impact.

An airbag ever inflates.

The SRS indicator alerts you to aproblem.

Airbag Service

36

Together, airbags andseat belts provide the bestprotection.

Tampering could causethe airbags to deploy, possiblycausing very serious injury.

This could make thedriver’s seat position sensor or thefront passenger’s weight sensorsineffective. If it is necessary toremove or modify a front seat toaccommodate a person withdisabilities, first contact AcuraClient Services at 800-382-2238.

Improperly replacingor covering front seat-back coverscan prevent your side airbags frominflating during a side impact.

If water oranother liquid soaks into the seat-back, it can prevent the side airbagcutoff system from workingproperly.


Additional Safety PrecautionsDo not attempt to deactivate yourairbags.

Do not tamper with airbagcomponents or wiring for anyreason.

Do not remove or modify a frontseat without consulting yourdealer.

Do not cover or replace front seat-back covers without consultingyour dealer.

Do not expose the front passenger’sseat-back to liquid.

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

37

－

－－

If you have children, or ever need todrive with a child in your vehicle, besure to read this section. It beginswith important general guidelines,then presents special information forinfants, small children, and largerchildren.

Each year, many children are injuredor killed in vehicle crashes becausethey are either unrestrained or notproperly restrained. In fact, vehicleaccidents are the number one causeof the death of children ages 12 andunder.

To reduce the number of childdeaths and injuries, every state andCanadian province requires thatinfants and children be properlyrestrained when they ride in avehicle.

(see pages ).(see pages ).

Children depend on adults to protectthem. However, despite their bestintentions, many adults do not knowhow to protect childpassengers.

425552

51

properly

Protecting Children General Guidelines

All Children Must Be Restrained

Infants and small children must berestrained in an approved child seatthat is properly secured to thevehicle

Larger children must be restrainedwith a lap/shoulder belt and ride ona booster seat until the seat belt f itsthem properly

38

Children who are unrestrainedor improperly restrained can beseriously injured or killed in acrash.

Any child too small for a seatbelt should be properlyrestrained in a child seat. Alarger child should be properlyrestrained with a seat belt anduse a booster seat if necessary.

－

Front airbags have been designed tohelp protect adults in a moderate tosevere frontal collision. To do this,the passenger’s front airbag is quitelarge, and it can inflate with enoughforce to cause very serious injuries.

Ifthe airbag inflates, it can hit the backof the child seat with enough forceto kill or very seriously injure aninfant.

If the vehicle seat istoo far forward, or the child’s head isthrown forward during a collision, aninflating front airbag can strike thechild with enough force to kill orvery seriously injure a small child.Even though your vehicle has an

advanced front airbag system, whichcan automatically turn thepassenger’s front airbag off (seepage ), please follow theguidelines below.

According to accident statistics,children of all ages and sizes aresafer when they are restrained in aback seat.

Children who ride in back are lesslikely to be injured by strikinginterior vehicle parts during acollision or hard braking. Also,children cannot be injured by aninflating front airbag when they ridein the back.

Whenever possible,larger children should sit in the backseat, on a booster seat if needed, andbe properly restrained with a seatbelt. For more information, see page

.

The National Highway Traffic SafetyAdministration and TransportCanada recommend that all childrenaged 12 and under be properlyrestrained in a back seat. Somestates have laws restricting wherechildren may ride. 35

52

CONTINUED


The Passenger’s Front AirbagCan Pose Serious Risks

All Children Should Sit in a BackSeat

InfantsNever put a rear-facing child seat inthe front seat of a vehicle equippedwith a passenger’s front airbag.

Small ChildrenPlacing a forward-facing child seat inthe front seat of a vehicle equippedwith a passenger’s front airbag canbe hazardous.

Larger ChildrenChildren who have outgrown childseats are also at risk of being injuredor killed by an inflating passenger’sfront airbag.

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

39

－

To remind you of the passenger’sfront airbag hazards, and thatchildren must be properly restrainedin a back seat, your vehicle haswarning labels on the dashboard(U.S. models) and on the front visors.Please read and follow theinstructions on these labels.


U.S. Models

Canadian Models

40

SUN VISOR

SUN VISOR

DASHBOARD

－

Many parents say they prefer to putan infant or small child in the frontpassenger seat so they can watch thechild, or because the child requiresattention.

Placing a child in the front seatexposes the child to hazards in afrontal collision, and paying closeattention to a child distracts thedriver from the important tasks ofdriving, placing both of you at risk.

Your vehicle has a back seat wherechildren can be properly restrained.If you ever have to carry a group ofchildren, and a child must ride infront:

Move the vehicle seat as far to therear as possible (see page ).

Have the child sit upright and wellback in the seat (see page ).

Make sure the seat belt is properlypositioned and secured (see page

).

If a child requires close physicalattention or frequent visual contact,we strongly recommend that anotheradult ride with the child in a backseat. The back seat is far safer for achild than the front.

Place the largest child in the frontseat, provided the child is largeenough to wear the lap/shoulderbelt properly (see page ).

If you are not wearing aseat belt in crash, you could bethrown forward and crush thechild against the dashboard or aseat-back. If you are wearing aseat belt, the child can be tornfrom your arms and be seriouslyhurt or killed.

During a crash, thebelt could press deep into the childand cause serious or fatal injuries.


54

151

54

17


If You Must Drive with SeveralChildren

If a Child Requires CloseAttention

Additional Safety PrecautionsNever hold an infant or child onyour lap.

Never put a seat belt over yourselfand a child.

Never let two children use thesame seat belt.

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

41

－

This can prevent childrenfrom accidentally falling out (seepage ).

Leaving children withoutadult supervision is illegal in moststates and Canadian provinces,and can be very hazardous.

For example, infants and smallchildren left in a vehicle on a hotday can die from heatstroke. Achild left alone with the key in theignition switch can accidentally setthe vehicle in motion, possiblyinjuring themselves or others.

Childrenwho play in vehicles canaccidentally get trapped inside.Teach your children not to play inor around vehicles. Know how tooperate the emergency trunkopener and decide if your childrenshould be shown how to use thisfeature (see page ).

Even very youngchildren learn how to unlockvehicle doors, turn on the ignitionswitch, and open the trunk, whichcan lead to accidental injury ordeath.

An infant must be properlyrestrained in a rear-facing, recliningchild seat until the child reaches theseat maker’s weight or height limitfor the seat, and the child is at leastone year old.

Only a rear-facing child seat providesproper support for a baby’s head,neck, and back.

150

150

Use childproof door locks toprevent children from opening thedoors.

Do not leave children alone in avehicle.

Lock all doors and the trunk whenyour vehicle is not in use.

Keep vehicle keys and remotetransmitters out of the reach ofchildren.

Child Seat Type

Protecting Infants

Protecting Children General Guidelines, Protecting Infants and Small Children

42

Two types of seats may be used: aseat designed exclusively for infants,or a convertible seat used in the rear-facing, reclining mode.

If placedfacing forward, an infant could bevery seriously injured during afrontal collision.

A rear-facing child seat can be placedin any seating position in the backseat, but not in the front.

If the passenger’s front airbaginflates, it can hit the back of thechild seat with enough force to kill orseriously injure an infant.

When properly installed, a rear-facing child seat may prevent thedriver or a front passenger frommoving their seat as far back asrecommended, or from locking theirseat-back in the desired position.

It could also interfere with properoperation of the passenger’sadvanced front airbag system.

In any situation, we stronglyrecommend that you install the childseat directly behind the frontpassenger’s seat, move the seat asfar forward as needed, and leave itunoccupied. Or, you may wish to geta smaller rear-facing child seat.

Protecting Infants and Small Children

Do not put a rear-facing child seat ina forward-facing position.

Child Seat Placement

Never put arear-facing child seat in the frontseat.

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

43

Placing a rear-facing child seatin the front seat can result inserious injury or death during acollision.

Always place a rear-facing childseat in the back seat, not thefront.

A child who is at least 1 year old, andwho fits within the child seat maker’sweight and height limits, should berestrained in a forward-facing,upright child seat.

Of the different seats available, werecommend those that have a five-point harness system as shown.

We also recommend that a smallchild use the child seat as long aspossible, until the child reaches theweight or height limit for the seat.

We strongly recommend placing aforward-facing child seat in a backseat, not the front.

If the vehicle seat is toofar forward, or the child’s head isthrown forward during a collision, aninflating airbag can strike the childwith enough force to cause veryserious or fatal injuries.

Even with advanced front airbags,which can automatically turn thepassenger’s front airbag off (seepage ), a back seat is the safestplace for a small child.

35

Protecting Infants and Small Children

Protecting Small Children

Child Seat Type

Child Seat Placement

Placing a forward-facing child seat inthe front seat of a vehicle equippedwith a passenger’s airbag can behazardous.

44

Conventional child seats must besecured to a vehicle with a seat belt,whereas LATCH-compatible seatsare secured by attaching the seat tohardware built into the two outerseating positions in the back seat.

Since LATCH-compatible child seatsare easier to install and reduce thepossibility of improper installation,we recommend selecting this style.

We also recommend selecting aLATCH-compatible seat with a rigid,rather than a flexible, anchor (seepage ).

In seating positions and vehicles notequipped with LATCH, a LATCH-compatible child seat can be installedusing a seat belt.

If it is necessary to put a forward-facing child seat in the front, movethe vehicle seat as far to the rear aspossible, and be sure the child seat isfirmly secured to the vehicle and thechild is properly strapped in the seat. Whatever type of seat you choose, to

provide proper protection, a childseat should meet threerequirements:

Look for FMVSS213 or CMVSS 213 on the box.

Rear-facing for infants, forward-facing for small children.

When buying a child seat, you needto choose either a conventional childseat, or one designed for use withthe lower anchors and tethers forchildren (LATCH) system.

1.

2.

47

CONTINUED

Protecting Infants and Small Children, Selecting a Child Seat

Selecting a Child Seat

The child seat should meet U.S. orCanadian Motor Vehicle SafetyStandard 213.

The child seat should be of theproper type and size to fit the child.

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

45

Placing a forward-facing childseat in the front seat can resultin serious injury or death if thefront airbag inflates.

If you must place a forward-facing child seat in front, movethe vehicle seat as far back aspossible, and properly restrainthe child.

After selecting a proper child seatand a good place to install the seat,there are three main steps ininstalling the seat:

All child seats must besecured to the vehicle with the lappart of a lap/shoulder belt or withthe LATCH (lower anchors andtethers for children) system. Achild whose seat is not properlysecured to the vehicle can beendangered in a crash.

After installing a childseat, push and pull the seatforward and from side-to-side toverify that it is secure.

A child seat secured with a seat beltshould be installed as firmly aspossible. However, it does not needto be ‘‘rock solid.’’ Some side-to-side

movement can be expected andshould not reduce the child seat’seffectiveness.

If the child seat is not secure, tryinstalling it in a different seatingposition, or use a different style ofchild seat that can be firmly secured.

Before purchasing a conventionalchild seat, or using a previouslypurchased one, we recommend thatyou test the seat in the specificvehicle seating position or positionswhere the seat will be used.

Make sure the child is properlystrapped in the child seataccording to the child seat maker’sinstructions. A child who is notproperly secured in a child seatcan be seriously injured in a crash.

The following pages provideguidelines on how to properly installa child seat. A forward-facing childseat is used in all examples, but theinstructions are the same for rear-facing child seats.

3.

1.

2.

3.

Selecting a Child Seat, Installing a Child Seat

Installing a Child Seat

Properly secure the child seat tothe vehicle.

Make sure the child seat is firmlysecured.

The child seat should fit thevehicle seating position (orpositions) where it will be used.

Secure the child in the child seat.

46

CONTINUED

To install a LATCH-compatible childseat:

Move the seat belt buckle ortongue away from the loweranchors.

Your vehicle is equipped withLATCH (lower anchors and tethersfor children) at the outer rear seats.

Make sure there are no objectsnear the anchors that couldprevent a secure connectionbetween the child seat and theanchors.

Push the rear head restraint tiltbutton on the ceiling console topivot the head restraints down.

The lower anchors are locatedbetween the seat-back and seatbottom, and are to be used only witha child seat designed for use withLATCH.

The location of each lower anchor isindicated by a small button above theanchor point.

1.

2.

3.


Installing a Child Seat withLATCH

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

47

LOWERANCHORS

REAR HEAD RESTRAINT TILT BUTTON

Place the child seat on the vehicleseat, then attach the seat to thelower anchors according to thechild seat maker’s instructions.

Some LATCH-compatible seatshave a rigid-type connector asshown above.

Other LATCH-compatible seatshave a flexible-type connector asshown above.

Whatever type you have, followthe child seat maker’s instructionsfor adjusting or tightening the fit.

Attach the tether strap hook to thetether anchor, then tighten thestrap as instructed by the childseat maker.

Push and pull the child seatforward and from side-to-side toverify that it is secure.

After properly securing the childseat with the lap/shoulder belt(see page ), route the tetherstrap over the head restraint,making sure it is not twisted.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

21


48

RIGID TYPE FLEXIBLE TYPE

TETHER STRAP HOOK

ANCHOR

CONTINUED

When not using the LATCH system,all child seats must be secured to thevehicle with the lap part of a lap/shoulder belt.

With the child seat in the desiredseating position, route the beltthrough the child seat accordingto the seat maker’s instructions,then insert the latch plate into thebuckle.

To activate the lockable retractor,slowly pull the shoulder part of thebelt all the way out until it stops,then let the belt feed back into theretractor.

After the belt has retracted, tug onit. If the belt is locked, you will notbe able to pull it out. If you can pullthe belt out, it is not locked, andyou will need to repeat these steps.

In addition, the lap/shoulder belts inall seating positions except thedriver’s have a locking mechanismthat must be activated to secure achild seat.

1. 2.

3.


Installing a Child Seat with a Lap/Shoulder Belt

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

49

To deactivate the lockingmechanism and remove a child seat,unlatch the buckle, unroute the seatbelt, and let the belt fully retract.

Push and pull the child seatforward and from side-to-side toverify that it is secure enough tostay upright during normal drivingmaneuvers. If the child seat is notsecure, unlatch the belt, allow it toretract fully, then repeat thesesteps.

After confirming that the belt islocked, grab the shoulder part ofthe belt near the buckle, and pullup to remove any slack from thelap part of the belt. Remember, ifthe lap part of the belt is not tight,the child seat will not be secure.

To remove slack, it may help toput weight on the child seat, orpush on the back of the seat whilepulling up on the belt.

5.4.


50

A child seat with a tether can beinstalled in any seating position inthe back seat, using one of theanchorage points shown above.

Since a tether can provide additionalsecurity to the lap/shoulder beltinstallation, we recommend using atether whenever one is required oravailable.

After properly securing the childseat with the lap/shoulder belt(see page ), pivot the headrestraint down (see page ) androute the tether strap over thehead restraint.

Lift the anchor cover, then attachthe tether strap hook to theanchor, making sure the strap isnot twisted.

Tighten the strap according to theseat maker’s instructions.

1.

2.

3.

21152


Installing a Child Seat with aTether

Using the Tether Anchor

Driver

andP

assengerSafety

51

COVER

TETHER STRAPHOOK

ANCHOR

ANCHOR

TETHER ANCHORAGE POINTS

To determine if a lap/shoulder beltproperly fits a child, have the childput on the seat belt, then askyourself:

Does the child sit all the way backagainst the seat?

Do the child’s knees bendcomfortably over the edge of theseat?

When a child reaches therecommended weight or height limitfor a forward-facing child seat, thechild should sit in a back seat on abooster seat and wear a lap/shoulderbelt.

The following pages giveinstructions on how to check properseat belt fit, what kind of boosterseat to use if one is needed, andimportant precautions for a childwho must sit in front.

1.

2.

Checking Seat Belt Fit

Protecting Larger Children

52

Allowing a child age 12 or underto sit in front can result in injuryor death if the passenger’s frontairbag inflates.

If a child must ride in front,move the vehicle seat as farback as possible, use a boosterseat if needed, have the childsit up properly and wear theseat belt properly.

Does the shoulder belt crossbetween the child’s neck and arm?

Is the lap part of the belt as low aspossible, touching the child’sthighs?

Will the child be able to stayseated like this for the whole trip?

If you answer yes to all thesequestions, the child is ready to wearthe lap/shoulder belt correctly. Ifyou answer no to any question, thechild needs to ride on a booster seat. A child who has outgrown a forward-

facing child seat should ride in aback seat and use a booster seatuntil the lap/shoulder belt fits themproperly without the booster.

Some states and provinces alsorequire children to use a booster seatuntil they reach a given age orweight (e.g., 6 years or 60 lbs). Besure to check current laws in thestates or provinces where you intend

to drive.

If a child who uses a booster seatmust ride in front, move the vehicleseat as far back as possible and besure the child is wearing the seatbelt properly.

Booster seats can be high-back orlow-back. Whichever style you select,make sure the booster meets federalsafety standards (see page ) andthat you follow the booster seatmaker’s instructions.

A child may continue using a boosterseat until the tops of their ears areeven with the top of the vehicle’s orbooster’s seat-back. A child of thisheight should be tall enough to usethe lap/shoulder belt without abooster seat.

3.

4.

5.

45

Using a Booster Seat

Protecting Larger ChildrenD

riverand

Passenger

Safety

53

If you decide that a child can safelyride up front, be sure to:

Carefully read the owner’s manual,and make sure you understand allseat belt instructions and all safetyinformation.

Move the vehicle seat to the rear-most position.

Have the child sit up straight, backagainst the seat, and feet on ornear the floor.

Check that the child’s seat belt isproperly and securely positioned.

Supervise the child. Even maturechildren sometimes need to bereminded to fasten the seat beltsor sit properly.

Of course, children vary widely. Andwhile age may be one indicator ofwhen a child can safely ride in front,there are other important factors youshould consider.

If the passenger’s front airbaginflates in a moderate to severefrontal collision, the airbag can causeserious injuries to a child who isunrestrained, improperly restrained,sitting too close to the airbag, or outof position.

A side airbag also poses risks. If anypart of a larger child’s body is in thepath of a deploying side airbag, thechild could receive possibly seriousinjuries.

The National Highway Traffic SafetyAdministration and TransportCanada recommend that all childrenage 12 and under be properlyrestrained in a back seat.

Physically, a child must be largeenough for the lap/shoulder belt toproperly fit (see pages and ). Ifthe seat belt does not fit properly,with or without the child sitting on abooster seat, the child should not sitin front.

To safely ride in front, a child mustbe able to follow the rules, includingsitting properly, and wearing the seatbelt properly throughout a ride.

5217

Protecting Larger Children

Physical Size

Maturity

When Can a Larger Child Sit inFront

54

This could resultin serious neck injuries during acrash.

Devices intended toimprove a child’s comfort orreposition the shoulder part of aseat belt can make the belt lesseffective and increase the chanceof serious injury in a crash.

This couldcause very serious injuries duringa crash. It also increases thechance that the child will slideunder the belt in a crash and beinjured.


Do not let a child wear a seat beltacross the neck.

Do not put any accessories on aseat belt.

Do not let a child put the shoulderpart of a seat belt behind the backor under the arm.

Two children should never use thesame seat belt.

Additional Safety Precautions

Protecting Larger ChildrenD

riverand

Passenger

Safety

55

Your vehicle’s exhaust containscarbon monoxide gas. You shouldhave no problem with carbonmonoxide entering the vehicle innormal driving if you maintain yourvehicle properly.

High levels of carbon monoxide cancollect rapidly in enclosed areas,such as a garage. Do not run theengine with the garage door closed.Even with the door open, run theengine only long enough to move thevehicle out of the garage.

Have the exhaust system inspectedfor leaks whenever:

With the trunk open, airflow can pullexhaust gas into your vehicle’sinterior and create a hazardouscondition. If you must drive with thetrunk open, open all the windows andset the climate control system asshown below.

If you must sit in your parked vehiclewith the engine running, even in anunconfined area, adjust the climatecontrol system as follows:

Select the fresh air mode.Select the mode.Turn the fan on high speed.Set the temperature control to acomfortable setting.

The vehicle is raised for an oilchange.

You notice a change in the soundof the exhaust.

The vehicle was in an accidentthat may have damaged theunderside.

1.2.3.4.

Carbon Monoxide Hazard

56

Carbon monoxide gas is toxic.Breathing it can causeunconsciousness and even killyou.

Avoid any enclosed areas oractivities that expose you tocarbon monoxide.

These labels are in the locationsshown. They warn you of potentialhazards that could cause seriousinjury. Read these labels carefully.

If a label comes off or becomes hardto read (except for the U.S.dashboard label which may beremoved by the owner), contact yourdealer for a replacement.

CONTINUED

U.S. models

Canadian models

U.S. models only

Safety LabelsD

riverand

Passenger

Safety

57

HOOD

DASHBOARD

RADIATOR CAP

U.S. models

Canadian models

U.S. models Canadian models

Safety Labels

58

SUN VISOR DOORJAMBS

This section gives information aboutthe controls and displays thatcontribute to the daily operation ofyour vehicle. All the essentialcontrols are within easy reach.

...........................Control Locations . 60............................Instrument Panel . 61

..........Instrument Panel Indicators . 62.............................................Gauges . 70

...................Temperature Gauge . 70..................................Fuel Gauge . 70

.............Multi-Information Display . 71Controls Near the Steering

.........................................Wheel . 133Windshield Wipers and

.....................................Washers . 134...................................Turn Signal . 136....................................Headlights . 136

................................Fog Lights . 138Adaptive Front Lighting System

.........................................(AFS) . 139...............Hazard Warning Button . 141

......Instrument Panel Brightness . 141...............Rear Window Defogger . 142

......Steering Wheel Adjustments . 143.............................Keys and Locks . 145

......................Immobilizer System . 146..............................Ignition Switch . 147

....................................Door Locks . 148..............................................Trunk . 149

......Emergency Trunk Opener . 150

................Childproof Door Locks . 150...............................................Seats . 151

...........................................Mirrors . 154Driving Position Memory

........................................System . 156................Keyless Access System . 159

..................................Seat Heaters . 174Seat Heaters and Seat

.................................Ventilation . 175............................Power Windows . 177

.......................................Moonroof . 179...............................Parking Brake . 183

.........Interior Convenience Items . 184..................................Glove Box . 185

.....................Beverage Holders . 186.............Console Compartment . 187

..................................Sun Visors . 188........Accessory Power Sockets . 188

...........................Rear Ashtrays . 189..................Front Door Pockets . 189

..............Power Rear Sunshade . 190

..............Integrated Sunshades . 191...............................Interior Lights . 192

Instruments and ControlsInstrum

entsand

Controls

59

＊

＊

Control Locations

60

AUDIO SYSTEM

POWER WINDOWSWITCHES

INSTRUMENT PANELINDICATORSGAUGES

CLIMATE CONTROLSYSTEM

TRUNK RELEASE BUTTONHOOD RELEASE LEVER

DRIVING POSITIONMEMORY SYSTEM

FUEL FILL DOOR RELEASEBUTTON

POWER DOOR LOCKMASTER SWITCH

CEILING CONSOLE

HomeLink BUTTONSMOONROOF SWITCHPOWER REAR

TILT BUTTON

SUNSHADE BUTTON

OnStar BUTTONS

MIRROR CONTROLAUTO BUTTON

AUTOMATICTRANSMISSION

ACCESSORY POWERSOCKETS

REAR HEAD RESTRAINT

(P.62)(P.70)

(P.156)

(P.148)

(P.177)

(P.265)(P.252)(P.179)

(P.190)

(P.152)(P.149)

(P.297)

(P.299)

(P.154)

(P.194)

(P.203)

(P.313)

(P.188)

＊

＊

＊

The U.S. instrument panel is shown. Differences for the Canadian models are noted in the text.:

Instrument PanelInstrum

entsand

Controls

61

SIDE AIRBAG OFFINDICATOR

SEAT BELT REMINDERINDICATOR

CHARGING SYSTEMINDICATOR

KEYLESS ACCESSSYSTEM INDICATOR

LOW OIL PRESSUREINDICATOR

MALFUNCTION INDICATORLAMP

SH-AWD INDICATOR

LOW FUEL INDICATOR

LOW TIRE PRESSURE INDICATOR

CRUISE MAIN INDICATOR

PARKING BRAKE ANDBRAKE SYSTEMINDICATOR

ELECTRONICALLYCONTROLLEDPOWER STEERINGSYSTEM (ECPS)INDICATOR

LIGHTS ON INDICATOR

FOG LIGHT INDICATOR

MULTI-INFORMATIONDISPLAY

MESSAGE INDICATOR

SECURITY SYSTEMINDICATOR

(P.64)

(P.68)

(P.62, 409)

(P.66)

(P.68)

(P.69)

(P.71)

(P.62, 410)

(P.62, 409)

(P.67, 320)

COLLISION MITIGATIONBRAKE SYSTEM (CMBS)INDICATOR (P.69)

(P.66)

(P.67, 394)(P.64)

(P.21, 62)

(P.63, 321)

(P.68)

(P.35, 63)

ANTI-LOCK BRAKESYSTEM (ABS)INDICATOR (P.64, 323)

ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROL (ACC)INDICATOR (P.66, 237)

(P.66) /

(P.34, 63)

ADAPTIVE FRONT LIGHTINGSYSTEM (AFS) INDICATOR (P.69, 139)

IMMOBILIZER SYSTEMINDICATOR

SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM(SRS) INDICATOR

VEHICLE STABILITY ASSIST (VSA)SYSTEM INDICATOR

VSAACTIVATIONINDICATOR(P.339)

(P.66)

HIGH BEAMINDICATOR

(P.65, 339)

The instrument panel has manyindicators to give you importantinformation about your vehicle.

You will also see a ‘‘CHECKEMISSION SYSTEM’’ message onthe multi-information display. Formore information, see page .

The engine can be severely damagedif this indicator flashes or stays onwhen the engine is running, or if a‘‘CHECK ENGINE OIL LEVEL’’message is on the multi-informationdisplay. For more information, seepage .

If this indicator comes on when theengine is running, the battery is notbeing charged, and you will also seea ‘‘CHECK CHARGING SYSTEM’’message on the multi-informationdisplay. For more information, seepage .

If you continue driving withoutfastening your seat belt, the beepersounds and the indicator flashesagain at regular intervals, and youwill also see a ‘‘FASTEN SEATBELT’’ message on the multi-information display (see page ).

For more information, see page .

This indicator comes on when youturn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position. It reminds you and yourpassenger to fasten your seat belts.A beeper also sounds if you have notfastened your seat belt.

If you turn the ignition switch to theON (II) position before fasteningyour belt, the beeper sounds and theindicator flashes. If you do not fastenyour seat belt before the beeperstops, the indicator stops flashingbut remains on.

79

409

409

410

21

Instrument Panel Indicators

Low Oil PressureIndicator

Charging SystemIndicator

Malfunction IndicatorLamp

Seat Belt ReminderIndicator

62

This indicator has two functions:

It comes on when you turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position. It is a reminder to checkthe parking brake. Driving withthe parking brake not fullyreleased can damage the rearbrakes, axles, and tires.If you drive without releasing theparking brake, a chime will sound,and you will also see a ‘‘RELEASEPARKING BRAKE’’ message onthe multi-information display (seepage ).

If it stays on after you have fullyreleased the parking brake whilethe engine is running, or if itcomes on while driving, it canindicate a problem in the brake

system. You will also see a‘‘BRAKE FLUID LOW’’ or‘‘CHECK BRAKE SYSTEM’’message on the multi-informationdisplay (see page ). For moreinformation, see page .

This indicator comes on when youturn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position. If it comes on at anyother time, it indicates that thepassenger’s side airbag hasautomatically shut off. You will alsosee a ‘‘PASSENGER SIDE AIRBAGOFF’’ message on the multi-information display (see page ).For more information, see page .

This indicator comes on briefly whenyou turn the ignition switch to theON (II) position. If it comes on atany other time, it indicates apotential problem with your frontairbags. This indicator will also alertyou to a potential problem with yourside airbags, passenger’s side airbagautomatic cutoff system, side curtainairbags, automatic seat belttensioners, or, on models with ACC,seat belt E-pretensioners. You willalso see a ‘‘CHECK AIRBAGSYSTEM’’ message on the multi-information display (see page ).For more information, see page .

1.

2.

78

78411

7835

3579


Parking Brake and Brake SystemIndicator

Side Airbag Off Indicator

Supplemental RestraintSystem Indicator

Instruments

andC

ontrols

63

U.S. Canada U.S. Canada

This indicator reminds you that theexterior lights are on. It comes onwhen the light switch is in either the

or position. This indicatorwill also come on when the lightswitch is in AUTO and the lightsturn on automatically. If you turn theignition switch to the ACCESSORY(I) or the LOCK (0) position withoutturning off the light switch, thisindicator will remain on. A reminderchime will also sound when you openthe driver’s door.

This indicator comes on for a fewseconds when you turn the ignitionswitch to the ON (II) position. It willthen go off if you have a properly-coded remote. If it is not a properly-coded remote, the indicator will blinkand the engine will not start (seepage ).

This indicator normally comes on fora few seconds when you turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position, and when the ignitionswitch is turned to START (III). Ifthis indicator comes on at any othertime, there is a problem in the ABS.If this happens, take the vehicle toyour dealer to have it checked. Withthis indicator on, your vehicle stillhas normal braking ability but noanti-lock function. You will also see a‘‘CHECK ABS SYSTEM’’ messageon the multi-information display (seepage ). For more information, seepage .If you use the built-in key, this

indicator blinks several times whenyou turn the ignition switch from ON(II) to the ACCESSORY (I) position.

If you use the remote, this indicatorblinks several times when you turnthe ignition switch fromACCESSORY (I) to the LOCK (0)position.

78323

146


Lights On Indicator Immobilizer SystemIndicator

Anti-lock Brake System(ABS) Indicator

64

This indicator normally comes on fora few seconds when you turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position.

This indicator has three functions.

It comes on as a reminder that youhave turned off the vehiclestability assist (VSA) system.

It flashes when VSA is active (seepage ).

This indicator normally comes on fora few seconds when you turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position. For more information, seepage .

The left or right turn signal indicatorblinks when you signal a lane changeor turn. If the indicator does notblink or blinks rapidly, it usuallymeans one of the turn signal bulbs isburned out (see page ). Replacethe bulb as soon as possible, sinceother drivers cannot see that you aresignaling.

When you press the hazard warningbutton, both turn signals blink. Allturn signals on the outside of thevehicle should flash.

It comes on along with the VSAsystem indicator if there is aproblem with the VSA system.You will also see a ‘‘CHECK VSASYSTEM’’ message on the multi-information display (see page ).

If it comes on and stays on at anyother time, or it does not come onwhen you turn the ignition switch tothe ON (II) position, there is aproblem with the VSA system. Youwill also see a ‘‘CHECK VSASYSTEM’’ message on the multi-information display (see page ).Take your vehicle to a dealer to haveit checked. Without VSA, yourvehicle still has normal driving ability,but will not have VSA traction andstability enhancement. For moreinformation, see page .

1.

2.

3.

78

78

374

339

339

339


Vehicle Stability Assist(VSA) System Indicator

VSA Activation Indicator Turn Signal andHazard WarningIndicators

Instruments

andC

ontrols

65

This indicator comes on when youturn on the fog lights. For moreinformation, see page .

This indicator is in the fuel gauge. Itcomes on as a reminder that youmust refuel soon. You will also see a‘‘FUEL LOW’’ message on the multi-information display (see page ).

This indicator comes on with thehigh beam headlights. For moreinformation, see page .

This indicator also comes on withreduced brightness when thedaytime running lights (DRL) are on(see page ).

This indicator comes on when youturn on the cruise control system bypressing the CRUISE button on thesteering wheel (see page ).


When you push the ACC button onthe steering wheel, this indicatorcomes on green. You will also see‘‘ACC’’ on the multi-informationdisplay.

If the indicator comes on orange,there is a problem with the ACCsystem. You will also see a ‘‘CHECKACC SYSTEM’’ message on themulti-information display (see page

). Take your vehicle to yourdealer to have it checked. For moreinformation, see page .

138

136

234

79

237

79

134


Fog Light Indicator Low Fuel Indicator

High Beam Indicator

Cruise Main Indicator

Adaptive Cruise Control(ACC) Indicator

66

LOW FUEL INDICATOR

Pull to the side of the road when it issafe, shift to Park, and let the engineidle until the indicator goes out.This indicator normally comes on for

a few seconds when you turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position. If this indicator comes on atany other time, there is a problem inthe SH-AWD system. You will alsosee a ‘‘CHECK SH-AWD SYSTEM’’message on the multi-informationdisplay (see page ). Take yourvehicle to a dealer to have it checked.For more information, see page .

If it comes on while driving, itindicates the differentialtemperature is too high.You will also see a ‘‘SH-AWD DIFFTEMP. HIGH’’ message on themulti-information display (see page

).

If the indicator blinks while driving,pull to the side of the road when it issafe, shift to Park, and let the engineidle until the indicator goes out.


You will also see a ‘‘CHECK TIREPRESSURE’’ message on the multi-information display (see page ).

If it comes on while driving, itindicates that one or more of yourvehicle’s tires are extremely low onpressure.

If this happens, pull to the side of theroad when it is safe, check which tirehas lost pressure on the multi-information display, and determinethe cause. If it is because of a flat tire,have the flat tire repaired as soon aspossible. If two or more tires areunderinflated, call a professionaltowing service. For moreinformation, see page .

Your vehicle has Michelin PAX tires.Repair or replacement of PAX tiresmust be done by an Acura dealer oran authorized Michelin PAX systemdealer. For more information, seepage .

78

320

7879

394

421

On models with Michelin PAX system

SH-AWD Indicator

Low Tire PressureIndicator

Instrument Panel IndicatorsInstrum

entsand

Controls

67

Continuing to drive with the SH-AWDindicator blinking may cause seriousdamage to the system.

This indicator normally comes onwhen you turn the ignition to the ON(II) position and goes off after theengine starts. If it comes on at anyother time, there is a problem withthe power steering system. You willalso see a ‘‘CHECK POWERSTEERING SYSTEM’’ message onthe multi-information display (seepage ). If this happens, stop thevehicle in a safe place, and turn offthe engine. Reset the system byrestarting the engine, and watch thisindicator. If it does not go off orcomes back on again while driving,take the vehicle to your dealer tohave it checked. With the indicatoron, the ECPS is turned off, whichcould make the vehicle harder tosteer.

This indicator comes on when thereis a system message in the multi-information display. Press the INFObutton on the steering wheel (seepage ) to see the message (seepage ).

Most of the time, this indicatorcomes on along with other indicatorsin the instrument panel such as theseat belt reminder indicator, SRSindicator, VSA system indicator, etc.

This indicator normally comes on fora few seconds when you turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position. If it comes on at any othertime, it indicates that there is aproblem with the system. You willalso see a ‘‘CHECK KEYLESSACCESS SYSTEM’’ message on themulti-information display (see page

). For more information, see page.

The indicator comes on when yourun the engine while the vehicle isnot moving. To turn the indicator off,

restart the engine.

7879

71

172

78


Message IndicatorElectronically ControlledPower Steering System(ECPS) Indicator Keyless Access System

Indicator

68

This indicator comes on when thesecurity system is set. For moreinformation, see page .


It comes on as a reminder that youhave turned off the adaptive frontlighting system (AFS).

This indicator blinks when there is aproblem with the AFS system; youwill also see a ‘‘CHECK ADAPTIVEFRONT LIGHTING SYSTEM’’message on the multi-informationdisplay (see page ). If thishappens, stop the vehicle in a safeplace, turn the ignition switch to theACCESSORY (I) or the LOCK (0)position, and restart the engine. Ifthe indicator does not go off orblinks again, take your vehicle to adealer to have it checked. For moreinformation, see page .

This indicator normally comes on fora few seconds when you turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position. It also comes on as areminder that you have turned off

the collision mitigation brake system(CMBS).

The CMBS indicator also comes onif dirt or other debris blocks theradar sensor in the front grille.When you clean the radar sensor,the indicator should go off the nexttime you turn the ignition switch tothe ON (II) position.

If the indicator comes on at anyother time, there is a problem withthe CMBS. You will also see a‘‘CHECK CMBS SYSTEM’’ messageon the multi-information display. Ifthis happens, take your vehicle to adealer, and have it checked. Formore information, see page .When this indicator is on, the CMBSis not working.

23378

325

139

Adaptive Front LightingSystem (AFS) Indicator

Security System Indicator

Collision MitigationBrake System (CMBS)Indicator

Instrument Panel IndicatorsInstrum

entsand

Controls

69

SECURITY SYSTEM INDICATOR

This shows the temperature of theengine’s coolant. During normaloperation, the pointer should risefrom the bottom white mark to aboutthe middle of the gauge. In severedriving conditions, such as very hotweather or a long period of uphilldriving, the pointer may rise to the

upper end of the white section of thegauge. If it reaches the red (hot)mark, pull safely to the side of theroad. For more information, see page

.

This shows how much fuel youhave. It may show slightly moreor less than the actual amount.The needle returns to thebottom after you turn off theignition.

406

Gauges

Temperature Gauge

Fuel Gauge

70

U.S. model is shown.

TACHOMETER TEMPERATURE GAUGESPEEDOMETER

FUEL GAUGE

Avoid driving with an extremely lowf uel level. Running out of f uel couldcause the engine to misf ire, damagingthe catalytic converter.

▲ ▼

The multi-information display in theinstrument panel displays variousinformation and messages when theignition switch is in the ON (II)position. Some of the messages helpyou operate your vehicle morecomfortably.Others help to keep you aware of theperiodic maintenance your vehicleneeds for continued trouble-freedriving.

You can change the display andcustomize your vehicle controlsettings by pressing the SEL/RESETor INFO buttons on the right side ofthe steering wheel.

With the ignition switch in the ON(II) position, the lower part of themulti-information display changes asshown in the illustration, each timeyou press the SEL/RESET button.

When you open the driver’s door, a‘‘Welcome’’ message is shown on themulti-information display. When youturn the ignition switch from the ON(II) position to the ACCESSORY (I)position, a ‘‘Goodbye’’ message isshown on the display.

Multi-Information DisplayInstrum

entsand

Controls

71

SELRESETBUTTON

U.S. CANADA

INFO ( / )BUTTONS

The odometer shows the totaldistance your vehicle has beendriven. It measures miles in U.S.models and kilometers in Canadianmodels. It is illegal under U.S.federal law and Canadian provincialregulations to disconnect, reset, oralter the odometer with the intent tochange the number of miles orkilometers indicated.

This meter shows the number ofmiles (U.S.) or kilometers (Canada)driven since you last reset it. Thereare two trip meters: Trip A and TripB. Each trip meter worksindependently, so you can keep trackof two different distances.

To reset a trip meter, display it, thenpress and hold the SEL/RESETbutton until the number resets to‘‘0.0’’.

When you reset Trip A, average fueleconomy A is reset at the same time.When you reset Trip B, average fueleconomy B is reset.

In the customizing mode, you can setTrip A and average fuel economy Ato reset at the same time when yourefuel your vehicle (see page ).96

Multi-Information Display

Odometer Trip Meter

72

ODOMETER

TRIP METER

This shows the outside Fahrenheittemperature in U.S. models, andCentigrade temperature in Canadianmodels.

The temperature sensor is in thefront bumper. The temperaturereading can be affected by heatreflection from the road surface,engine heat, and the exhaust fromsurrounding traffic. This can causean incorrect temperature readingwhen your speed is under19 mph (30 km/h). When you startyour trip, the sensor is not fullyacclimatized, therefore it may takeseveral minutes until the propertemperature is displayed.

In certain weather conditions,temperature readings near freezing(32°F, 0°C) could mean that ice isforming on the road surface.

This shows the remaining life of theengine oil. It shows 100% after theengine oil is replaced and the displayis reset. The engine oil life iscalculated based on engine operatingconditions and accumulated enginerevolutions. For more information,see page .

You can adjust the outsidetemperature display (see page ).94

349

Outside Temperature Engine Oil Life


entsand

Controls

73

OUTSIDE TEMPERATURE

U.S.

CANADA

ENGINE OIL LIFE

▼ ▲

▼

With the ignition switch in the ON(II) position, the upper part of thedisplay changes, as shown in theillustration, each time you press the

button. If you press the button,the display returns to the previousmessage.


74

U.S. CANADA If ON

Press buttonPress button

Along with the trip meter, the tripcomputer calculates these values:

Range is the estimated distance youcan travel on the fuel remaining inthe tank. This distance is estimatedfrom the fuel economy you receivedover the last several miles, so it willvary with changes in speed, traffic,etc.

When you turn the ignition switch tothe LOCK (0) position, ELAPSEDTIME is reset.When Trip A is reset, average fuel

economy A is reset at the same time.When Trip B is reset, average fueleconomy B is reset at the same time.

Instant Fuel EconomyRange

Average Vehicle SpeedElapsed Time

Average Fuel Economy

To change the ‘‘ELAPSED TIMERESET’’ setting, see page .98

Trip Computer


entsand

Controls

75

This monitor shows how muchtorque is being delivered to eachwheel. For more information, seepage .

When the tire pressure monitor isshown on the multi-informationdisplay, press the SEL/RESETbutton. The display changes asshown.You can see the pressure of each tirein this monitor. If one or more tiresare low, inflate them to the correctpressure. For more information, seepage .

320

335


SH-AWD Torque DistributionMonitor

Tire Pressure Monitor

76

U.S.

Canada

You can receive or make phone callsfrom your cell phone through yourAcura’s HandsFreeLink (HFL)system without touching your cellphone.

When the engine oil life reaches 15 %,the display shows ‘‘SERVICE DUESOON’’ and the code for themaintenance items to be performed.

Have your dealer do the indicatedmaintenance as soon as you see thismessage, and have them reset thedisplay after completing the service.

If you do not perform the indicatedmaintenance or do not reset thedisplay, the message changes to‘‘SERVICE PAST DUE’’ when theengine oil life becomes 0 percent.

To use the system, your cell phoneand the HFL system must be linked.Not all cell phones are compatiblewith this system. Refer to page

for instructions on how to linkyour cell phone to the HFL and howto receive or make phone calls.

These messages appear on the multi-information display each time youturn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position.

For details on engine oil life andmaintenance messages, refer to page

.

Also refer to page for importantmaintenance safety precautions.

When the engine oil life reaches 5 %,the display shows ‘‘SERVICE DUENOW’’ along with the samemaintenance items.

349

348

278

HandsFreeLink Maintenance Messages


entsand

Controls

77

TM

When a problem is detected withyour vehicle, a message will beshown on the multi-informationdisplay.If this happens, refer to theapplicable pages of this owner’smanual, and follow the instructions.

When there are several messages tobe shown, the system switches themessages every 5 seconds.The message is shown until youpush the INFO button.To see the message again, press theINFO button, 5 seconds after thedisplay disappears.

Here is a list of messages shown onthe multi-information display:

See page63, 411

See page411

See page62, 409

See page62, 410

See page62, 409

See page312

See page408

See page65, 339

See page69, 139

See page68

See page67, 320

See page34, 63

See page312

See page64, 323


Message Display

78

CONTINUED

See page13

See page35, 63

See page170

See page171

See page368

See page250

See page62

See page298

See page66

See page349

See page335

See page337

See page67, 337

See page394

See page394

See page394

See page147

See page138

See page172

See page325

See page69, 325


entsand

Controls

79

U.S.

Canada

See page147


80

▲ ▼▲ ▼With the multi-information display

and the INFO ( / ) and SEL/RESET buttons on the right side ofthe steering wheel, you cancustomize some vehicle controlsettings for ‘‘DRIVER 1’’ or‘‘DRIVER 2’’. If ‘‘DRIVER 1’’ or‘‘DRIVER 2’’ is not displayed,customizing is not possible.

To have the driver’s ID detected,make sure your remote is linked tothe system (see

on page ). Then use yourremote to unlock the doors (see

on page).

To enter the customizing mode,press and hold the INFO ( / )button for more than 3 seconds whilethe multi-information display is in itsnormal mode.

If you turn the ignition switch to theACCESSORY (I) or the LOCK (0)position, or move the shift lever outof Park, the display will change tothe normal screen.

When the multi-informationdisplay does not show the driver’sID.

The first customizing menu is:CHG SETTING (see page )

If you disconnect the battery, andthen do not unlock the door.

When the keyless memorysettings are off (see page ). DEFAULT ALL (see page )

You cannot customize the settingsunder these conditions:

To change the settings, the ignitionswitch must be in the ON (II)position, and the vehicle must bestopped with the transmission inPark.

8284

166100

105

CONTINUED

Customized Settings

Memory PositionLink

Keyless Access Setup


entsand

Controls

81

▲ ▼

▲ ▼

Use the INFO ( / ) button on thesteering wheel to select the settingsand the SEL/RESET button to enteryour selections.

If you want the settings as they werewhen the vehicle left the factory,select DEFAULT ALL, as describedon this page.

If you want to set the default setting,press the INFO ( / ) button toselect DEFAULT ALL, then pressthe SEL/RESET button.

If you want to cancel DEFAULTALL, select CANCEL, then press theSEL/RESET button. The screengoes back to CUSTOMIZE ENTRY.

If you want to change any vehiclecontrol settings, select ‘‘CHGSETTING,’’ then press the SEL/RESET button.


DEFAULT ALL

82

To set the default settings again,select DEFAULT ALL, and press theSEL/RESET button. Then selectSET, and press the SEL/RESETbutton.

When DEFAULT ALL is set, you willsee the above display for severalseconds, then the screen returns toCUSTOMIZE ENTRY.

If DEFAULT ALL is not set, you willsee the above display for severalseconds, then the screen goes backto the normal message mode. Repeatthe procedure to select DEFAULTALL.


entsand

Controls

83

▲▼

▲ ▼

You can customize some of thevehicle control settings to yourpreference. Here are the settingsyou can customize:

While the multi-information displayis in the CUSTOMIZE ENTRYscreen, press the SEL/RESETbutton. The screen changes to theinitial CUSTOMIZE GROUP display.

METER SET UP

ADAPTIVE CRUISE CONTROLSETUP

Each time you press the INFO ( /) button, the screen changes as

shown on the next page. Press theINFO ( / ) button, until you seethe setup you want to customize,then press the SEL/RESET buttonto enter your selection.

POSITION SET UPLIGHTING SET UPDOOR/WINDOW SET UPWIPER SET UP


Customize Settings

84

▲ ▼


entsand

Controls

85

Press the or button.Press the SEL/RESET button.

ADAPTIVE CRUISECONTROL SET UPsee page 86

METER SETUPsee page 91

POSITIONSET UPsee page 100

KEYLESSACCESS SET UPsee page 105

LIGHTINGSET UPsee page 112

DOOR/WINDOWSET UPsee page 119

WIPER SETUPsee page 130

▲ ▼

▲▼

▲ ▼

▲ ▼

If equippedHere are the two custom settings foradaptive cruise control (ACC):

PRE-RUNNING CAR DETECTBEEPACC DISPLAY SPEED UNIT

While the multi-information displayis in the CUSTOMIZE GROUPscreen, select ACC SETUP bypressing the INFO ( / ) button,then press the SEL/RESET button.

Each time you press the INFO ( /) button, the display changes as

shown in the illustration. Press theINFO ( / ) button until you seethe setting you want to customize,then press the SEL/RESET buttonto enter your selection.


Adaptive Cruise Control Setup

86


see page 87

see page 89

▲ ▼

While the multi-information displayis in the ACC SETUP of theCUSTOMIZE GROUP, press theSEL/RESET button. The screenchanges to the above display.

Press the SEL/RESET button. Thescreen changes as shown above.Select ON or OFF by pressing theINFO ( / ) button, then press theSEL/RESET button to enter yourselection.

When PRE-RUNNING CARDETECT BEEP is set to ON, onebeep sounds when the ACC detects avehicle in front of you. You also heara beep when that vehicle goes out ofthe range of your vehicle’s radarsensor.

CONTINUED


Pre-Running Car Detect Beep

Instruments

andC

ontrols

87

▲ ▼

When your choice is set, the displaychanges to the screen shown abovefor several seconds, and then goesback to CUSTOMIZE ENTRY.

If you choice is not set, you will seethe above display for several seconds,then the screen goes back toCUSTOMIZE ENTRY. If thishappens, you need to repeat the pre-running car detect beep setup.

To exit PRE-RUNNING CARDETECT BEEP without changingthe current setting, select EXIT bypressing the INFO ( / ) button,then press the SEL/RESET button.The screen goes back toCUSTOMIZE MENU.


88

▲ ▼▲ ▼

While the multi-information displayis in the ACC SETUP of theCUSTOMIZE GROUP, press theSEL/RESET button. The screenchanges to CUSTOMIZE MENU.Press the INFO ( / ) button untilyou see the above display.

Press the SEL/RESET button. Thescreen changes as shown above. Thehighlighted unit, mph or km/h, isthe current setting. To change thesetting, press the INFO ( / )button until the unit you want ishighlighted, then press the SEL/RESET button.

To change the unit of measurementfrom mph to km/h, do this:

CONTINUED


Adaptive Cruise Control DisplaySpeed Unit

Instruments

andC

ontrols

89

▲ ▼

When your choice is set, you will seethe above display for several seconds,then the screen goes back toCUSTOMIZE ENTRY.

If your choice is not set, you will seethe above display for several seconds,then the screen goes back toCUSTOMIZE ENTRY. If thishappens, you need to repeat the ACCdisplay speed unit setup.

To exit ACC DISPLAY SPEEDUNIT without changing the currentsetting, select EXIT by pressing theINFO ( / ) button, then press theSEL/RESET button. The screengoes back to CUSTOMIZE MENU.


90

▲ ▼

▲▼

▲ ▼▲ ▼

CONTINUED

LANGUAGE SELECTIONADJUST OUTSIDE TEMP.DISPLAYTRIP A & AVG. FUEL A RESETwith REFUEL

Here are the four custom settingsfor the meter setup:

ELAPSED TIME RESET

While the multi-information displayis in the CUSTOMIZE GROUPscreen, select METER SETUP bypressing the INFO ( / ) button,and then press the SEL/RESETbutton.




Meter Setup

Instruments

andC

ontrols

91


see page 92

see page 98

see page 96

see page 94

▲ ▼

There are three language selectionsyou can make: English, French, andSpanish. To choose the language youwant, follow these instructions:

While the multi-information displayis in the meter setup of theCUSTOMIZE GROUP, press theSEL/RESET button. The screenchanges to the above display.

Select the desired language bypressing the INFO ( / ) button,then enter your selection by pressingthe SEL/RESET button.


Language Selection

92

▲ ▼

If your choice is not set, you will seethe above display for several seconds,then screen goes back toCUSTOMIZE ENTRY. If thishappens, you need to repeat thelanguage selection setup.

To exit LANGUAGE SELECTIONwithout changing the current setting,select EXIT by pressing the INFO( / ) button, then press the SEL/RESET button. The screen goesback to CUSTOMIZE MENU.


All messages in the multi-information display will be shown inthe language you selected.

CONTINUED


entsand

Controls

93

▲ ▼▲

▼

While the multi-information displayis in the METER SETUP of theCUSTOMIZE GROUP, press theSEL/RESET button. The screenchanges to CUSTOMIZE MENU.Press the INFO ( / ) button untilyou see the above display.

Press the SEL/RESET button. Thescreen changes as shown above. Thehighlighted number is the currentsetting above or below the outsidetemperature. Press the INFO ( /

) button repeatedly until thenumber you want appears, thenpress the SEL/RESET button toenter your selection.

If you sometimes find that thetemperature reading is a fewdegrees above or below the actualtemperature, you can adjust it byfollowing these instructions:


Adjust Outside Temp. Display

94

▲ ▼

If your choice is not set, you will seethe above display for several seconds,then the screen goes back toCUSTOMIZE ENTRY. If thishappens, you need to repeat theadjust outside air temperaturedisplay setup.


To exit ADJUST OUTSIDE TEMP.DISPLAY without changing thecurrent setting, select EXIT bypressing the INFO ( / ) button,then press the SEL/RESET button.The screen goes back toCUSTOMIZE MENU.

CONTINUED


entsand

Controls

95

▲ ▼

▲ ▼


To cause trip A and average fueleconomy A to reset every time yourefuel your vehicle, follow theseinstructions:



Trip A & Avg. Fuel Reset with Refuel

96

▲ ▼

To exit TRIP A & AVG. FUEL ARESET with REFUEL withoutchanging the current setting, selectEXIT by pressing the INFO ( / )button, then press the SEL/RESETbutton. The screen goes back toCUSTOMIZE MENU.


If your choice is not set, you will seethe above display for several seconds,then the screen goes back toCUSTOMIZE ENTRY. If thishappens, you need to repeat the tripA and average fuel reset with refuelsetup.

CONTINUED


entsand

Controls

97

▲ ▼

－

－

－

▲ ▼


IGN OFF The elapsed time isreset when you turn the ignitionswitch to the LOCK (0) position.

TRIP A The elapsed time is resetwhen the Trip A is reset.

TRIP B The elapsed time is resetwhen the Trip B is reset.

Press the SEL RESET button. Thescreen changes as shown above.Select the desired setting bypressing the INFO ( / ) button,then press the SEL/RESET buttonto enter your selection.

There are three elapsed time resetchoice you can make:


Elapsed Time Reset

98

▲ ▼


To exit ELAPSED TIME RESETwithout changing the current setting,select EXIT by pressing the INFO( / ) button, then press the SEL/RESET button. The screen goesback to CUSTOMIZE MENU.

If you choice is not set, you will seethe above display for several seconds,then the screen goes back toCUSTOMIZE ENTRY. If thishappens, you need to repeat theelapsed time reset setup.


entsand

Controls

99

▲ ▼

▲▼

▲ ▼

▲ ▼

There are two position setups youcan make:

MEMORY POSITION LINKAUTO TILT & TELESCOPIC

While the multi-information displayis in the CUSTOMIZE GROUPscreen, select POSITION SETUP bypressing the INFO ( / ) button,and then press the SEL/RESETbutton.




Position Setup

100


see page 101

see page 103

▲ ▼

When Memory Position Link is setto ON, the driver’s seat, the steeringwheel, and the outside mirrorpositions move to the positionsstored in memory. To cause thememory to activate, open the driver’sdoor with the remote, or grab thedoor handle while carrying theremote.

To set the seat memory position, seepage . For information on usingthe remote, see page . While the multi-information display

is in the POSITION SETUP screenof the CUSTOMIZE GROUP, pressthe SEL/RESET button. The screenchanges to the above display.


166156

CONTINUED


Memory Position Link

Instruments

andC

ontrols

101

▲ ▼

To exit MEMORY POSITION LINKwithout changing the current setting,select EXIT by pressing the INFO( / ) button, then press the SEL/RESET button. The screen goesback to CUSTOMIZE MENU.


If your choice is not set, you will seethe above display for several seconds,then the screen goes back toCUSTOMIZE ENTRY. If thishappens, you need to repeat thememory position link setup.


102

▲ ▼

▲ ▼

When AUTO TILT TELESCOPIC isset to ON, the steering wheelautomatically moves fully in and upwhen you turn the ignition switch tothe LOCK (0) position and release it,or when you remove the built-in keyfrom the ignition switch.

While the multi-information displayis in the POSITION SETUP screenof the CUSTOMIZE GROUP, pressthe SEL/RESET button. The screenchanges to CUSTOMIZE MENU.Press the INFO ( / ) button untilyou see the above display.


CONTINUED


Auto Tilt & Telescopic

Instruments

andC

ontrols

103

▲ ▼

To exit AUTO TILT &TELESCOPIC without changing thecurrent setting, select EXIT bypressing the INFO ( / ) button,then press the SEL/RESET button.The screen goes back toCUSTOMIZE MENU.


If your choice is not set, you will seethe above display for several seconds,then the screen goes back toCUSTOMIZE ENTRY. If thishappens, you need to repeat the autotilt and telescopic setup.


104

▲▼

▲ ▼

▲▼

▲ ▼

CONTINUED

DOOR UNLOCK MODEKEYLESS ACCESSLIGHT FLASHKEYLESS ACCESS BEEP


shown in the illustration. Press theINFO ( / ) button, until you seethe setting you want to customize,then press the SEL/RESET buttonto enter your selection.

There are three settings in thekeyless access setup:

While the multi-information displayis in the CUSTOMIZE GROUPscreen, select KEYLESS ACCESSSETUP by pressing the INFO ( /

) button, then press the SEL/RESET button.


KEYLESS ACCESS Setup

Instruments

andC

ontrols

105


see page 106

see page 108

see page 110

▲ ▼

To select whether the driver’s dooror all doors unlock when you openthe driver’s door with the remote orby grabbing the door handle (whilecarrying the remote), follow theseinstructions:

While the multi-information displayis in the KEYLESS ACCESS SETUPscreen of the CUSTOMIZE GROUP,press the SEL/RESET button. Thescreen changes to the above display.

Press the SEL/RESET button. Thescreen changes as shown above.Select DRIVER DOOR ONLY orALL DOORS by pressing the INFO( / ) button, then press the SEL/RESET button to enter yourselection.


Door Unlock Mode

106

▲ ▼

To exit DOOR UNLOCK MODEwithout changing the current setting,select EXIT by pressing the INFO( / ) button, then press the SEL/RESET button. The screen goesback to CUSTOMIZE MENU.


If your choice is not set, you will seethe above display for several seconds,then the screen goes back toCUSTOMIZE ENTRY. If thishappens, you need to repeat the doorunlock mode setup.

CONTINUED


entsand

Controls

107

▲ ▼

▲ ▼

When KEYLESS ACCESS LIGHTFLASH is set to ON, some exteriorlights blink twice when you unlockthe doors by grabbing the driver’sdoor handle while carrying theremote.

While the multi-information displayis in the KEYLESS ACCESS SETUPscreen of the CUSTOMIZE GROUP,press the SEL/RESET button. Thescreen changes to CUSTOMIZEMENU. Press the INFO ( / )button until you see the abovedisplay.

The same exterior lights blink oncewhen you lock the doors by touchingthe door lock sensor while carryingthe remote.



Keyless Access Light Flash

108

▲ ▼

To exit KEYLESS ACCESS LIGHTFLASH without changing thecurrent setting, select EXIT bypressing the INFO ( / ) button,then press the SEL/RESET button.The screen goes back toCUSTOMIZE MENU.


If your choice is not set, you will seethe above display for several seconds,then the screen goes back toCUSTOMIZE ENTRY. If thishappens, you need to repeat thekeyless access light flash setup.

CONTINUED


entsand

Controls

109

▲ ▼

▲ ▼

When KEYLESS ACCESS BEEP isset to ON, the beeper sounds twicewhen you unlock the doors bygrabbing the drivers door handlewhile carrying the remote.

When you lock the doors bytouching the door lock sensor whilecarrying the remote, the beepersounds once.

While the multi-information displayis in the KEYLESS ACCESS SETUPscreen of the CUSTOMIZE GROUP,press the SEL/RESET button. Thescreen changes to CUSTOMIZEMENU. Press the INFO ( / )button until you see the abovedisplay.



Keyless Access Beep

110

▲ ▼

To exit KEYLESS ACCESS BEEPwithout changing the current setting,select EXIT by pressing the INFO( / ) button, then press the SEL/RESET button. The screen goesback to CUSTOMIZE MENU.


If your choice is not set, you will seethe above display for several seconds,then the screen goes back toCUSTOMIZE ENTRY. If thishappens, you need to repeat thekeyless access beep setup.


entsand

Controls

111

▲ ▼

▲▼

▲ ▼

▲ ▼

There are three settings in thelighting setup:

INTERIOR LIGHTDIMMING TIME

While the multi-information displayis in the CUSTOMIZE GROUPscreen, select LIGHTING SETUP bypressing the INFO ( / ) button,then press the SEL/RESET button.

AUTO LIGHT SENSITIVITYHEADLIGHT AUTO OFF TIMER




Lighting Setup

112


see page 113

see page 115

see page 117

▲ ▼

While the multi-information displayis in the LIGHTNING SETUP screenof the CUSTOMIZE GROUP, pressthe SEL/RESET button. The screenchanges to the above display.

Press the SEL/RESET button. Thescreen changes as shown above.Select how long you want the lightsto stay on before they fade out (60,30, or 15 seconds) by pressing theINFO ( / ) button, then press theSEL/RESET button to enter yourselection.

The interior lights fade out when youclose all doors and the trunk. Tochange how long the lights stay onbefore they fade out, follow theseinstructions:

CONTINUED


Interior Light Dimming Time

Instruments

andC

ontrols

113

▲ ▼


If your choice is not set, you will seethe above display for several seconds,then the screen goes back toCUSTOMIZE ENTRY. If thishappens, you need to repeat theinterior light dimming time setup.

To exit INTERIOR LIGHTDIMMING TIME without changingthe current setting, select EXIT bypressing the INFO ( / ) button,then press the SEL/RESET button.The screen goes back toCUSTOMIZE MENU.


114

▲ ▼ ▲ ▼

The headlights, parking lights, sidemarker lights, taillights, and licenseplate light go off after the selectedtime when you close the driver’sdoor and take the remote with you.To change how long the lights stayon before they go off, follow theseinstructions:

While the multi-information displayis in the LIGHTING SETUP screenof the CUSTOMIZE GROUP, pressthe SEL/RESET button. The screenchanges to CUSTOMIZE MENU.Press the INFO ( / ) button untilyou see the above display.

Press the SEL/RESET button. Thescreen changes as shown above.Select how long you want the lightsto stay on before they go off (60, 30,or 15 seconds) by pressing the INFO( / ) button, then press the SEL/RESET button to enter yourselection.

CONTINUED


Headlight Auto Off Timer

Instruments

andC

ontrols

115

▲ ▼

To exit HEADLIGHT AUTO OFFTIMER without changing thecurrent setting, select EXIT bypressing the INFO ( / ) button,then press the SEL/RESET button.The screen goes back toCUSTOMIZE MENU.


If your choice is not set, you will seethe above display for several seconds,then the screen goes back toCUSTOMIZE ENTRY. If thishappens, you need to repeat theheadlight auto off timer setup.


116

－

－

－

－

－

▲ ▼

▲ ▼

MAXThe headlights come on when it isbright.HIGHThe headlights come on when it issomewhat bright.MIDThe headlights come on when it is asbright as sunset or sunrise.LOWThe headlights come on when it issomewhat dark.MINThe headlights come on when it isdark.

While the multi-information displayis in the LIGHTING SETUP screenof the CUSTOMIZE GROUP, pressthe SEL/RESET button. The screenchanges to CUSTOMIZE MENU.Press the INFO ( / ) button untilyou see the above display.

Press the SEL/RESET button. Thescreen changes as shown above.Select from five levels of sensitivityby pressing the INFO ( / ) button,then press the SEL/RESET buttonto enter your selection.

The headlights automatically comeon when the headlight switch is inthe AUTO position and the ambientlight reaches a changeable level. Youcan select the auto light sensitivityfrom following five levels:

CONTINUED


Auto Light Sensitivity

Instruments

andC

ontrols

117

▲ ▼

To exit AUTO LIGHT SENSITIVITYwithout changing the current setting,select EXIT by pressing the INFO( / ) button, then press the SEL/RESET button. The screen goesback to CUSTOMIZE MENU.


If your choice not set, you will seethe above display for several seconds,then the screen goes back toCUSTOMIZE ENTRY. If thishappens, you need to repeat theheadlight auto light sensitivity setup.


118

▲▼

▲▼

▲ ▼

▲ ▼

CONTINUED

AUTO DOOR LOCKAUTO DOOR UNLOCKKEYLESS LOCKACKNOWLEDGEMENTSECURITY RELOCK TIMER

While the multi-information displayis in the CUSTOMIZE GROUPscreen, select DOOR/WINDOWSETUP by pressing the INFO ( /

) button, and then press the SEL/RESET button.

There are five settings to choosefrom in the door/window setup:




Door/Window Setup

Instruments

andC

ontrols

119


see page 120

see page 122

see page 124

see page 126

see page 128

－

－

－

▲ ▼

There are three settings you canchoose from:

SHIFT FROM PThe doors lock whenever you movethe shift lever out of Park.

WITH VEH SPDThe doors lock when the vehiclespeed reaches about 10 mph (about15 km/h).

OFFThe auto door lock is deactivated allthe time.

While the multi-information displayis in the DOOR/WINDOW screen ofthe CUSTOMIZE GROUP, press theSEL/RESET button. The screenchanges to the above display.

Press the SEL/RESET button. Thescreen changes as shown above.Select the desired setting bypressing the INFO ( / ) button,then press the SEL/RESET buttonto enter your selection.


Auto Door Lock

120

▲ ▼

To exit AUTO DOOR LOCK withoutchanging the current setting, selectEXIT by pressing the INFO ( / )button, then press the SEL/RESETbutton. The screen goes back toCUSTOMIZE MENU.


If your choice is not set, you will seethe above display for several seconds,then the screen goes back toCUSTOMIZE ENTRY. If thishappens, you need to repeat the autodoor lock setup.

CONTINUED


entsand

Controls

121

▲ ▼

－

－

▲ ▼－

There are three settings you canchoose from:

While the multi-information displayis in the DOOR/WINDOW SETUPscreen of the CUSTOMIZE GROUP,press the SEL/RESET button. Thescreen changes to CUSTOMIZEMENU. Press the INFO ( / )button until you see the abovedisplay.

SHIFT TO P The driver’s door orall the doors, depending on the doorlock mode setting ( see page ),unlock when you move the shiftlever to Park.

IGN OFF The driver’s door or allthe doors, depending on the doorlock mode setting ( see page ),unlock when you turn the ignitionswitch to the LOCK (0) position.

Press the SEL RESET button. Thescreen changes as shown above.Select the desired setting bypressing the INFO ( / ) button,then press the SEL/RESET buttonto enter your selection.

OFF The auto door unlock isdeactivated all the time. This is thefactory default setting.

124

124


Auto Door Unlock

122

▲ ▼

To exit AUTO DOOR UNLOCKwithout changing the current setting,select EXIT by pressing the INFO( / ) button, then press the SEL/RESET button. The screen goesback to CUSTOMIZE MENU.


If your choice is not set, you will seethe above display for several seconds,then the screen goes back toCUSTOMIZE ENTRY. If thishappens, you need to repeat the autodoor unlock setup.

CONTINUED


entsand

Controls

123

▲ ▼

▲▼

To select whether the driver’s doorunlocks or all the doors unlock whenyou unlock the doors with theremote, follow these instructions.

While the multi-information displayis in the DOOR/WINDOW SETUPscreen of the CUSTOMIZE GROUP,press the SEL/RESET button. Thescreen changes to CUSTOMIZEMENU. Press the INFO ( / )button until you see above display.

Press the SEL/RESET button. Thescreen changes as shown above.Select DRIVER DOOR or ALLDOORS by pressing the INFO ( /

) button, then press the SEL/RESET button to enter yourselection.


Door Lock Mode

124

▲ ▼


To exit DOOR LOCK MODEwithout changing the current setting,select EXIT by pressing the INFO( / ) button, and then press theSEL/RESET button. The screengoes back to CUSTOMIZE MENU.

If your choice is not set, you will seethe above display for several seconds,then the screen goes back toCUSTOMIZE ENTRY. If thishappens, you need to repeat the doorlock mode setup.

CONTINUED


entsand

Controls

125

▲ ▼

▲ ▼

When you press the LOCK buttonon the remote to lock the doors andthe trunk, and then press the buttonagain within 5 seconds, a beepersounds once and the exterior lightsblink once to verify that the doorsare locked and the security system isset.

When you press the UNLOCKbutton on the remote to unlock thedoors, and then press the buttonagain within 5 seconds, a beepersounds twice and the exterior lightsblink twice to verify that the doorsare unlocked and the securitysystem is turned off.

To turn this feature on or off, followthese instructions.




Keyless Lock Acknowledgment

126

▲ ▼

To exit KEYLESS LOCKACKNOWLEDGEMENT withoutchanging the current setting, selectEXIT by pressing the INFO ( / )button, then press the SEL/RESETbutton. The screen goes back toCUSTOMIZE MENU.


If your choice is not set, you will seethe above display for several seconds,then the screen goes back toCUSTOMIZE ENTRY. If thishappens, you need to repeat thekeyless lock acknowledge setup.

CONTINUED


entsand

Controls

127

▲ ▼▲ ▼

When you unlock the doors bypressing the LOCK button on theremote or by grabbing the driver’sdoor handle while carrying theremote, the doors relock and thesecurity system sets within 30seconds. To change the relock time,follow these instructions:


Press the SEL/RESET button. Thescreen changes as shown above.Select the relock time you want (90,60, or 30 seconds) by pressing theINFO ( / ) button, then press theSEL/RESET button to enter yourselection.


Security Relock Timer

128

▲ ▼

To exit SECURITY RELOCKTIMER without changing thecurrent setting, select EXIT bypressing the INFO ( / ) button,then press the SEL/RESET button.The screen goes back toCUSTOMIZE MENU.


If your choice is not set, you will seethe above display for several seconds,then the screen goes back toCUSTOMIZE ENTRY. If thishappens, you need to repeat thesecurity relock setup.


entsand

Controls

129

▲ ▼

▲▼

▲ ▼

▲ ▼

While the multi-information displayis in the CUSTOMIZE GROUPscreen, select WIPER SETUP bypressing the INFO ( / ) button,then press the SEL/RESET button.

The changeable setting underWIPER SETUP is called WIPERACTION. To get into WIPERACTION, do this:


shown in the illustration. Press theINFO ( / ) button until you seeWIPER ACTION, then press theSEL/RESET button to enter yourselection.

Wiper Setup


130


see page 131

▲▼

－

－

You can select from these twosettings when the wiper switch is inthe INT (intermittent) position:

While the multi-information displayis in the WIPER SETUP screen ofthe CUSTOMIZE GROUP, press theSEL/RESET button. The screenchanges to the above display.

Press the SEL/RESET button. Thescreen changes as shown above.Select INTERMITTENT or WITHVEH SPD by pressing the INFO ( /

) button, then press the SEL/RESET button to enter yourselection.

INTERMITTENT Theintermittent operation variesaccording to the selection you makeon the wiper lever’s intermittentcontrol ring.

WITH VEH SPD The intermittentoperation varies according to vehiclespeed.

CONTINUED


Wiper Action

Instruments

andC

ontrols

131

▲ ▼

To exit WIPER ACTION withoutchanging the current setting, selectEXIT by pressing the INFO ( / )button, then press the SEL/RESETbutton. The screen goes back toCUSTOMIZE MENU.


If you choice is not set, you will seethe above display for several seconds,then the screen goes back toCUSTOMIZE ENTRY. If thishappens, you need to repeat thewiper action setup.


132

＊＊

＊

＊

Canadian models only1 :2 : Refer to the navigation system manual.

Your Vehicle at a GlanceInstrum

entsand

Controls

133

MIRROR CONTROLS

PASSENGER AIRBAGOFF INDICATOR

HANDSFREELINKBUTTONS

HORN

HEADLIGHTS/TURN SIGNAL/FOGLIGHTS

VEHICLE STABILITY ASSIST (VSA)SYSTEM OFF SWITCH

ADAPTIVE FRONT LIGHTINGSYSTEM (AFS) OFF SWITCH

PADDLE SHIFTERS


REAR WINDOWDEFOGGER BUTTON

HEATED MIRRORBUTTON

HAZARD WARNINGBUTTON

COLLISION MITIGATIONBRAKE SYSTEM (CMBS)OFF SWITCH

DISTANCE BUTTON

CRUISE CONTROLBUTTONS

SEAT HEATER SWITCHES

SEAT HEATER ANDSEAT VENTILATION BUTTONS

MULTI INFORMATION BUTTONS

(P.315)

(P.339)

(P.325)

(P.139)

(P.154)

(P.143)STEERING WHEELAUDIO CONTROLS (P.230)

STEERING WHEELADJUSTMENTS

(P.278) (P.246)

(P.175)

(P.174) /

(P.71)

(P.237)

(P.234)/

(P.155)

(P.142) /

(P.35)

(P.141)

ADAPTIVE CRUISECONTROL (ACC)BUTTONS

(P.136)

INSTRUMENTPANEL BRIGHTNESS

WINDSHIELDWIPER/WASHER(P.134)(P.141)

TM

2

1

－－－

－

－

－

－

－

－

MISTOFFINT IntermittentLO Low speedHI High speedWindshield washers

Push the right lever up or down toselect a position.

The wipers run at highspeed until you release the lever.

The wipers are not activated.

The wipers run at low speed.

The wipers run at high speed.

Pull backand hold the wiper control lever.The washers spray until yourelease the lever. The wipers runat low speed, then complete onemore sweep after you release thelever.

To change the ‘‘WIPER ACTION’’setting, see page .

The length of the wipeinterval is varied automaticallyaccording to vehicle speed.

If you turn it to the shortest delay,the wipers change to low speedoperation when the vehicle speedexceeds 12 mph (20 km/h).

When the switch on the left lever isturned to the AUTO or ‘‘ ’’position, the headlight washers alsowork while the lever is held.

The headlight washers use the samefluid reservoir as the windshieldwashers.

1.2.3.4.5.6. 131

MIST

OFF

LO

HI

Windshield Washer

INT

Windshield Wipers and Washers

(On Canadian models)Headlight Washers

134

The windshield wiper arms have twoparked positions: winter and summer.In the winter position, the arms sitslightly above the edge of the hood.This reduces the possibility ofdamage to the wiper arms orwindshield wiper motor by a build-upof snow and ice.

A heavy build-up of snow or ice onthe wiper arms will cause them toautomatically park in the winterposition.

Adjust the wiper arms to the winterposition by holding both arms asshown in the illustration at the sametime. Pull on the arm, parallel to thewindshield, until it locks in thehigher position.

To return to the summer position,push the same area of both arms theother direction.

Windshield Wipers and Washers

Wiper Arm Positions

Instruments

andC

ontrols

135

WIPER ARMS

Winter position

WIPER ARMS

Summer positionHOLDINGLOCATIONS

HOLDINGLOCATIONS

－

－－

Push down on thelever to signal a left turn and up tosignal a right turn. To signal a lanechange, push lightly on the lever,and hold it. The lever will return tocenter when you release it orcomplete a turn.

Turn signalOffParking and indicator lightsAUTOHeadlights onHigh beamsFlash high beamsFog lights offFog lights on

The rotating switchon the left lever controls the lights.Turning this switch to the ‘‘ ’’position turns on the parking lights,taillights, instrument panel lights,side-marker lights, and rear licenseplate lights.

Turning the switch to the ‘‘ ’’position turns on the headlights. Ifyou leave the lights on with theignition switch released after turnedto the LOCK (0) position or whenthe built-in key is removed from theignition switch, you will hear areminder chime when you open thedriver’s door.

When the light switch is in the‘‘ ’’ or ‘‘ ’’ position, thelights on indicator comes on as areminder. This indicator stays on ifyou leave the light switch on andturn the ignition switch to theACCESSORY (I) or the LOCK (0)position.

To switch from lowbeams to high beams, push the leftlever forward until you hear a click.The blue high beam indicator willcome on (see page ). Pull it backto return to low beams. To flash thehigh beams, pull the lever backlightly, then release it. The highbeams stay on as long as you holdthe lever back.

1.2.3.4.5.6.7.8.9.

66

Turn Signal

HeadlightsHigh Beams

Turn Signal, Headlights

136

－

The automatic lighting feature iscontrolled by a sensor located on topof the dashboard. Do not cover thissensor or spill liquids on it.

Even with the automatic lightingfeature turned on, we recommendthat you turn on the lights manuallywhen driving at night or in a densefog, or when you enter dark areassuch as long tunnels or parkingstructures.To turn on automatic lighting, turn

the light switch to AUTO at any time.The lights will come on automaticallywhen the outside light level becomeslow (at dusk, for example). Thelights on indicator comes on as areminder. The lights and indicatorwill turn off automatically when thesystem senses high ambient light.

To change the ‘‘AUTO LIGHTSENSITIVITY’’ setting, see page .

Do not leave the light switch inAUTO if you will not be driving thevehicle for an extended period (aweek or more). You should also turnoff the lights if you plan to leave theengine idling or off for a long time.

The automatic lightingfeature turns on the headlights, allother exterior lights, and theinstrument panel lights when itsenses low ambient light.

The lights will remain on when youturn off the ignition switch. They willturn off automatically when you openand close the driver’s door. To turnthem on again, either turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position or turn the light switch to

.

117

Headlights

AUTO

Instruments

andC

ontrols

137

LIGHTSENSOR

Turn the fog lights on and off byturning the switch next to theheadlight switch.

You can use the fog lights only whenthe headlights are on low beam.

The headlights revert to normaloperation when you turn them onwith the switch.

With the light switch in the AUTOposition, you can also use the foglights when the headlights turn onautomatically. They will go off whenthe headlights turn off.

With the headlight switch off, thehigh beam headlights come on withreduced brightness when you turnthe ignition switch to the ON (II)position and release the parkingbrake. They remain on until you turnthe ignition switch off, even if youset the parking brake.

This feature turns off the headlights,all other exterior lights, and theinstrument panel lights within 15seconds after you turn the ignitionswitch to the LOCK (0) position andclose the driver’s door.

To change the ‘‘HEADLIGHT AUTOOFF TIMER’’ setting, see page .

If you see a ‘‘CHECK DRLSYSTEM’’ message on the multi-information display, there is aproblem with the daytime runninglight system. Take your vehicle to adealer to have it checked.

When the multi-information displayshows a ‘‘DRL OFF’’ message, thedaytime running lights are off.Follow the procedure in the leftcolumn to turn them on.

The automatic lighting off featureactivates if you leave the headlightswitch in the ‘‘ ’’ or ‘‘ ’’position or if the lights are turned onby setting the switch in the ‘‘AUTO’’position, turn the ignition switch tothe LOCK (0) position, then openand close the driver’s door.

If you turn the ignition switch to theLOCK (0) position with theheadlight switch on, but do not openthe door and get out, the lights turnoff after 10 minutes (3 minutes, ifthe switch is in the ‘‘AUTO’’position).

If you unlock the door, but do notopen it within 15 seconds, the lightsgo off. With the driver’s door open,you will hear a lights-on reminderchime.

The lights turn on again when youunlock or open the driver’s door.

115

Headlights

Fog Lights

Daytime Running Lights Automatic Lighting Off Feature

138

The adaptive front lighting system(AFS) helps to improve visibilityduring nighttime driving. The AFScontrols the aiming direction andlighting distribution of the lowbeams according to the amount ofturn applied to the steering wheelduring cornering or turning. To turnthe AFS on, turn the ignition to theON (II) position, and turn theheadlights on.

If the AFS indicator comes on andstarts blinking while driving, pull tothe side of the road when it is safe,and turn off the engine. If the AFSindicator keeps blinking, or startsblinking again while driving afterturning the ignition switch to the ON(II) position, the AFS is not workingproperly (see page ). Have theAFS inspected by your dealer.

When the AFS indicator comes on,you will also see a ‘‘CHECKADAPTIVE FRONT LIGHTINGSYSTEM’’ message on the multi-information display (see page ).

Without AFS, your vehicle still hasnormal lighting ability to continuedriving.

69

78

Adaptive Front Lighting System (AFS)

AFS Indicator

Instruments

andC

ontrols

139

This switch is at the right side of theleft vent. Press it to turn the AFS onand off. When AFS is off, the AFSindicator comes on as a reminderwhen you turn on the headlights.

Here are some operatingcharacteristics of the AFS:

The system requires aninitialization period. It does notbegin to operate until you havedriven the vehicle a short distance.

At a stop, the right headlight turnsright when you turn the steeringwheel to the right. But the leftheadlight does not turn left whenyou turn the steering wheel to theleft. This prevents the leftheadlight from pointing atoncoming traffic.

AFS is turned off when the shiftlever is in the R position.

The AFS works with the automaticheadlight adjusting system to sensechanges in vehicle height due todriving and loading conditions ofpassengers and luggage, and adjuststhe vertical aim of the low beamheadlights automatically tocompensate for load.

If the headlights do not seem to beproperly aimed, have the AutoLeveling system inspected by yourdealer.

Adaptive Front Lighting System (AFS)

AFS Off Switch Automatic Headlight AdjustingSystem

140

AFS OFF SWITCH

＋－＋

－

Push the button between the centervents to turn on the hazard warninglights (four-way flashers). Thiscauses all four outside turn signalsand both indicators in the instrumentpanel to flash. Use the hazardwarning lights if you need to park ina dangerous area near heavy traffic,or if your vehicle is disabled.

Adjust the brightness of theinstrument panel by pressing theor button. Press the button toincrease the brightness and thebutton to decrease it. You can adjustthe brightness with the headlightswitch on or off.

The level of brightness is shown onthe multi-information display whileyou adjust it. It goes out 5 secondsafter you finish adjusting.

CONTINUED

Instrument Panel BrightnessHazard Warning Button

Hazard Warning Button, Instrument Panel BrightnessInstrum

entsand

Controls

141

ADJUSTMENT BUTTONU.S. CANADA

＋

The rear window defogger clears fog,frost, and thin ice from the window.Push the defogger button to turn iton and off. Pushing this button alsoturns the mirror heaters on and off.The indicator in the button comes onto show the defogger is on. If you donot turn it off, the defogger will shutitself off after 5 to 40 minutes(depending on the ambienttemperature). It also shuts off whenyou turn off the ignition switch. You

have to turn it on again when yourestart the vehicle.

Make sure the rear window is clearand you have good visibility beforestarting to drive.

The defogger and antenna wires onthe inside of the rear window can beaccidentally damaged. Whencleaning the glass, always wipe sideto side.

To reduce glare at night, theinstrument panel illumination dimswhen you turn the light switch to

or . To cancel the glarereduction function, set thebrightness to the highest level, thenpress the button. You will hear abeep when it is canceled.

Rear Window Defogger

Instrument Panel Brightness, Rear Window Defogger

142

REAR WINDOW DEFOGGER BUTTON

Make any steering wheel adjustmentbefore you start driving.

Move the steering wheel in, out, up,or down by pushing and holding theadjustment switch in that direction.

Release the switch when thesteering wheel reaches the desiredposition. Make sure the steeringwheel points towards your chest, nottoward your face, and that you cansee the instrument panel gauges andindicators.

CONTINUED

Steering Wheel AdjustmentsInstrum

entsand

Controls

143

Adjusting the steering wheelposition while driving maycause you to lose control of thevehicle and be seriously injuredin a crash.

Adjust the steering wheel onlywhen the vehicle is stopped.

When you turn the ignition switch tothe LOCK (0) position and release it,or remove the built-in key from theignition switch, the steering wheelautomatically moves fully in and up.

The steering wheel returns to itsoriginal position when you push theignition switch or insert the built-inkey back in the ignition switch.

Steering wheel movement is alsocontrolled by the driving positionmemory system (see page ).

To change the ‘‘AUTO TILT &TELESCOPIC’’ setting, see page

.

If your vehicle’s battery isdisconnected or goes dead, or thefuse for the power tilt and telescopicsteering wheel is removed, thepower tilt and telescopic steeringwheel system needs to be resetwhen you reconnect the battery orinstall the fuse.

Push the ignition switch for morethan 1 second and release it, orinsert the built-in key into theignition switch, and remove it. Thesteering wheel automatically movesfully in and up to let you know thesystem is reset.

156

103

Steering Wheel Adjustments

144

You should have received a keynumber tag with your keys. You willneed this key number if you everhave to get a lost key replaced. Useonly Acura-approved key blanks.

Protect the keys from directsunlight, high temperature, andhigh humidity.

Do not drop the keys or set heavyobjects on them.

Keep the keys away from liquids.If they get wet, dry themimmediately with a soft cloth.

The keys do not contain batteries.Do not try to take them apart.

The built-in key (see page ) fitsall the locks on your vehicle.

These keys contain electroniccircuits that are activated by theimmobilizer system. They will notwork to start the engine if thecircuits are damaged.

173

Keys and LocksInstrum

entsand

Controls

145

KEY NUMBER TAGBUILT-IN KEYS

As required by the FCC:This device complies with Part 15 of theFCC rules. Operation is subject to thefollowing two conditions: (1) This devicemay not cause harmful interference, and(2) this device must accept anyinterference received, includinginterference that may cause undesiredoperation.

Changes or modifications not expresslyapproved by the party responsible forcompliance could void the user’sauthority to operate the equipment.

This device complies with IndustryCanada Standard RSS-210.Operation is subject to the following twoconditions: (1) this device may not causeinterference, and (2) this device mustaccept any interference that may causeundesired operation of the device.

When you turn the ignition switch tothe ON (II) position, the immobilizersystem indicator should come on fora few seconds, then go out. If theindicator starts to blink, it means thesystem does not recognize thecoding of the remote or built-in key.Turn the ignition switch to theLOCK (0) position, release theignition switch and push it, orremove the built-in key, and reinsertit. Then turn the switch to the ON(II) position again.

The system may not recognize yourkey’s coding if another immobilizerkey or other metal object (i.e. keyfob) is near the ignition switch whenyou turn the ignition switch to theON (II) position.

If the system repeatedly does notrecognize the coding of your remoteor built-in key, contact your dealer.

Do not attempt to alter this systemor add other devices to it. Electricalproblems could result that may makeyour vehicle undrivable.

If you have lost your remote orbuilt-in key and cannot start theengine, contact your dealer.

The immobilizer system protectsyour vehicle from theft. If animproperly-coded key (or otherdevice) is used, the engine will notstart.

Immobilizer System

146

－

－－

－

The ignition switch has fourpositions: LOCK (0), ACCESSORY(I), ON (II), and START (III).

Use this positiononly to start the engine. The switchreturns to the ON (II) position whenyou let go of the ignition switch.

To use the built-in key, you have toremove the cover (see page ).

This is the normalignition switch position when driving.Several of the indicators on theinstrument panel come on as a testwhen you turn the ignition switchfrom the ACCESSORY (I) to the ON(II) position.

If the front wheels are turned, theanti-theft lock may make it difficultto turn the ignition switch. Firmlyturn the steering wheel to the left orright as you turn the ignition switch.

You can insert orremove the built-in key only in thisposition. To turn the ignition switchto the LOCK (0) position, the shiftlever must be in Park, and you mustpush the knob or built-in key in

slightly.

The shift lever must be in Parkbefore you turn the ignition switchknob to the LOCK (0) position orremove the built-in key from theignition switch.

You canoperate the audio system and theaccessory power sockets in thisposition.

When you turn the ignition switch tothe ACCESSORY (I) position, an‘‘ACCESSORY (I) POSITION’’message is shown on the multi-information display.

If you open the driver’s door andleave the key in the ignition switch,you will hear a reminder beeper, anda message appears on the multi-information display according to theignition switch position. When theignition switch is in the ACC (I)position, a ‘‘RETURN IGNITIONSWITCH TO LOCK (I) POSITION’’message is shown on the multi-information display. When theignition switch is LOCK (I) position,a ‘‘REMOVE KEY’’ message isshown on the multi-informationdisplay.

173

Ignition Switch

START (III)

ON (II)LOCK (0)

ACCESSORY (I)

Instruments

andC

ontrols

147

IGNITION SWITCH

COVER

BUILT-IN KEY

Each door has a lock tab above theinside door handle. Pull the tab tolock the door and push it to unlock.When you pull the tab on the driver’sdoor, all the doors lock.

To lock any door when getting out ofthe vehicle, pull the lock tab andclose the door.

All doors can be locked from theoutside by using the built-in key inthe driver’s door. To unlock only thedriver’s door, insert the built-in key,turn it clockwise, and release it. Theremaining doors unlock when youturn the built-in key a second timewithin a few seconds.

Each front door has a power doorlock master switch. Either switchlocks and unlocks all doors. Push theswitch down to lock all doors and upto unlock them.

To change the ‘‘DOOR UNLOCKMODE’’ setting, see page .

When the vehicle speed reachesabout 10 mph (about 15 km/h) ormore, all the doors lockautomatically.

To change the ‘‘AUTO DOORLOCK’’ setting, see page .

When you shift to P after driving, thedriver’s door unlocks.

To change the ‘‘AUTO DOORUNLOCK’’ setting, see page .

With the driver’s door open and thebuilt-in key in the ignition, bothmaster door lock switches aredisabled. They are not disabled if thedriver’s door is closed. Pushing theswitch down on the open frontpassenger’s door will lock all doors.If you try to lock an open driver’sdoor by pulling the lock tab rearward with the remote inside thevehicle and closing the driver’s door,all the doors will unlock.

106

120

122

Door Locks

Lockout Prevention

148

POWER DOOR LOCK MASTERSWITCH

If your vehicle’s battery goes dead oris disconnected, you can open thetrunk from the rear seat by pullingthe trunk release handle. Reach thehandle through the trunk pass-through.

Keep the trunk lid closed at all timeswhile driving to avoid damaging thelid, and to prevent exhaust gas fromgetting into the interior. See

on page .

Press and hold the trunk releasebutton on the remote.

Press the trunk release button onthe driver’s door.

You can open the trunk in any offour ways:

If the doors are locked, press theboot release button on the boot lidwith the remote in keyless Accessoperating range.

To close the trunk, press down onthe trunk lid.

If the doors are unlocked, pressthe trunk release switch on thetrunk lid.

56CONTINUED

Trunk

CarbonMonoxide Hazard

Instruments

andC

ontrols

149

TRUNK RELEASE BUTTON TRUNK RELEASE HANDLE

The childproof door locks aredesigned to prevent children seatedin the rear from accidentally openingthe rear doors. Each rear door has alock lever near the edge. With thelever in the LOCK position, the doorcannot be opened from insideregardless of the position of the locktab. To open the door, pull the locktab up, and use the outside doorhandle.

As a safety feature, your vehicle hasa release lever on the right corner inthe trunk so the trunk can be openedfrom the inside. To open the trunk,push the release lever to the left.

Parents should decide if theirchildren should be shown how to usethis feature.

For more information about childsafety, see page .

To protect items in the trunk, youcan disable the trunk-release buttonon the driver’s door, the trunk lid,and the remote. To do this, turn offthe trunk main switch in the glovebox, lock the glove box, and lock thetrunk pass-through cover with thebuilt-in key.

41

Trunk, Childproof Door Locks

Childproof Door LocksEmergency Trunk Opener

150

LEVER

TRUNK MAIN SWITCH

RELEASELEVER

－

Moves the seat forwardand backward.

Adjusts the seat-backangle forward orbackward.

The controls for the poweradjustable front seats are on theoutside edge of each seat bottom.You can adjust the seats with theignition switch in any position. Makeall seat adjustments before you startdriving.

Moves the front of theseat up or down and therear of the seat up ordown. (Driver’s seatonly)

Raises or lowers the seat.(Driver’s seat only)

Increases or decreasesthe lumbar support.

See pages for important safetyinformation and warnings about how toproperly position the seats and seat-backs.

14 17Front Seat Power Adjustments

SeatsInstrum

entsand

Controls

151

PASSENGER’S SEATDRIVER’S SEAT

See page for important safetyinformation and a warning about how toproperly position the head restraints.

16

Your vehicle has adjustable headrestraints on the front seats.

The head restraints help protect youand your passengers from whiplashand other injuries.

They are most effective when youadjust them so the back of theoccupant’s head rests against thecenter of the restraint.

The head restraints adjust for height.The tilt of the front head restraints isalso adjustable. You need both handsto adjust the restraint. Do notattempt to adjust it while driving. Toraise it, pull upward. To lower therestraint, push the release buttonsideways, and push the restraintdown. To adjust the tilt, pivot thefront head restraint to the desiredposition.

You can raise the rear headrestraints by hand.

To lower the rear head restraints forbetter visibility, press the rear headrestraint tilt button on the ceilingconsole with the ignition switch inthe ON (II) position.

Head Restraints

Seats

152

FRONT

RELEASE BUTTON

REAR

REAR HEAD RESTRAINTTILT BUTTON

The rear seat armrest is in thecenter of the rear seat. Pivot it downto use it.

Open the cover by pushing the knoband pulling the cover down. To closethe cover, swing it up, and pushfirmly on the top. Make sure itlatches properly.

Make sure all items in the trunk andthose extending through the pass-through are secured.

For security, this cover can belocked and unlocked only with thebuilt-in key. To lock the cover, insertthe key, and turn it clockwise.

Never drive with this cover open andthe trunk lid open.See onpage .56

Rear Seat Armrest Trunk Pass-through Cover

Carbon Monoxide Hazard

SeatsInstrum

entsand

Controls

153

COVER

KNOB

The inside mirror can automaticallydarken to reduce glare. To turn onthis feature, press the button on thebottom of the mirror. The AUTOindicator comes on as a reminder.When it is on, the mirror darkenswhen it senses the headlights of avehicle behind you, then returns tonormal visibility when the lights aregone. Press the button again to turnoff this sensing.

Keep the inside and outside mirrorsclean and adjusted for best visibility.Be sure to adjust the mirrors beforeyou start driving.

Mirrors

154

INDICATOR

AUTO BUTTON

SENSOR

Move the selector switch to L(driver’s side) or R (passenger’sside).

Push the appropriate edge of theadjustment switch to move themirror right, left, up, or down.

The outside mirrors are heated toremove fog and frost. With theignition switch in the ON (II)position, turn on the heaters bypressing the button. The indicator inthe button comes on as a reminder.Press the button again to turn theheaters off. Pressing this button alsoturns the rear window defogger onand off.

When you finish, move theselector switch to the center (off)position. This turns off theadjustment switch so you can’tmove a mirror out of position byaccidentally bumping the switch.

Outside mirror positions can bestored in the driving positionmemory system (see page ).

Depending on the position of theselector switch, the left or right sidemirror will pivot downward slightlywhen you shift the transmission intoreverse. In the left position, the leftmirror pivots. In the right position,the right mirror pivots. This givesyou a better view of that side of thevehicle while parallel parking. Themirror returns to its original positionwhen you take the transmission outof reverse. To turn this feature off,leave the switch in the centerposition.

3.

1.

2.

156

Adjusting the Power Mirrors Power Mirror Heaters

MirrorsInstrum

entsand

Controls

155

HEATED MIRROR BUTTON

SELECTORSWITCH ADJUSTMENT SWITCH

Store a driving position only whenthe vehicle is parked.

Adjust the steering wheel to acomfortable position (see page

).Adjust the outside mirrors for bestvisibility (see page ).

Adjust the seat to a comfortableposition (see page ).

Your vehicle has a memory featurefor the steering wheel, driver’s seat,and outside mirror positions.

Two seat, steering wheel, andoutside mirror positions can bestored in separate memories. Youselect a memorized position bypushing the appropriate button.

Press the MEMO button on thedriver’s door. You will hear a beep.The indicator in the memorybuttons (1 and 2) will blink.Immediately press one of thememory buttons (1 or 2) until youhear two beeps. The indicator inthe memory button will stay on.The current positions of thedriver’s seat, steering wheel, andoutside mirrors are now stored.

Turn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position. You cannot add anew driving position in thememory unless the ignition switchis the ON (II) position. You canrecall a memorized position withthe ignition switch in any position.

3.

1.

2.

111

151

155

Storing a Driving Position inMemory

Driving Position Memory System

156

MEMORYBUTTONS

MEMO BUTTON

To select a memorized position, dothis:

Press the desired memory button(1 or 2) until you hear a beep.

The system will move the seat,steering wheel, and outside mirrorsto the memorized positions. Theindicator in the selected memorybutton will flash during movement.When the adjustments are complete,you will hear two beeps, and theindicator will remain on.

Make sure the shift lever is inPark.

To change the ‘‘MEMORYPOSITION LINK’’ setting, see page

.

To cancel the storing procedureafter pressing the MEMO button:

Do not press a memory buttonwithin 5 seconds.

Readjust the outside mirrorposition.

Each memory button stores only onedriving position. Storing a newposition erases the previous settingstored in that button’s memory.

All stored driving positions will belost if your vehicle’s battery goesdead or is disconnected.

Readjust the seat or steeringposition.

1.

2.

101

CONTINUED

Selecting a Memorized Position

Driving Position Memory SystemInstrum

entsand

Controls

157

MEMORY BUTTONS

Press any button on the controlpanel: MEMO, 1, or 2.

Adjust the outside mirrors.

Shift out of Park.

Push any of the adjustmentswitches for the seat or steeringwheel.

If you select a memorized positionwithout pushing the ignition switchknob or inserting the built-in key inthe ignition switch, only the seat andoutside mirrors will adjust. To getthe system to also adjust the steeringwheel, push and turn the ignitionswitch or insert the built-in key inthe ignition switch. You will hear twobeeps when it is complete.

You can use the adjustment switchesto change the positions of the seat,steering wheel, or outside mirrorsafter they are in their memorizedposition. If you change thememorized position, the indicator inthe memory button will go out. Tokeep this driving position for lateruse, you must store it in the drivingposition memory.

To stop the system’s automaticadjustment, do any of the following:

Driving Position Memory System

158

Your vehicle has the Keyless AccessSystem. When you carry the remotewith you, you can lock/unlock thedoor(s), unlock the trunk, and startthe engine without using the built-inkey.

The system may not work if:The battery of the remote is weak.

You carry a cell phone, a laptopcomputer, or other electricaldevice near the remote.

There is strong electrical currentnearby.

The remote is covered by metal.A vehicle is being operated with atransmitter nearby.When the remote battery is dead.

Protect the remote and the built-inkey from direct sunlight, hightemperature, and high humidity.

Always keep the remote and thebuilt-in key away from any magneticmaterial.

You should have received a keynumber tag with your built-in key.You will need this key number if youever have to get a lost key replaced.Use only Acura-approved key blanks.

When the vehicle battery is dead.

Make sure the driver always carriesthe remote/built-in key set.

Do not drop the remote or thebuilt-in key, and do not set heavyobjects on them.

The built-in keys do not containbatteries.

Keep the remote and the built-in keyaway from liquids. If they get wet,dry them immediately with a softcloth.

Keyless Access SystemInstrum

entsand

Controls

159

This remote is used to lock/unlock

the doors and unlock the trunk.When you carry the remote, you canlock/unlock the doors, unlock thetrunk, and start the engine without akey.

You can lock/unlock the doorswithin a about 32 inches (about 80cm) radius from the outside doorhandle.

The following keys come with yourvehicle. Refer to page for how toseparate the keys.

This key is used to lock/unlock thedoors, glove box, trunk pass-throughcover, and to start the engine (afteryou remove the ignition switch cover,see page ).

You can open the trunk within aabout 32 inches (about 80 cm) radius

from the trunk release switch.

It is above or below the vehicle,even when it is within its operatingrange.

It is too close to the vehicle.The remote may not work if:

Anyone can lock/unlock a door oropen the trunk if the remote iswithin the operating range of thedoor or the trunk.

173

170

Keys

Keyless Access System

Built-in Key

Keyless Access Remote

160

BUILT-IN KEYS

OPERATINGRANGE

KEY NUMBER TAG

KEYLESS ACCESSREMOTES

The handle of each front door has asensor. That sensor works with theremote so you can automaticallyunlock/lock the door(s).

If you do not open any of the doorswithin 30 seconds, they willautomatically relock.

The unlock sensors do not operatewhen:

The remote is not within theoperating range.

To change the ‘‘DOOR UNLOCKMODE’’ setting, see page .

If a remote is within operating rangewhile you wash your vehicle or whenit is raining heavily, the door sensorsmay respond by unlocking the doors.

When you unlock the door(s), someexterior lights blink twice and thesystem beeps twice.

To change the ‘‘KEYLESS ACCESSLIGHT FLASH’’ setting, see page

.

To change the ‘‘KEYLESS ACCESSBEEP’’ setting, see page .

The remote is too close to thevehicle.

By default, only the driver’s doorunlocks when you grab its handle.

All the doors unlock when you grabthe handle of the front passenger’sdoor.

When the doors are unlocked.

The vehicle battery is dead.

The remote battery is dead.

If you wear a glove while grabbing afront door handle, the door sensormay be slow to respond or may notrespond by unlocking the doors.

108

110

106

Unlocking the Door(s)


entsand

Controls

161

Each front door has a LOCK/UNLOCK feature.

When you touch the door locksensor of the front door by hand, allthe doors and the trunk will lock.

The remote is not within theoperating range.

The lock sensors do not operate if:

The built-in key is in the ignitionswitch.

The doors are open.

The ignition switch is not in theLOCK (0) position.

The remote is too close to thevehicle.

The vehicle battery is dead.

The remote battery is dead.

When you lock the doors, someexterior lights blink once and the

system beeps once. When youcannot set the security systembecause the trunk or hood is open,no exterior light blinks and/or nobeeper sounds.

Before locking the doors, make surethe remote is not inside the vehicle.

If a remote is within operating rangewhile you wash your vehicle or whenit is raining heavily, the door sensorsmay respond by locking the doors.

Within 2 seconds of touching thehandle to lock the doors or lockingthe doors with remote, pull thehandle to make sure the doors areactually locked. The door unlocksensors do not operate for about 2seconds after the doors are locked.

To change the ‘‘KEYLESS ACCESSBEEP’’ setting, see page .

To change the ‘‘KEYLESS ACCESSLIGHT FLASH’’ setting, see page

.

If you touch the door lock sensor ofthe front door with your handwearing a glove, the door sensor maydelay to respond or not respond bylocking the doors.

108

110

Locking the Doors


162

DOOR LOCK SENSOR

Before closing the trunk, make surethe remote is not in the trunk.

If you close the trunk when theremote is in it, the system beeps, andthe trunk reopens.

When you close the trunk with alldoors locked, the trunk will lock.

When you unlock all the doors withthe remote, built-in key or powerdoor lock master switch, the trunkwill unlock.

Use the pull handle when you closethe trunk.

If you open a door, pull its lock tab,and shut it when the remote is insidethe vehicle, all the doors unlock.Make sure you carry the remotewith you when you lock the doors.


Locking the TrunkDoor Lock Prevention

Instruments

andC

ontrols

163

PULL HANDLE

－

The trunk cannot be locked if:The remote is too close to thetrunk lid.The remote is on the interior rearpanel.The remote is too close to theseatback of the rear seat or theseat cushion.

When the trunk is locked, you canopen it in any of these ways:

Press the trunk button on theremote.Pull the trunk release switch whencarrying the remote (the systembeeps once).

Keep the trunk lid closed at all timeswhile driving to avoid damaging thelid, and to prevent exhaust gas fromgetting into the interior. See

on page .Press this button once to

lock all doors. Some exterior lightswill flash. When you push the LOCKbutton twice within 5 seconds, youwill hear a beep to verify that thedoors are locked and the securitysystem is set.

Press the trunk release buttoninside the vehicle.

56


Locking and Unlocking the Trunk Keyless Access Remote

CarbonMonoxide Hazard

LOCK

164

LED

UNLOCKBUTTON

PANICBUTTON

TRUNKRELEASEBUTTON

LOCKBUTTON

TRUNK RELEASE SWITCH

－

－

－ To change the ‘‘SECURITYRELOCK TIMER’’ setting, see page

.

Press this button forabout 1 second to open the trunk.You cannot open the trunk if thebuilt-in key is in the ignition or theignition switch is in any positionexcept the LOCK (0) position. Youcannot open the trunk with theremote if the trunk main switch isturned off.

To change the ‘‘KEYLESS LOCKACKNOWLEDGMENT’’ setting, seepage .

Press this button forabout 2 seconds to attract attention:the horn will sound and the exteriorlights will flash for about 30 seconds.To cancel panic mode, press anyother button on the remote.

You cannot lock the doors if anydoor, the trunk, or the hood is notfully closed if the built-in key is inthe ignition switch, or if the ignitionswitch is in any position except theLOCK (0) position.

Press this button onceto unlock the driver’s door. Press ittwice to unlock the other doors.Some exterior lights will flash twiceeach time you press the button. Theceiling light (if the ceiling lightswitch is in the DOOR position) willcome on when you press theUNLOCK button. If you do not openany doors within 30 seconds, theceiling light fades out. If you relockthe doors with the remote before 30seconds have elapsed, the ceilinglight will go off immediately.

If you unlock the doors with theremote, but do not open any doorswithin 30 seconds, the doorsautomatically relock and the securitysystem sets.

To change the ‘‘INTERIOR LIGHTDIMMING TIME,’’ see page .

To change the ‘‘DOOR LOCKMODE’’ setting, see page .

When you cannot set the securitysystem because the trunk or hood isopen, no exterior light blinks and/orno beeper sounds.

113

124

126

128


TRUNK

PANIC

UNLOCK

Instruments

andC

ontrols

165

Here are the settings activated withthe remote;

Driving position memory(see page ).

To turn off this feature, press andhold the LOCK and UNLOCKbuttons at the same time. The LEDin the remote will blink once. Thenrelease the buttons. Doing thiscancels the keyless memory settingsfor that remote and restores thedefault settings.

Audio system settings(see page ).

Customized settings(see page ).

Climate control settings(see page ).

When you unlock the door with yourremote, each remote activates thekeyless memory settings related tothat remote. The driver’s ID (Driver1 or Driver 2) is shown on the backof each remote.

Some of them keep the samesettings as they were set previously.

To turn the keyless memory settingsback on, repeat this procedure. TheLED will blink twice to indicate thefeature has been turned on.

Avoid dropping or throwing thetransmitter.

Protect the transmitter fromextreme temperature.

Do not immerse the transmitter inany liquid.

If you lose a transmitter, thereplacement needs to bereprogrammed by your dealer.

Navigation system preferences(see the navigation systemmanual).

157

81

203

202


Keyless Memory Settings

Remote Transmitter Care

166

DRIVER’S ID

TM

＋




Replace the batteries if necessary.Battery type: CR2025

Remove the built-in key.

Remove the upper half by carefullyprying on the edge with a coin.

Replace the old batteries with newbatteries. Place the batteries so the

side is facing up. Snap the twohalves of the remote case backtogether.


Replacing the Remote Battery

Instruments

andC

ontrols

167

The engine may not run, and somemalfunctions may occur, if theremote is:

The engine may not start if theremote is subjected to strong radiowaves.

Also, the engine may not start if theremote is too close to the windows.

Outside the vehicle.On the dashboard.On the rear interior panel.In the glove box.In the door pockets.In the trunk, etc.


Ignition Switch Operating Range

168

Make sure you know where the remoteis when you are inside the vehicle.

Remember that you can start the enginewithout using the built-in key when theremote is inside the vehicle.

Make sure you always carry the remotewith you.

If you lose your remote, call AcuraClient Services at (800) 382-2238 (U.S.models).

When you push the ignition switch,the remote and the vehicle recognizeeach other. After the recognition,the remote indicator flashes, and abeeper sounds once. After the beep,turn the ignition switch.When the remote is out of theoperating range, the ignition switchis locked.If the ignition switch cannot beturned from the LOCK (0) positionto the ACCESSORY (I) position after

the beep, the steering wheel islocked. To unlock the steering wheel,turn it right and left while turningthe ignition switch at the same time.If the remote and the vehicle do notrecognize each other, turn theignition switch to the LOCK (0)position, remove the ignition switchcover, insert the built-in key, andturn the switch (see pages and

).Before leaving the vehicle, makesure the ignition switch is in theLOCK (0) position.

You will also see a ‘‘RETURNIGNITION SWITCH TO LOCK (0)POSITION’’ message on the multi-information display.

To turn the ignition switch to theLOCK (0) position, put thetransmission in Park, press theswitch in, and turn it to the LOCK(0) position. When the transmissionis not in Park, you cannot turn theignition switch to the LOCK (0)position.

If you open the driver’s door with theignition switch in the ACCESSORY(I) position, a beeper will sound.

147170

CONTINUED

Ignition Switch


entsand

Controls

169

When you are pressing the ignitionswitch, or when the ignition switch isin the ON (II) position, the beepersounds if you take the remote out ofthe vehicle and close the door.

To remove the ignition switch cover,insert the built-in key (see page ),then pull the cover out by pulling thebuilt-in key while pushing it.

Also, if you close the door when theignition switch is not in the LOCK(0) position and the remote is notinside the vehicle, the keyless accessalarm sounds outside the vehicle, amessage appears on the multi-information display, and the beepersounds if the ignition switch is in theON (II) position.

When the beeper sounds after youclose the driver’s door outside thevehicle, check the position of theignition switch and the location ofthe remote.

If the engine is running and youremove the remote from the vehicle,it will continue to run. But onceturned to the LOCK (0) position, theengine will not restart until a remoteis brought back into the vehicle.

173


Beeper and MessageRemoving the Ignition SwitchCover Keyless Remote Not Detected

170

BUILT-IN KEY

IGNITION SWITCH COVER

push

pull

The batteries in the remote normallylasts about 2 years. To ensuremaximum battery life, do not storethe remote close to electrical devicessuch as computers or TVs. When themulti-information display shows‘‘KEYLESS REMOTE LOWBATTERY,’’ replace the batteries assoon as possible (see page ).

The engine does not restart if youturn the ignition switch to the LOCK(0) position when the remote isoutside the vehicle. Check where theremote is. Make sure that you carrythe remote or built-in key with youwhen you operate the ignition switch.

When the ignition switch is in theON (II) position, the multi-information display shows‘‘KEYLESS REMOTE NOTDETECTED,’’ and the inside andoutside beepers sound.The multi-information displaymessage goes away when youbring the remote back inside thevehicle, and close the door orapply the parking brake.

The outside beeper sounds whenthe ignition switch is in theACCESSORY (I) or the ON (II)position.

If the engine is running and youremove the remote from thevehicle, it will continue to run.Once turned to the LOCK (0)position, the engine will not restartuntil a remote is brought back intothe vehicle.

If you pass the remote through anopen window, the system does notrespond. Also, even when the remoteis inside the vehicle, the beeper maysound when the location of theremote is not detected due tosurrounding conditions. It is not afailure. Make sure that you carry theremote with you.

167

CONTINUED


Keyless Remote Low Battery

Instruments

andC

ontrols

171

The indicator stays on while youare driving.

The indicator comes on with theignition switch in the ON (II)position.

The indicator comes on for severalseconds when you turn the ignitionswitch to the ON (II) position. Haveyour vehicle checked by your dealerif:

The multi-information displayshows ‘‘CHECK KEYLESSACCESS SYSTEM.’’

In this case, use the built-in key tolock/unlock the doors and start theengine.

If you lose or drop your remote, andthe beeper sounds, contact AcuraClient Services at (800) 382-2238(U.S. models)


Check Keyless Access System

172

KEYLESS ACCESS SYSTEMINDICATOR

The built-in key can be inserted intothe remote.As shown above, keep inserting thebuilt-in key until it is locked. Toremove the built-in key, pull it outwhile you press the release button.To avoid damaging the remote andthe built-in key, never pull on thebuilt-in key unless you are pressingthe release button.

The trunk and glove box cannot beopened when you turn the trunkmain switch off and lock the glovebox and trunk pass-through coverwith the built-in key. Also, the trunkcannot be opened by using theremote.

The keyless access system useselectric current to identify theremote with the vehicle.

If you use medical equipment suchas a cardiac pacemaker, ask yourdoctor if the electric current used bythe remote will affect it.


Valet FunctionBuilt-in key and Remote

Instruments

andC

ontrols

173

RELEASE BUTTON

BUILT-IN KEY

In HI, the heater turns off when theseat gets warm, and turns back onafter the seat temperature drops.

In LO, the heater runs continuously.It does not cycle with temperaturechanges.

Follow these precautions wheneveryou use the seat heaters:

Use the HI setting only to heat theseats quickly, because it drawslarge amounts of current from thebattery.

Both front seats are equipped withseat heaters. The passenger seatonly has heaters in the seat bottombecause of the side airbag system.The ignition switch must be in theON (II) position to use the heaters.Push the top of the switch, HI, torapidly heat up the seat. After theseat reaches a comfortabletemperature, select LO by pushingthe bottom of the switch. This willkeep the seat warm.

If the engine is left idling for anextended period, do not use theseat heaters, even on the LOsetting. It can weaken the battery,causing hard starting.

Seat Heaters (U.S. models)

174

SEAT HEATER SWITCHES

▲

▼

▲

▲

－－－－

－－－－

▲

▼

▼

▼

▲

▼

To use the heaters, press thebutton. The indicator next to thebutton will come on. There are threesettings in the heaters:

Both front seats are equipped withseat heaters and an air ventilationsystem. The passenger seat only hasheaters in the seat bottom becauseof the side airbag system. Theignition switch must be in the ON(II) position to use the heaters andthe air ventilation system.

In LOW, the heater runscontinuously.

When you press the button once,the system is set to HI. To change tothe lower mode, press the button.To turn the air ventilation off, pressthe button until the indicators gooff.

HI Three indicators on.MID Two indicators on.LO One indicator on.OFF All indicators off.

HI Three indicators on.MID Two indicators on.LO One indicator on.OFF All indicators off.

When you press the button once,the heater is set to HI. After the seatreaches a comfortable temperature,select MID or LOW by pressing the

button. This will keep the seatwarm. To shut down the heater,press the button until theindicators go off.

In HI, when the seat gets warm, theheater will change to MID afterabout 5 minutes.

In MID, the heater will change toLOW after about 60 minutes.

To ventilate the seat, press thebutton. The indicator next to thebutton will come on. The airventilation system has four settings:

CONTINUED

Seat Heaters and Seat Ventilation (Canadian models)Instrum

entsand

Controls

175

BUTTON

BUTTON

INDICATORS

Follow these precautions wheneveryou use the seat heaters and the seatventilation:

Use the HI setting only to heat orto ventilate the seats quickly,because it draws large amounts ofcurrent from the battery.

If the engine is left idling for anextended period, do not use theseat heaters or the seat ventilation,even on the LO setting. It canweaken the battery, causing hardstarting.

Seat Heaters and Seat Ventilation (Canadian models)

176

If the MAIN switch is pushed down(OFF), the passenger windowscannot be raised or lowered. Keepthe MAIN switch off when you havechildren in the vehicle so they do notinjure themselves by operating thewindows unintentionally.

Turn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position before operating any ofthe window switches. To open awindow, push the switch down andhold it. To close the window, pull theswitch up and hold it. Release theswitch to stop the window.

CONTINUED

Power WindowsInstrum

entsand

Controls

177

DRIVER’S WINDOW SWITCH

MAIN SWITCH

Closing a power window onsomeone’s hands or fingers cancause serious injury.

Make sure your passengers areaway from the windows beforeclosing them.

－

Auto reverse stops sensing when thewindow is almost closed. You shouldalways check that all passengers andobjects are away from the windowbefore closing it.

To open the window fully,push the window switch firmly downto the second detent, then release it.The window automatically goesdown all the way. To stop thewindow from going all the way down,pull back on the window switchbriefly.

To close the window fully, pull backthe window switch firmly to thesecond detent, then release it. Thewindow automatically goes all theway up. To stop the window fromgoing all the way up, push down onthe window switch briefly.

To open or close the windowpartially, push down or pull back onthe window switch lightly to the firstdetent, and hold it. The window willstop when you release the switch.

All window switches also have theAUTO feature.

If the window runs into any obstaclewhile it is closing automatically, itwill reverse direction, and then stop.To close the window, remove theobstacle, then use the window switchagain.

The indicators in the switches comeon when you turn the ignition switchto the ON (II) position.

The power windows have a key-offdelay. You can still open and closethe windows for up to 10 minutesafter you turn off the ignition switch.The key-off delay cancels as soon asyou open either front door. You mustthen turn the ignition switch to theON (II) position for the powerwindows to operate.

Auto Reverse

AUTO

Power Windows

178

You can open all of the windows andthe moonroof from outside with theremote.

Press the UNLOCK button onceto unlock the driver’s door.

To open the windows andmoonroof further, press thebutton again and hold it. If thewindows and the moonroof stopbefore the desired position, repeatsteps 1 and 2.

You cannot close the windows or themoonroof with the remote.

You can open and close the windowsand moonroof with the built-in key inthe driver’s door lock.

Insert the built-in key in the driver’sdoor lock.

To open:

Turn the key clockwise, thenrelease it.

Turn the built-in key clockwiseagain, and hold it. All fourwindows and the moonroof start toopen. To stop the windows andmoonroof, release the built-in key.

When the windows or moonroofstops before opening fully, to openthe windows and moonroof further,turn and hold the key again(within 15 seconds).

Press the UNLOCK button asecond time, and hold it. All thedoors unlock, and all four windowsand moonroof start to open. Tostop the windows and moonroof,release the button.

1.

2.

3.

1.

2.

3.

4.

CONTINUED

Opening the Windows andMoonroof with the Remote

Opening/Closing the Windowsand Moonroof with the Built-inKey

Power Windows, MoonroofInstrum

entsand

Controls

179

Open

Close

UNLOCK BUTTON

To close:Insert the built-in key in the driver’sdoor lock.

NOTE: If the windows and moonroofstop before the desired position,repeat steps 2 and 3.

To close the windows andmoonroof further, turn and holdthe key again (within 15 seconds).

Turn the key counterclockwiseagain, and hold it. All fourwindows and the moonroof start toclose. To stop the windows andmoonroof, release the key.

Turn the key counterclockwise,then release it.

Turn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position before operating themoonroof switch on the ceilingconsole. To open the moonroof, pullback the moonroof switch. To closethe moonroof, push the moonroofswitch forward. Release the switchto stop the moonroof.

To open the moonroof fully, pullback the moonroof switch firmly.The moonroof opens all the way. Tostop the moonroof from openingfully, push the switch briefly.

1.

2.

3.

4.

Power Windows, Moonroof

Opening/Closing the Moonroofwith the Ceiling Console Switch

180

MOONROOF SWITCH

To open or close the moonroofpartially, pull back or push forwardon the moonroof switch lightly to thefirst detent, and hold it. Themoonroof will stop when you releasethe switch.

To tilt the moonroof, push the centerof the moonroof switch straight up.To stop the moonroof from tiltingfully open, push the moonroof switchforward.

To close the moonroof fully, pushthe moonroof switch forward to thesecond detent, then release it. Themoonroof closes all the way. To stopthe moonroof from closing all theway, push the switch briefly.

MoonroofInstrum

entsand

Controls

181

Opening or closing themoonroof on someone’s handsor fingers can cause seriousinjury.

Make sure all hands and fingersare clear of the moonroofbefore opening or closing it.

You can use the remote transmitteror the key to operate the moonrooffrom the outside. Refer to page

for details.

The moonroof has a key-off delay.You can still open and close themoonroof for up to 10 minutes afteryou turn off the ignition switch. Thekey-off delay cancels as soon as youopen either front door. You mustthen turn the ignition switch to theON (II) position for the moonroof tooperate.

If the moonroof runs into anyobstacle while it is closingautomatically, it will reversedirection, and then stop. To close themoonroof, remove the obstacle, thenuse the moonroof switch again.

Auto reverse stops sensing when themoonroof is almost closed. Youshould always check that allpassengers and objects are awayfrom the moonroof before closing it.

179

Moonroof

Operating the Moonroof with theRemote Transmitter or the Key

Auto Reverse

182

If you try to open the moonroof inbelow-f reezing temperatures, or whenit is covered with snow or ice, you candamage the moonroof panel or itsmotor.

To apply the parking brake, push theparking brake pedal down with yourfoot. To release the parking brake,push on the pedal again. The parkingbrake indicator on the instrumentpanel should go out when theparking brake is fully released withthe engine running (see page ).63

Parking BrakeInstrum

entsand

Controls

183

PARKING BRAKE PEDAL

Driving the vehicle with the parkingbrake applied can damage the rearbrakes, axles, and tires. A beeper willsound if the vehicle is put into gearwith the parking brake on.

Interior Convenience Items

184

ASHTRAY

FRONT DOOR POCKET ACCESSORY POWER SOCKETS

GLOVE BOX/OWNER’S MANUAL TRAY

BEVERAGE HOLDER

UTILITY POCKET

SEAT-BACK POCKETS

CONSOLE COMPARTMENT

Your vehicle has an owner’s manualtray inside the glove box. To openthe tray, push the release button up.

Open the glove box by pulling thehandle. Close it with a firm push.Lock or unlock the glove box withthe built-in key.

To close the tray, push it up.


Glove Box

Instruments

andC

ontrols

185

RELEASE BUTTON

An open glove box can causeserious injury to your passengerin a crash, even if thepassenger is wearing the seatbelt.

Always keep the glove boxclosed while driving.

For a short container, put the bottomplate down, and pull up the knob touse the separator.

For a long container, press thebutton in the beverage holder toraise the bottom plate. Stand theseparator up.

Be careful when you are using thebeverage holders. A spilled liquidthat is very hot can scald you or yourpassengers. Spilled liquids candamage the upholstery, carpeting,and electrical components in theinterior.

To use the beverage holder, pushthe lid.

Beverage Holders


186

LID Press

BUTTON

Pull up

SEPARATOR

KNOB

BOTTOM PLATEBOTTOM PLATE

The rear beverage holder is in therear seat armrest. Open thebeverage holder by pushing the frontof it.

To open the console compartment,pull up on the lever and lift thearmrest.

To close, lower the armrest, andpush it down until it latches.

You can put small items in the traylocated in the console compartmentlid. To use the tray, pull up on thelever, and lift the armrest pad.

The console compartment light is onwhen the light switch is in the

or position.

Console Compartment

Interior Convenience ItemsInstrum

entsand

Controls

187

LEVER

LEVER

You can extend the sun visor furtherby pulling it back.

To use a sun visor, pull it down. Youcan also use a sun visor at the sidewindow. Remove the support rodfrom the clip, and swing the sunvisor toward the side window.

There are two accessory powersockets. One is located in the frontof the center console. To use thepower socket, push and release thelid, then push it forward until thesocket comes to the proper positionto use.

Do not use the sun visor extensionfeature over the rear view mirror.

Make sure to slide a sun visorforward to set it to the normal lengthbefore flipping it back in place.

Make sure you put the sun visorback in place when you are gettinginto or out of the vehicle.


Sun Visors Accessory Power Sockets

188

Small, rear ashtrays are located inthe armrests of both rear doors. Toopen an ashtray, pivot the lid up.

The other socket is under thearmrest in the console compartmentstorage area. To use the powersocket, pull up the cover.

These sockets are intended to supplypower for 12 volt DC accessoriesthat are rated 120 watts or less (10amps).

They will not power an automotivetype cigarette lighter element.

The rear ashtray light is on when thelight switch is in the or

position.

The interior of each front door hasan extendable pocket for maps andother small, lightweight items. Forsafety, be sure both front doorpockets are closed while driving.

When the light switch is in theor position, the front door

pocket light is on.

To remove an ashtray for emptying,open the lid, then carefully pull thetab inside the ashtray straight up andout of the armrest.


Rear Ashtrays Front Door Pockets

Instruments

andC

ontrols

189

TAB LID

When you shift to reverse, thesunshade goes down automatically.To use it again, shift to anotherposition, and push the button to raiseit.If the sunshade stops while moving,check for and clear any obstacles,then push the button again.

With the ignition switch in the ON(II) position, push the powersunshade button on the ceilingconsole to raise the rear sunshade.Push the button again to lower it.

Power Rear Sunshade


190

POWER REARSUNSHADE BUTTON

Each rear door has an integratedsunshade. To use a sunshade, holdthe tab on the top, insert thesunshade into the holder, and pullthe sunshade all the way up. Insertthe holes on the sunshade into thehooks on the window frame.

To prevent the integrated sunshadesfrom being unhooked due to winds,leave the rear windows closed whiledriving.

The hooks are intended for use onlyby the sunshades. Do not hang anyother items on the hooks, as thatcould interfere with proper operationof the side curtain airbags.

Integrated Sunshades

Interior Convenience ItemsInstrum

entsand

Controls

191

TAB

HOLE

HOOK HOLDER

After pushing the DOOR button, allthe lights come on when you openany door, unlock the doors with theremote or built-in key, or turn theignition switch from the ON (II) orthe ACCESSORY (I) position to theLOCK (0) position. The indicator inthe button comes on as a reminder.

The front and rear of the ceilinghave ceiling lights.

To change the ‘‘INTERIOR LIGHTDIMMING TIME’’ setting, see page

.

Push each ceiling light button to turnits light on and off.

Push the ON button to turn on all theceiling lights. Push the OFF buttonto turn them off. 113

Ceiling Lights

Interior Lights

192

ONBUTTON

OFFBUTTON

DOORBUTTON

FRONT

REAR

CEILING LIGHTBUTTONS

CEILING LIGHTBUTTONS

The standard audio system hasmany features. This section de-scribes those features and how touse them.

The climate control system in yourvehicle provides a comfortabledriving environment in all weatherconditions.

The climate control system and theaudio system have a voice controlfeature. Refer to the navigationsystem manual for more information.

Your vehicle has an anti-theft audiosystem that requires a code numberto enable it.

The security system helps todiscourage vandalism and theft ofyour vehicle.

Vents, Heating, A/C, and Climate.......................................Control . 194

..............Climate Control Sensors . 202................................Audio System . 203

..........Playing the AM/FM Radio . 204............AM/FM Radio Reception . 208

.....................Adjusting the Sound . 210Playing the XM Satellite

..........................................Radio . 213.................................Playing Discs . 219

..................Protecting Your Discs . 228...Disc Changer Error Messages . 229

................Remote Audio Controls . 230

................Radio Theft Protection . 232............................Security System . 233

...............................Cruise Control . 234..Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC) . 237

HomeLink Universal................................Transceiver . 252

......................................AcuraLink . 256............................................OnStar . 265

..........................HandsFreeLink . 278

FeaturesF

eatures

193

TM

Vents, Heating, A/C, and Climate Control

194

TEMPERATURE DISPLAY

RECIRCULATIONBUTTON

AUTOBUTTON

OFFBUTTON

DUAL BUTTON

TEMPERATURE CONTROL BARS

REARWINDOWDEFOGGER/MIRRORHEATERBUTTON

INTERFACE DIAL

WINDSHIELDDEFROSTER BUTTON

A/CBUTTON

Many climate control functions canstill be controlled by standardbuttons, dials, and knobs, but somefunctions can only be accessed usingthe interface dial. The interface dialhas two parts, a knob and a selector.

The knob turns left and right. Use itto make selections or adjustments toa list or menu on the screen.

The selector can be pushed left,right, up, down, and in. Use theselector to scroll through lists, toselect menus, and to highlight menuitems. When you make a selection,push the center of the selector(ENTER) to go to that selection.

When you unlock the doors withyour remote, the driver’s ID (Driver1 or Driver 2) is detected, and theclimate control settings are turned tothe respective mode automaticallywhen the ignition is turned to theON (II) position.

The climate control system can alsobe operated by voice control. See theNavi section in your quick startguide for an overview of this system,and the navigation system manualfor complete details.

Interface Dial Personalization Setting

Voice Control System

Vents, Heating, A/C, and Climate ControlF

eatures

195

ENTER

SELECTOR

KNOB

To select the desired temperature,push the temperature control bar upor down.

To set the driver’s and passenger’stemperature separately, press theDUAL button. The indicator in thebutton will come on. The driver andpassenger can each set thetemperature to the desired setting.

Press the A/C button to view theclimate control display, then turn theinterface knob to increase ordecrease the fan speed and airflow.

To make the driver’s and passenger’stemperature the same, push theDUAL button again. The indicator inthe button goes out, and thepassenger’s temperature is set to thedriver’s temperature.

Press the A/C button to view theclimate control display. PushingENTER on the interface selectorturns the air conditioning on and off.You will see A/C ON or A/C OFF inthe display.

When you turn the A/C off, thesystem cannot regulate the insidetemperature if you set thetemperature control below theoutside temperature.

Fan Control Temperature Control Bars Air Conditioning (A/C)


196

The outside air intakes for theclimate control system are at thebase of the windshield. Keep thisarea clear of leaves and other debris.

The system should be left in freshair mode under almost all conditions.Keeping the system in recirculationmode, particularly with the A/C off,can cause the windows to fog up.

Switch to recirculation mode whendriving through dusty or smokyconditions, then return to fresh airmode.

This button turns the windshielddefrost on and off.

You can select the vents air flowsfrom. Some air will flow from thedashboard corner and side vents inall modes.

When you push this button, air flowsfrom the defroster vents at the baseof the windshield, and the systemautomatically switches to fresh airmode and turns on the A/C. Whenthe indicator in the button is on, thepassenger’s temperature cannot beset separately from the driver’s.

This button turns the rear windowdefogger on and off (see page ).Pushing this button also turns thepower mirror heaters on and off.

Press the A/C button to view theclimate control display, then pushthe interface selector down. Selectany of the modes by turning theinterface knob.

When the indicator in the button ison, air from the vehicle’s interior issent throughout the system again.When the indicator is off, air isbrought in from the outside of thevehicle (fresh air mode).

142

CONTINUED

Recirculation Button Mode ControlWindshield Defroster Button

Rear Window DefoggerButton


eatures

197

Air flows from the centerand corner vents in the dashboard.

Airflow is divided betweenthe vents in the dashboard and thefloor vents.

Air flows from the floorvents.

Airflow is divided betweenthe floor vents and the defrostervents at the base of the windshield.

When is selected, you canincrease or decrease thetemperature of airflow from thedashboard vent for the driver’s sideand the passenger’s side withoutchanging the temperature of airflowfrom the floor vent.

Push the interface selector right orleft, then turn the interface knob toselect the desired temperature.


198

The heater uses engine coolant towarm the air. If the engine is cold, itwill be several minutes before youfeel warm air coming from thesystem.

The flow-through ventilation systemdraws in outside air, circulates itthrough the interior, then exhausts itthrough vents near the rear window.

Set the temperature to the lowerlimit.Make sure the A/C is off.Select and fresh air mode.Set the fan to the desired speed.

Press the A/C button to viewthe climate control display.Turn on the A/C by pushingENTER on the interface selector.You will see A/C ON in the display.Make sure the temperature is setto maximum cool.Push the interface selector down,then select by turning theinterface knob.If the outside air is humid, selectrecirculation mode. If the outsideair is dry, select fresh air mode.Push the interface selector down,then set the fan to the desiredspeed by turning the interfaceknob.

Press the A/C button to viewthe climate control display.Turn the interface knob to set thefan to the desired speed.Push the interface selector down,then select and fresh airmode.Adjust the warmth of the air withthe temperature control bars.

You can set the temperature for thedriver’s side and the passenger’s sideseparately when this button ispressed (indicator on). When theindicator in the DUAL button is off,you can adjust both sides to thesame temperature with the driver’sside temperature control bar.

Air conditioning places an extra loadon the engine. Watch the enginecoolant temperature gauge (see page

). If it moves near the red zone,turn off the A/C until the gaugereading returns to normal.

you cancool it down more rapidly by partiallyopening the windows, turning on theA/C, and setting the fan tomaximum speed in Fresh Air mode.

1.

2.3.4.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

1.

2.

3.

4.

70

If the interior is very warm,

Using the HeaterDual Button

Ventilation

Using the A/C


eatures

199

Air conditioning, as it cools, removesmoisture from the air. When used incombination with the heater, itmakes the interior warm and dry.

This setting is suitable for all drivingconditions whenever the outsidetemperature is above 32°F (0°C).

To remove fog from the inside of thewindows: Select . The system

automatically switches to fresh airmode and turns on the A/C.Select .Set the fan and temperaturecontrols to maximum level.

For your safety, make sure you havea clear view through all the windowsbefore driving.

Set the fan to the desired speed, orhigh for faster defrosting.Select . The systemautomatically switches to fresh airmode and turns on the A/C.Adjust the temperature so theairflow feels warm.Select to help clear therear window.To increase airflow to thewindshield, close the corner vents.

When you switch to another modefrom , the A/C settingreturns to the previous setting (on oroff). Select A/C, then press ENTERon the interface selector to turn theA/C off if it is on.

Switch the fan on.Turn on the air conditioning.Select and fresh air mode.Adjust the temperature to yourpreference.

To clear the windshield faster, youcan close the dashboard corner ventsby rotating the wheel next to it. Thissends more warm air to thewindshield defroster vents. Once thewindshield is clear, select the freshair mode to avoid fogging thewindows.

1.2.3.4.

1.

2.3.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

Dehumidify the Interior To Defog and Defrost To Remove Exterior Frost or IceFrom the Windows


200

The automatic climate controlsystem adjusts the fan speed andairflow levels to maintain the interiortemperature you select.

In the AUTO mode, the vehicle’sinterior temperature isindependently regulated for thedriver and passenger. If the driver’sside of the vehicle is getting toomuch sun, the system will adjust to alower temperature.

Press the AUTO button.Set the desired temperature withthe temperature control bars.You will see AUTO in the displayif the climate mode is selected.

The system automatically selects theproper mix of conditioned and/orheated air that will, as quickly aspossible, raise or lower the interiortemperature to your preference.

When you set the temperature to itslower or its upper limit, the systemruns at full cooling or heating only. Itdoes not regulate the interiortemperature.

When you change the fan speed, thefan is taken out of AUTO mode andstarts to run at the selected speed.

You can manually select variousfunctions of the climate controlsystem when it is in fully automaticmode. All other features remainautomatically controlled. Making anymanual selection causes the wordAUTO in the display to go out.

Press the OFF button. However, alack of airflow can cause thewindows to fog up. You should keepthe fan on at all times so stale air andmoisture do not build up in theinterior and cause fogging.

1.2.

Automatic Climate Control Semi-automatic Operation

To Turn Everything Off


eatures

201

The climate control system has twosensors. A sunlight sensor is in thetop of the dashboard, and atemperature sensor is next to thesteering column. Do not cover thesensors or spill any liquid on them.

Sunlight and TemperatureSensors

Climate Control Sensors

202

SUNLIGHT SENSOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR

Most audio system functions can stillbe controlled by standard buttons,dials, and knobs, but some functionscan only be accessed using theinterface dial. The interface dial hastwo parts, a knob and a selector.



When you unlock the doors withyour remote and turn the audiosystem on, the driver’s ID (Driver 1or Driver 2) is detected, and theradio preset memory (see page ),the auto select preset memory (seepage ), and the volume andsound level settings (see page )are turned to the respectivememorized mode automatically.

The audio system can also beoperated by voice control. See theNavi section in your quick startguide for an overview of this system,and the navigation system manualfor complete details.

206

207210

Interface Dial Personalization Setting

Voice Control System

Audio SystemF

eatures

203

KNOB

ENTER

SELECTOR

Playing the AM/FM Radio

204

PRESET BUTTONS

AM/FMBUTTON

TUNEBUTTONS

TUNEBUTTONS

AUTOSELECTBUTTON

AM BUTTON

FM BUTTON

AUDIODISPLAYBUTTON

SEEKBUTTONS

AUDIODISPLAYBUTTON

PRESET BUTTONS

UPPER DISPLAY

SCANBUTTON

SEEKBUTTONS

SCANBUTTON

INTERFACE DIAL INTERFACE DIAL

U.S. models (except Alaskan and Hawaiian)

POWER/VOLUMEKNOB

POWER/VOLUMEKNOB

Canadian, Alaskan, and Hawaiian models

－

The band and frequency that theradio was last tuned to are shown onthe display. To change bands, pressthe AM/FM button (AM or FMbutton on Canadian, Alaskan andHawaiian models). You can alsochange bands by pushing theinterface selector up. Each time youpush it up, the band will change toFM1, FM2, or AM. On the FM bands,STEREO will be shown on thenavigation screen and ST on theupper display, if the station isbroadcasting in stereo. Stereoreproduction on AM is not available.

Use the TUNE button totune the radio to a desired frequency.Press the button to tune to ahigher frequency, or the buttonto tune to a lower frequency. To tunewith the interface dial, push theselector down, and turn the knob toTUNE. Then press ENTER on theselector, and turn the knob to thedesired frequency. To exit theTUNE mode, press ENTER on theselector.

You can use any of five methods tofind radio stations on the selectedband: thepreset buttons, and .

The ignition switch must be in theACCESSORY (I) or the ON (II)position. Press the AUDIO button toview the audio control display. Turnthe system on by pressing thepower/volume knob or the AM/FMbutton (AM or FM button onCanadian, Alaskan and Hawaiianmodels). Adjust the volume byturning the power/volume knob.

CONTINUED

TUNETo Play the AM/FM Radio

To Select a Station

TUNE, SEEK, SCAN,AUTO SELECT

Playing the AM/FM RadioF

eatures

205

STEREO ICON

TUNE ICON

BAND

－

－

－The SEEK functionsearches up and down from thecurrent frequency to find a stationwith a strong signal. To activate it,press the or SEEK button,then release it. You can also activateSEEK by pushing the interfaceselector to the right or left.

The SCAN functionsamples all stations with strongsignals on the selected band. Toactivate it, press the SCAN button,then release it.

To scan with the interface dial, pushthe selector down, and then push itto the right. You will see SCANflashing on the screen.

Each preset button orpreset icon can store one frequencyon AM and two frequencies on FM.

Repeat steps 1 through 3 to store atotal of six stations on AM andtwelve stations on FM.

The system will scan for a stationwith a strong signal. When it findsone, it will stop and play that stationfor about 10 seconds. If you donothing, the system will then scanfor the next strong station and play itfor 10 seconds. When it plays astation that you want to listen to,press the scan button again, or pushthe interface selector to the rightagain.

Press the preset button, and holdit until you hear a beep. You canalso store frequencies with theinterface dial. Select the preseticon you want to store thefrequency on, then press ENTERon the interface selector, and holdit for more than 2 seconds.

Use the tune, seek, or scanfunction to tune the radio to adesired station.

Select the desired band, AM orFM. FM1 and FM2 let you storetwo frequencies with each presetbutton (icon).

4.

1.

2.

3.

To store a preset memory location:

SEEK

SCAN

Preset

Playing the AM/FM Radio

206

SCAN ICON

－ If you aretraveling far from home and can nolonger receive your preset stations,you can use the auto select feature tofind stations in the local area.

Push the interface selector down toscroll down the screen, highlightA.SEL, then press ENTER on theinterface selector. You will seeAUTO SEL on the screen, and the

system goes into scan mode forseveral seconds.

Press the A.SEL button. You will seeAUTO SEL on the screen, and thesystem goes into scan mode forseveral seconds. The system storesthe frequencies of six AM andtwelve FM stations in the presetbuttons.

You will see a ‘‘0’’ displayed if autoselect cannot find a strong station forevery preset button.If you do not like the stations autoselect has stored, you can storeother frequencies on the presetbuttons (icons) as previouslydescribed.

To turn off auto select, pressENTER on the interface selector(press the A.SEL button) again. Thisrestores the presets you originallyset.

U.S. models (except Alaskan andHawaiian)

Canadian, Alaskan, and Hawaiianmodels

AUTO SELECT

Playing the AM/FM RadioF

eatures

207

AUTO SEL ICON

Those bands cover these frequen-cies:

AM band: 530 to 1,710 kilohertzFM band: 87.7 to 107.9 megahertz

Driving very near the transmitter ofa station that is broadcasting on afrequency close to the frequency ofthe station you are listening to canalso affect your radio’s reception.You may temporarily hear bothstations, or hear only the station youare close to.

The radio can receive the completeAM and FM bands.

How well the radio receives stationsis dependent on many factors, suchas the distance from the station’stransmitter, nearby large objects,and atmospheric conditions.

A radio station’s signal gets weakeras you get farther away from itstransmitter. If you are listening to anAM station, you will notice the soundvolume becoming weaker, and thestation drifting in and out. If you arelistening to an FM station, you willsee the stereo indicator flickering offand on as the signal weakens.Eventually, the stereo indicator willgo off and the sound will fadecompletely as you get out of range ofthe station’s signal.

Radio stations on the AM band areassigned frequencies at least 10kilohertz apart (530, 540, 550).Stations on the FM band areassigned frequencies at least 0.2megahertz apart (87.9, 88.1, 88.3).

Stations must use these exactfrequencies. It is fairly common forstations to round-off the frequency intheir advertising, so your radio coulddisplay a frequency of 100.9 eventhough the announcer may identifythe station as ‘‘FM101.’’

Radio Frequencies Radio Reception

AM/FM Radio Reception

208

Radio signals, especially on the FMband, are deflected by large objectssuch as buildings and hills. Yourradio then receives both the directsignal from the station’s transmitter,and the deflected signal. This causesthe sound to distort or flutter. This isa main cause of poor radio receptionin city driving.

Radio reception can be affected byatmospheric conditions such asthunderstorms, high humidity, andeven sunspots. You may be able toreceive a distant radio station oneday and not receive it the next daybecause of a change in conditions.

Electrical interference from passingvehicles and stationary sources cancause temporary reception problems.

As required by the FCC:Changes or modifications not expresslyapproved by the party responsible forcompliance could void the user’sauthority to operate the equipment.

AM/FM Radio ReceptionF

eatures

209

To adjust them, press the AUDIObutton, push the interface selectordown, and turn the interface knob toSOUND. Then press ENTER on theselector.

Select the mode you want to adjustby pushing the interface selector upor down, or by turning the interfaceknob.

BASS, TREBLE, BALANCE, andFADER are each adjustable. You canalso adjust the strength of the soundcoming from the center andsubwoofer speakers. In addition, youcan set the AudioPilot andCenterpoint features (when playinga CD-DA) to on or off.

Adjusting the Sound

210

SOUND ICON

－－－To adjust bassand treble, select BASS or TREBLE,and press ENTER on the interfaceselector. The current setting isshown on the display. Turn theinterface knob to the desired level,and enter your selection by pressingENTER on the interface selector.

Thesemodes adjust the strength of thesound coming from each speaker.Fader adjusts the front-to-backstrength, while balance adjusts theside-to-side strength. To adjust faderand balance, select FADER orBALANCE, then press ENTER onthe interface selector. The currentsetting is shown on the screen. Turnthe interface knob to the desiredlevel, and enter your selection bypressing ENTER on the interfaceselector. To equalize the fader orbalance, turn the interface knob untilthe marks on the sound grid come tothe center of the adjustment bar.

Toadjust the strength of the soundfrom the center or subwooferspeaker, select it and press ENTERon the interface selector. Turn theinterface knob to the desired level,and enter your selection by pressingENTER on the interface selector.

CONTINUED

BASS/TREBLE FADER/BALANCE CENTER/SUBWOOFER

Adjusting the SoundF

eatures

211

－－

To set this feature on or off, selectAudioPilot, and press ENTER on theinterface selector. Turn the interfaceknob to ON or OFF, and pressENTER on the interface selector.The ON or OFF indicator is shownon the screen.

Bose AudioPilotdigital processing monitors soundwithin the cabin, and helpscompensate for unwanted ambientnoise with no perceived change inaudio volume.

Bose Centerpointsignal processing processes stereoand matrix surround recordings tofive independent channels, deliveringa multi-channel surround soundexperience, even from conventionalstereo discs.

To set this feature on or off, selectCenterpoint, and press ENTER onthe interface selector. Turn theinterface knob to ON or OFF, andpress ENTER on the interfaceselector. The ON or OFF indicator isshown on the display.

Centerpoint is only availablewhen listening to a CD (CD-DA).

AudioPilot and Centerpoint areregistered trade marks of the Bosecorporation.

Adjusting the Sound

AudioPilot Centerpoint

212

NOTE:

Playing the XM Satellite RadioF

eatures

213

PRESET BUTTON

SCANBUTTON

DISPLAY/MODEBUTTON

SATELLITE RADIO BUTTON

AUDIODISPLAYBUTTON

UPPER DISPLAY

INTERFACE DIAL

U.S. models (except Alaskan and Hawaiian)

POWER/VOLUMEKNOB

CATEGORYBUTTONS

TUNEBUTTONS

－

Your vehicle is capable of receivingXM Satellite Radio anywhere in theUnited States, except Hawaii andAlaska.XM is a registered trade mark ofXM Satellite Radio, Inc.

XM Satellite Radio receives signalsfrom two satellites to produce clear,high-quality digital reception. Itoffers many channels in severalcategories. Along with a largeselection of different types of music,XM Satellite Radio also allows you toview channel and category selectionsin the audio display.

To listen to XM Satellite Radio, turnthe ignition switch to theACCESSORY (I) or the ON (II)position. Push the power/volumeknob to turn on the audio system,and press the button. Thelast channel you listened to will showin the display. Adjust the volume byturning the power/volume knob.

Push the AUDIO button to displayXM information on the screen.

You may experience periods whenXM Satellite Radio does not transmitthe artist’s name and or the song titleinformation. If this happens, there isnothing wrong with your system.

In the category mode, such as Jazz,Rock, Classical, etc., you cannavigate through all of the channelswithin that category. In the channelmode, you can select all of theavailable channels.

To change categories, press theCATEGORY button, or push theinterface selector left or right.

To switch between thecategory mode and channel mode,press and hold the DISP/MODEbutton until the mode changes. TheCATEGORY or CHANNEL mode isdisplayed inverted on the screen. Toswitch the mode with the interfacedial, scroll down, select MODE, andpress ENTER on the selector.

Playing the XM Satellite Radio

MODE

214

－To change channels, press theTUNE button, or scroll down withthe interface selector, select TUNE,and press ENTER on the selector.Then turn the interface knob to thedesired channel. In the categorymode, you can only select channelswithin that category.

The scan function givesyou a sampling of all channels whilein the channel mode. In the categorymode, only the channels within thatcategory are scanned. To activateSCAN, press the SCAN button. Toscan with the interface dial, scrolldown, and push interface selector tothe right. You will see SCAN on thescreen.

The system plays each channel innumerical order for a few seconds,then selects the next channel. Whenyou hear a channel you want tocontinue listening to, push theinterface selector to the right again.

CONTINUED

SCAN


eatures

215

TUNE ICON

－ You can store up to 12preset channels using the six presetbuttons. Each button stores onechannel from the XM1 band and onechannel from the XM2 band.

To store a channel:Press the button or scrollup by pushing the interfaceselector up. Either XM1 or XM2will be shown on the display.

Use the TUNE or SCAN functionto tune to a desired channel.

In category mode, only channelswithin that category can be selected.In channel mode, all channels can beselected.

Pick the preset button you wantfor that channel. Press and holdthe button until you hear a beep.

Press the button or scrollup again. The other XM band willbe shown. Store the next sixchannels using steps 2 and 3.

Once a channel is stored, press andrelease the proper preset button totune to it.

Repeat steps 2 and 3 to store thefirst six channels.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

Preset


216

XMBAND

The XM satellites are in orbit overthe equator; therefore, objects southof the vehicle may cause satellitereception interruptions. To helpcompensate for this, ground-basedrepeaters are placed in majormetropolitan areas.Satellite signals are more likely to beblocked by tall buildings andmountains the farther north youtravel from the equator.

CONTINUED


eatures

217

Signal may be blocked bymountains or large obstacles tothe south.

Signal weaker inthese areas.

SATELLITE

GROUNDREPEATER

Depending on where you drive, youmay experience reception problems.Interference can be caused by any ofthese conditions:

Driving on the north side of alarge commercial truck on aneast/west road.Driving in tunnels.Driving on a road beside a verticalwall, steep cliff, or hill to the southof you.Driving on the lower level of amulti-tiered road.Driving on a single lane roadalongside dense trees taller than50 ft. (15 m) to the south of you.

There may be other geographicsituations that could affect satelliteradio reception.

If you decide to purchase XMsatellite radio service, contact XMRadio at , or at1-800-852-9696. You will need to givethem your radio I.D. number andyour credit card number. To get your

radio I.D. number, turn the TUNEknob until ‘‘0’’ appears in the display.Your I.D. will appear in the display.

If your XM Radio service has expiredor you purchased your vehicle froma previous owner, you can listen to asampling of the broadcasts availableon XM Satellite Radio. With theignition switch in the ACCESSORY(I) or the ON (II) position, push thepower/volume knob to turn on theaudio system, and press the

button. A variety of musictypes and styles will play.

While waiting for activation, makesure your vehicle remains in an openarea with good reception. Once youraudio system is activated, ‘‘category’’or ‘‘CH’’ will appear in the display,and you’ll be able to listen to XMRadio broadcasts. XM Radio willcontinue to send an activation signalto your vehicle for at least 12 hoursfrom the activation request. If theservice has not been activated after36 hours, contact XM Radio.

After you’ve registered with XMRadio, keep your audio system in theSatellite Radio mode while you waitfor activation. This should take about30 minutes.

Driving on the north side of aneast/west mountain road.

As required by the FCC:Changes or modifications not expresslyapproved by the party responsible forcompliance could void the user’sauthority to operate the equipment.

www.xmradio.com


Receiving XM Satellite RadioService

218

CONTINUED

Playing DiscsF

eatures

219

EJECTBUTTON

EJECTBUTTON

UPPER DISPLAY

INTERFACE DIAL INTERFACE DIAL

U.S. models (except Alaskan and Hawaiian) Canadian, Alaskan, and Hawaiian models

SKIPBUTTONS

AUDIODISPLAYBUTTON

SKIPBUTTONS

DISCBUTTON

LOADBUTTON

SCANBUTTON

POWER/VOLUMEKNOB

TUNEBUTTONS

DISCBUTTON

LOADBUTTON

SCANBUTTON

AUDIODISPLAYBUTTON

TUNEBUTTONS

POWER/VOLUMEKNOB

Your vehicle’s audio system has anin-dash disc changer with the samecontrols used for the radio. Tooperate the disc changer, the ignitionswitch must be in the ACCESSORY(I) or the ON (II) position.

The disc changer can play these discformats:

CD (CD-DA)CD-R/RWDVD-ADTS

The disc packages or jackets shouldhave one of these marks.

DVD-A discs not meeting DVDverification standards may not beplayable.

The changer cannot play DVD-V orDVD-R/RW formats.

Some CD-DA and CD-ROM mixeddiscs are not playable.

‘‘DTS’’ and ‘‘DTS Digital Surround’’are registered trademarks of DigitalTheater System, Inc.

The changer can also play MP3 orWMA formats (see page ).

You cannot load and play 3-inch(8-cm) discs in this system.

225

Playing Discs

220

TM

Do not use discs with adhesive labels.The label can curl up and cause thedisc to jam in the unit.

To load multiple discs in oneoperation:

With the ignition in theACCESSORY (I) or the ON (II)position, press and hold the LOADbutton until you hear a beep andsee ‘‘LOAD’’ in the upper display,then release the button.Insert a disc into the slot. Insert itonly about halfway; the drive willpull it in the rest of the way.

To load a single disc:Press and release the LOADbutton.

‘‘NO DISC’’ is shown on the screenfor an empty position in thechanger. When the green loadindicator comes on and you see‘‘LOAD’’ in the upper display,insert the disc into the slot. Insertit only about halfway; the drive willpull it in the rest of the way.

You can select the position to load adisc. Turn the interface knob toselect the position, then pressENTER on the selector. This startsthe loading sequence. If you do notselect the position, the system loadsthe disc to the first empty position innumerical order.

If you press the LOAD button whilea disc is playing, the system will stopplaying that disc and start theloading sequence. It will then playthe disc just loaded.

When ‘‘LOAD’’ appears in theupper display again, insert thenext disc into the slot.Repeat this until all six positionsare loaded. The system will thenbegin playing the last disc loaded.

If you stop loading discs before allsix positions are filled, the systemwill wait for 15 seconds, stop the loadoperation, and begin playing the lastdisc loaded.

1.

2.

3.

4.

1.

2.

Loading Discs in the Changer

Playing DiscsF

eatures

221

Select the changer by pressing theDISC button. The system will beginplaying the last selected disc in thedisc changer. You will see thecurrent disc position highlighted.

To select a different disc, press thecorresponding number on the presetbuttons, or turn the interface knob tohighlight the desired disc, then pressENTER on the interface selector.

The player can play CD-TEXT, MP3,and WMA formats.When you play CD-TEXT, you willsee the track name, artist name, andalbum name on the screen. Whenyou play MP3/WMA discs, you willsee the track name and folder nameon the screen. If the disc was notrecorded with this information, it willnot be displayed.

Each time you press and release thebutton or push the interface

selector to the right, the player skipsforward to the beginning of the nexttrack. Press and release the

button or push the interfaceselector to the left to skip backwardto the beginning of the current track.Press the button or push theinterface selector to the left again toskip to the previous track.To move rapidly within a track, pressand hold the / or /

button.

You can also choose a track directlyfrom a track list. Press ENTER onthe interface selector, and the tracklist screen will be shown. If there areno track names, track numbers aredisplayed. You will see the currenttrack is highlighted. Turn theinterface knob to select the desiredtrack, then press ENTER on theinterface selector.

To Play a Disc

To Change Tracks

To Choose a Track

Playing Discs

222

CURRENT DISC

CURRENT TRACK

To exit the track list display, pressthe AUDIO button, or push theinterface selector to the left. If you don’t, the system advances to

the next track, plays about 10seconds of it, and continues throughthe rest of the tracks the same way.

When you press and hold the SCANbutton until you hear a beep or scrolldown and push the interface selectorto the right, the first track of thecurrent disc plays for about 10

seconds. You will see SCAN next toDISC on the screen. To hear the restof the disc, press the SCAN buttonor push the interface selector to theright again within 10 seconds.

If you don’t, the system advances tothe next disc, plays about 10 secondsof it, and continues through the restof the discs the same way. When thesystem reaches the last disc, DISCSCAN is canceled, and the disc playsnormally.

When you press the SCAN button orscroll down and push the interfaceselector to the left, the next track ofthe current track plays for about 10seconds. You will see SCAN next toTRACK on the screen. To hear therest of the track, press the SCANbutton or push the interface selector

to the left again within 10 seconds.

Playing Discs

Track Scan

Disc Scan Features

223

SCAN ICON

SCAN ICON

To replay the current trackcontinuously, use the interfaceselector to scroll down, selectTRACK REPEAT, and press ENTERon the interface selector. As areminder, you will see REPEAT nextto TRACK on the screen. To turnthis feature off, highlight TRACKREPEAT (if not already highlighted),and press ENTER on the interfaceselector again.

To replay the current disccontinuously, use the interfaceselector to scroll down, select DISCREPEAT, and press ENTER on theinterface selector. As a reminder,you will see REPEAT next to DISCon the screen. To turn this featureoff, highlight DISC REPEAT (if notalready highlighted), and pressENTER on the interface selectoragain.

To play the tracks of the current discin random order, use the interfaceselector to scroll down, selectTRACK RANDOM, and pressENTER on the interface selector. Asa reminder, you will see RANDOMnext to TRACK on the screen. Toturn this feature off, highlightTRACK RANDOM (if not alreadyhighlighted), and press ENTER onthe interface selector again.

Track Repeat Disc Repeat Random Play

Playing Discs

224

REPEAT ICON REPEAT ICON RANDOM ICON

TRACK REPEAT ICON DISC REPEAT ICON TRACK RANDOM ICON

Use the disc controls previouslydescribed.

Compatible with variable bit rate andmulti-session

Bit rate: 32/40/48/56/64/80/96/112/128/160/192/224/256/320 kbps(MPEG1)8/16/24/32/40/48/56/64/80/96/112/128/160 kbps (MPEG2)

Sampling frequency: 32/44.1/48 kHz(MPEG1)24/22.05/16 kHz (MPEG2)

The specifications of the compatibleMP3 file are:

The specifications of the compatibleWMA file are:Sampling frequency: 32/44.1/48 kHzBit rate: 48/64/80/96/128/160/192kbps

If you turn the system off while adisc is playing, either with thepower/volume knob or the ignitionswitch, play will continue at the samepoint when you turn it back on.

To take the system out of disc mode,press the AM/FM button (AM orFM button on Canadian, Alaskan,and Hawaiian models) or press the

button (U.S. models). Toreturn to disc mode, press the DISCbutton.

The changer plays MP3/WMA discsin recorded order. Maximumplayable file layers are 8, and totalplayable tracks are 255. If your dischas a complex structure, the changertakes some time to read the discbefore beginning play.

To play an MP3/WMA disc, use thedisc controls previously described,along with the following information.

Compatible with variable bit rate andmulti-session

To pause a disc, press thecorresponding number of thecurrent disc on the preset buttons.To play the disc again, press thepreset button again.

Playing Discs

Playing a DVD-A DiscTo Pause a Disc

To Stop Playing a Disc

Playing an MP3/WMA Disc

Features

225

To play the tracks of the currentfolder in random order, use theinterface selector to scroll down,select FOLDER RANDOM with theinterface knob, and press ENTER onthe interface selector. As a reminder,you will see FOLDER RANDOMnext to the disc number on thescreen. To turn this feature off,highlight FOLDER RANDOM (if notalready highlighted), and pressENTER on the selector again.

To replay the current foldercontinuously, use the interfaceselector to scroll down, selectFOLDER REPEAT with theinterface knob, and press ENTER onthe interface selector. As a reminder,you will see FOLDER REPEAT nextto the disc number on the screen. Toturn this feature off, highlightFOLDER REPEAT (if not alreadyhighlighted), and press ENTER onthe selector again.

To enter the FOLDER LIST, pressENTER on the selector, select afolder by turning the interface knob,then press ENTER on the selector. Ifyou want to move to the parentfolder, push the selector up. If thereare no folder names, ‘‘No Title’’ isdisplayed. You will see the currentfolder highlighted.

Playing Discs

Folder RandomFolder Repeat

226

FOLDER RANDOM ICON

FOLDER RANDOM ICON

CURRENT FOLDER

FOLDER REPEAT ICON

FOLDER REPEAT ICON

To remove a different disc from thechanger, first select it by pressingthe corresponding number on thepreset button or turning theinterface knob, and pressing ENTERon the interface selector. When thatdisc begins playing, press the ejectbutton.

To eject all discs, press and hold theeject button.

To eject one disc, press and releasethe eject button.

You can also eject discs when theignition switch is off:

When you press the eject buttonwhile listening to the radio, or withthe audio system turned off, the discthat was last selected is ejected.After that disc is ejected, pressingthe eject button again will eject thenext disc in numerical order. Bydoing this six times, you can removeall the discs from the changer.

To remove the disc that is currentlyplaying, press the eject button. Youwill see ‘‘EJECT’’ in the upper display.When you remove the disc from theslot, the system automatically entersthe previous mode [AM, FM1, FM2,or XM Satellite Radio (U.S. modelsexcept Alaskan and Hawaiian)]. Thesystem also begins the loadsequence so you can load anotherdisc. If you do not load another disc,the load sequence is canceled, andthe system continues playing in theprevious mode.

If you do not remove the disc fromthe slot, the system will reload thedisc after 10 seconds and put thedisc changer in pause mode. Tobegin playing the disc, press the discbutton.

Removing Discs from theChanger

Playing DiscsF

eatures

227

When using CD-R or CD-RW discs,use only high quality discs labeledfor audio use.

When recording a CD-R orCD-RW, the recording must beclosed for it to be used by the discchanger.

When a disc is not being played,store it in its case to protect it fromdust and other contamination. Toprevent warpage, keep discs out ofdirect sunlight and extreme heat.

A new disc may be rough on theinner and outer edges. The smallplastic pieces causing this roughnesscan flake off and fall on therecording surface of the disc,causing skipping or other problems.Remove these pieces by rubbing theinner and outer edges with the sideof a pencil or pen.

Never try to insert foreign objects inthe disc changer.

Handle a disc by its edges; nevertouch either surface. Do not placestabilizer rings or labels on the disc.These, along with contaminationfrom finger prints, liquids, and felt-tip pens, can cause the disc to notplay properly, or possibly jam in thedrive.

To clean a disc, use a clean soft cloth.Wipe across the disc from the centerto the outside edge.

Play only standard, round, 5-inch(12 cm) discs. Smaller or odd-shaped discs may jam in the driveor cause other problems.

Handle your discs properly toprevent damage and skipping.

General Information Protecting Discs

Protecting Your Discs

228

Error Message Cause SolutionIf you see an error message in thedisplay while playing a disc, find thecause in the chart to the right. If youcannot clear the error message, takeyour vehicle to your dealer.

FOCUS Error

Mechanical Error

High Temperature

Press the disc eject button, and remove thedisc(s). Check for an error indication. Insertthe disc(s) again. If the code does not disappearor the disc(s) cannot be removed, consult yourdealer.Press the disc eject button, and remove thedisc(s). Check for an error indication. Insertthe disc(s) again. If the code does not disappearor the disc(s) cannot be removed, consult yourdealer.Will disappear when the temperature returns tonormal.

Disc Changer Error MessagesF

eatures

229

▲ ▼

＋

－

＋－

＋－

Three controls for the audio systemare mounted in the steering wheelhub. These let you control basicfunctions without removing yourhand from the wheel.

The VOL button adjusts the volumeup ( ) or down ( ). Press the topor bottom of the button, hold it untilthe desired volume is reached, thenrelease it.

If you are listening to the radio, usethe CH button to change stations.Each time you press the top ( ) ofthe button, the system goes to thenext preset station on the band youare listening to. Press the bottom( ) to go back to the previousstation.

If you are playing a disc, the systemskips to the beginning of the nexttrack each time you press the top( ) of the CH button. Press thebottom ( ) to return to thebeginning of the current track. Pressit again to return to the previoustrack. You will see the disc and tracknumbers in the upper display.

The MODE button changes themode. Pressing the buttonrepeatedly selects FM1, FM2, AM,XM Satellite Radio (U.S. modelsexcept Alaskan and Hawaiian), or adisc (if a disc is loaded).

To search up and down from thecurrent frequency and find a stationwith a strong signal, press the top( ) or bottom ( ) of the button for1 second.

Remote Audio Controls

Remote Audio Controls

230

MODEBUTTON

CHBUTTON

VOLBUTTON

＋

－

＋－

＋－

＋

－

If you are listening to XM SatelliteRadio, use the CH button to changechannels. Each time you press thetop ( ) of the button, the systemgoes to the next preset channel.Press the bottom ( ) to go back tothe previous preset channel.To go to the next channel of thecategory you are listening to, pressthe top ( ) of the button for 1second. Press the bottom ( ) for 1second to go back to the previouschannel.

To go to the next disc, press the top( ) of button for 1 second. Pressthe bottom ( ) to go back to theprevious disc. When you play an mp3/wma disc, press the top ( ) of thebutton for 1 second to go to the nextfolder. Press the bottom ( ) for 1second to go back to the previousfolder.

Remote Audio ControlsF

eatures

231

Your vehicle’s audio system willdisable itself if it is disconnectedfrom electrical power for any reason.To make it work again, you mustenter a specific five-digit code withthe preset buttons. Because thereare hundreds of numbercombinations possible from the fivedigits, making the system workwithout knowing the exact code isnearly impossible.

You should have received a card thatlists your audio system code numberand serial number. It is best to storethis card in a safe place at home. Inaddition, you should write the audiosystem’s serial number in this owner’smanual.

If you lose the card, you must obtainthe code number from your dealer.To do this, you will need the audiosystem’s serial number.

If your vehicle’s battery is discon-nected or goes dead, or the radiofuse is removed, the audio systemwill disable itself. If this happens,you will see ‘‘ ’’ in the upperdisplay the next time you turn on thesystem. Use the preset buttons toenter the five-digit code. The code islocated on the radio code cardincluded in your owner’s manual kit.When it is entered correctly, theradio will start playing.

If you make a mistake entering thecode, do not start over; complete thefive-digit sequence, then enter thecorrect code. You have 10 tries toenter the correct code. If you areunsuccessful in 10 attempts, youmust then leave the system on for 1hour before trying again.

If the code card is lost, your dealercan access your code with yourradio’s serial number. To access theserial number, turn the radio on. It

must display ‘‘ ’’, then turnthe radio off. Push and hold thepreset 1 and preset 6 buttons, thenpush the power/volume knob. Theserial number will appear in two setsof four digits.

The system will retain your AM andFM presets even if power isdisconnected.

Radio Theft Protection

232

The security system will not set ifthe hood, trunk, or any door is notfully closed. If the system will not set,check the Door and Trunk Openmonitor on the instrument panel (seepage ) to see if the doors andtrunk are fully closed. Since it is notpart of the monitor display, manuallycheck the hood.

Do not attempt to alter this systemor add other devices to it.

The security system helps to protectyour vehicle and valuables from theft.The horn sounds and a combinationof headlights, position/side markerlights, and taillights flash if someoneattempts to break into your vehicleor remove the radio. This alarmcontinues for 2 minutes, then thesystem resets. To reset an alarmingsystem before the 2 minutes haveelapsed, unlock either front doorwith the remote or the built-in key.

With the system set, you can stillopen the trunk with the remotewithout triggering the alarm. Thealarm will sound if the trunk lock isforced, or the trunk is opened withthe trunk release button on thedriver’s door or the emergency trunkopener.

Once the security system is set,opening any door or the hoodwithout using the built-in key or theremote will cause it to sound. It alsosounds if the radio is removed fromthe dashboard or the audio systemwiring is cut.

The security system automaticallysets 15 seconds after you lock thedoors, close the hood, and close thetrunk. For the system to activate,you must lock the doors from theoutside with the remote, built-in key,lock tab, or door lock switch. Thesecurity system indicator on theinstrument panel starts blinkingimmediately to show you the systemis setting itself.

13

Security SystemF

eatures

233

SECURITY SYSTEM INDICATOR

Cruise control allows you to maintaina set speed above 25 mph (40 km/h)without keeping your foot on theaccelerator pedal. It should be usedfor cruising on straight, openhighways. It is not recommended forcity driving, winding roads, slipperyroads, heavy rain, or bad weather.

Press and release the DECEL/SET button on the steering wheel.The CRUISE CONTROL iconappears on the multi-informationdisplay to show the system is nowactivated.

Accelerate to the desired cruisingspeed above 25 mph (40 km/h).

Push in the CRUISE button on thesteering wheel. The CRUISEMAIN indicator on the instrumentpanel comes on.

When cruise control is on whiledriving, the SH-AWD torquedistribution monitor and the tirepressure monitor are not shownon the multi-information display.

1.

2.

3.Using Cruise Control

Cruise Control

234

RES/ACCELBUTTON

DECEL/SET BUTTON

CRUISE BUTTON

Improper use of the cruisecontrol can lead to a crash.

Use the cruise control onlywhen traveling on openhighways in good weather.

You can increase the set cruisingspeed in any of these ways:

You can decrease the set cruisingspeed in any of these ways:

Press and hold the RES/ACCELbutton. When you reach thedesired cruising speed, release thebutton.

Push on the accelerator pedal.Accelerate to the desired cruisingspeed, and press the DECEL/SETbutton.

Press and hold the DECEL/SETbutton. Release the button whenyou reach the desired speed.

Tap the brake pedal lightly withyour foot. The CRUISECONTROL indicator on theinstrument panel will go out.When the vehicle slows to thedesired speed, press the DECEL/SET button.

To increase your speed in verysmall amounts, tap the RES/ACCEL button. Each time you dothis, the vehicle speeds up about 1mph (1.6 km/h).

To slow down in very smallamounts, tap the DECEL/SETbutton. Each time you do this,your vehicle slows down about 1mph (1.6 km/h).

Cruise control may not hold the setspeed when you are going up anddown hills. If your speed increasesgoing down a hill, use the brakes toslow down. This cancels cruisecontrol. On models with adaptivecruise control (ACC), this alsocauses the cruise control icon on themulti-information display to go offand the cruise mode icon to come on.To resume the set speed, press theRES/ACCEL button. The CRUISECONTROL icon on the multi-information display will come backon.

When climbing a steep hill, theautomatic transmission maydownshift to hold the set speed.

CONTINUED

Changing the Set Speed

Cruise ControlF

eatures

235

Tap the brake pedal.

Push the CANCEL button on thesteering wheel.

Resting your foot on the brake pedalcauses cruise control to cancel.

Even with cruise control on, you canstill use the accelerator pedal tospeed up for passing. Aftercompleting the pass, take your footoff the accelerator pedal. The vehiclewill return to the set cruising speed.

You can cancel cruise control in anyof these ways:

Push the CRUISE button.

When you push the CANCEL buttonor tap the brake pedal, the systemremembers the previously set speed.To return to that speed, accelerate toabove 25 mph (40 km/h), then pressand release the RES/ACCEL button.The CRUISE CONTROL indicatorcomes on. The vehicle accelerates tothe same speed as before.

Pressing the CRUISE button turnsthe system completely off and erasesthe previous cruising speed.

Resuming the Set SpeedCancelling Cruise Control

Cruise Control

236

CANCEL BUTTON

CRUISE BUTTON

The radar sensor for ACC is sharedwith the collision mitigation brakesystem (CMBS). For moreinformation on the radar sensor, seepage . For more information onCMBS, see page .

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)consists of a radar sensor in thefront grille, the ACC buttons on thesteering wheel, and the ACCfunctions of the multi-informationdisplay.

325326

If equipped

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)

ACC Components

Features

237

ACC INDICATORMULTI-INFORMATIONDISPLAY

RES/ACCELBUTTON

ACC BUTTON

DISTANCE BUTTON

CANCEL BUTTON

DECEL/SETBUTTON

Adaptive cruise control (ACC) allowsyou to maintain a set speed and keepthe vehicle ahead of you at a safedistance without having to use theaccelerator pedal or the brake pedal.

When the vehicle ahead of you slowsdown or speeds up, ACC senses thechange in distance and compensatesby accelerating or braking yourvehicle to reach the cruising speedyou previously set. The distancebetween vehicles is based on yourspeed: the faster you go, the longerthe distance will be; the slower yougo, the shorter it will be.

If the vehicle ahead of you slowsdown or speeds up suddenly, ACCalerts you by sounding a beeper anddisplaying a message on the multi-information display.

The ACC radar sensor in the frontgrille can detect and monitor thedistance of a vehicle up to 328 feet(100 meters) ahead of your vehicle.For more information on the radarsensor, see page .

Do not use ACC under theseconditions:

In poor visibility.In heavy traffic.When you must slow down andspeed up repeatedly.On winding roads.When you enter a toll gate,interchange, service area, parkingarea, etc. In these areas, there isno vehicle ahead of you, but ACCwould still try to accelerate to yourset speed.In bad weather (rain, fog, snow,etc.)On a slippery road (for example aroad covered with ice or snow).

As with any system, there are limitsto ACC. Inappropriate use of ACCcan result in a serious accident. Usethe brake pedal whenever necessary,and always keep a safe distancebetween your vehicle and othervehicles.

326


Overview


238

When there is no vehicle ahead withinACC range

When a vehicle ahead is within ACCrange and going slower than your setspeedYour vehicle will maintain a set

cruising speed. If the vehicle ahead of you is goingslower than your set speed, yourvehicle will slow down to the speedof that vehicle. Your vehicle will thenfollow at a constant distance until thevehicle ahead changes speed again.

CONTINUED


Operating Characteristics

Features

239

Improper use of ACC can leadto a crash.

Use ACC only when travelingon open highways in goodweather.

If the vehicle ahead of you slowsdown abruptly, or if another vehiclecuts in front of you, a beeper soundsand a message appears on the multi-information display to warn you.

Your vehicle follows the vehicleahead of it, keeping a constantdistance. ACC will not keep yourvehicle at a constant distance if thevehicle ahead of you goes out ofrange of your set speed.

If the vehicle ahead of you slowsdown and changes lanes, ACC nolonger tracks it. Your vehicle willthen return to your set speed.

In the case, decelerate your vehicleby pressing the brake pedal, andkeep an appropriate distance fromthe vehicle ahead.

When a vehicle ahead is within ACCrange and going at a steady speed


240

ACC does not work below 25 mph(40 km/h). It cannot bring yourvehicle to a complete stop.

ACC will not sound a beeper ordisplay a message on the multi-information display to warn you ofvehicles going slower than 13 mph(20 km/h) or vehicles that areparked. In these cases, it is up toyou to maintain a safe distance byusing the brake pedal.

ACC may not recognizemotorcycles or other smallvehicles ahead of your vehicle.

ACC may react to vehicles besideyou or even building beside you bymomentarily applying the brakesor sounding a beeper underconditions such as a sudden curveor narrowing of the road, anabrupt movement of the steeringwheel, or if you are in an unusualposition within your lane.


Limitations

Features

241

Push the ACC button on thesteering wheel. The ACC indicatoron the instrument panel comes on,and ‘‘ACC’’ is shown on the multi-information display.

Accelerate to the desired speedabove 25 mph (40 km/h).

Press and release the DECEL/SET button on the steering wheel.

If you press the DECEL/SET buttonwhen the vehicle speed is below 25mph (40 km/h), you will hear threebeeps. This means ACC is notactivated, and you cannot set yourspeed.

When your speed reaches 25 mph(40 km/h), ACC goes into wait mode,and ‘‘ACC STANDBY’’ is shown onthe multi-information display.

1.

2.

3.

CONTINUED


Using the ACC

242

ACC BUTTON

DECEL/SET BUTTON

When the speed is set, it is shownalong with a vehicle icon anddistance bars on the multi-information display.Refer to page for how to set andchange the set distance betweenyour vehicle and the vehicle ahead ofyou.

If you cancel ACC by pressing theCANCEL button or by tapping thebrake pedal, the previously setcruising speed is shown on the multi-information display. To store thisspeed as your new cruising speed,press and release the RES/ACCELbutton.

If you change the speed unitmeasurement from the factorydefault setting, the initial speed unitmeasurement is shown under thecurrent unit.

To change the speed unitmeasurement from mph to km/h,see page .

246

89

Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)F

eatures

243

SET VEHICLESPEED

U.S.

CANADA CANADA CANADA

U.S. U.S.

PREVIOUSLY SET SPEEDSET VEHICLEDISTANCE INITIAL SPEED UNIT

The set speed can be increasedusing the RES/ACCEL button or theaccelerator pedal.

To increase the set speed with theRES/ACCEL button, do this:

Press and hold the RES/ACCELbutton. The vehicle will accelerate.When you reach the speed you want,release the button.

To increase your speed in small

amounts, tap the RES/ACCELbutton repeatedly. Each time you dothis, your vehicle will speed up about1 mph (1 km/h).

While the vehicle accelerates to theset speed, the set speed on the multi-information display will flash.

If a vehicle ahead of you is driving ata slower speed than the speed youwant to set, your vehicle will notaccelerate; it will keep some distancebetween your vehicles.

To increase the set speed with theaccelerator pedal, do this:

Press the accelerator pedal toincrease to the speed you want, thenpress the DECEL/SET button. Theset speed will be shown on the multi-information display. If you do notpress the DECEL/SET button, yourvehicle will return to the previouslyset speed.

The ACC beeper will not soundwhile you press the accelerator pedal,no matter how close you get to thevehicle ahead of you.


Increasing the Set Speed

244

RES/ACCEL BUTTON

CONTINUED

The set speed can be decreasedusing the DECEL/SET button or thebrake pedal.

To decrease the set speed with theDECEL/SET button, do this:

Press and hold the DECEL/SETbutton. Release the button when youreach the speed you want.

To slow down in small amounts, tapthe DECEL/SET button repeatedly.

Each time you do this, your vehicleslows down about 1 mph (1 km/h).

When the system detects a vehicleahead of you, a beeper sounds onceand a solid-line vehicle icon appearson the multi-information display.

The set cruising speed will be shownon the multi-information display.

On a steep downhill, the vehiclespeed may exceed the set cruisingspeed.

To decrease the set speed with thebrake pedal, do this:

Tap the brake pedal. When thevehicle slows down to the speed youwant, press the DECEL/SET button.The set speed will be shown on themulti-information display. If you usethe brake pedal to decrease speed,and then press the RES/ACCELbutton, your vehicle will return to thepreviously set speed.


Decreasing the Set Speed Detecting a Vehicle Ahead of You

Features

245

SET/DECEL BUTTON

U.S.

CANADA

With ACC on, the distance betweenyour vehicle and the vehicle ahead ofyou is controlled and maintained.You can change this distance to oneof three ranges: long, middle, orshort,

To change the range, press theDISTANCE button. Each time youpress the button, the range changesfrom Long, to Middle, and then toShort.

The higher your vehicle speed is, thelonger the distance will be set asshown below.

When that vehicle changes lanes orgoes out of ACC range, a beepersounds once. If there is no vehicleahead of you within ACC range, adotted-line vehicle icon will be on themulti-information display.To set the ACC beeper on or off, seepage .87

SpeedVehicleDistance

Long

Middle

Short

50 mph(80 Km/h)

154 feet47 meters111 feet

34 meters85 feet

26 meters

65 mph(104 Km/h)

200 feet61 meters173 feet

42 meters101 feet

31 meters


Changing Vehicle Distance

246

DISTANCE BUTTONU.S.

CANADA

Press the ACC button. The ACCindicator in the instrument panelgoes off.

Tap the brake pedal.

Push the CANCEL button on thesteering wheel.

If you cancel ACC by pressing theACC button, the previously setcruising speed is erased frommemory.

The distance you select is alsoshown on the multi-informationdisplay.

ACC is canceled whenever you doany of these actions:

When you push the CANCEL buttonor tap the brake pedal to cancel ACC,the set cruising speed stays inmemory. When you turn on ACCagain, the speed is shown on themulti-information display. To returnto that speed, accelerate to over 25mph (40 km/h), then press the RES/ACCEL button.


Canceling the ACC

Features

247

LONGRANGE

MIDDLERANGE

SHORTRANGE

CANCEL BUTTON

U.S.

CANADA

U.S.

CANADA

U.S.

CANADA

This indicator normally comes on fora few seconds when you turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position. If it comes on at any othertime, there is a problem in the ACCsystem. If this happens, take thevehicle to your dealer to have itchecked.

The ACC system cannot be usedwhile this indicator is on.

When ACC is automaticallycancelled, the beeper sounds threetimes, and an ACC OFF messageappears on the multi-informationdisplay for 3 seconds.

Any of these conditions may causeACC to cancel:

The vehicle speed decreasesbelow 22 mph (35 km/h).

Driving on a mountainous road, ordriving off road for extendedperiods.

When the VSA indicator comes on.

When the ABS or VSA is activated.

Abrupt steering wheel movement.

If ACC is cancelled by any theseconditions, wait until the conditionimproves, then press the RES/ACCEL button to restore ACC.When you do this, the vehicle willresume its set cruising speed.

If you turn the ignition switch to theACCESSORY (I) or the LOCK (0)position after ACC was automaticallycancelled, the set speed is erased,and you must enter it again (seepage ).

Poor weather (rain, fog, snow, etc.)

When the radar sensor in the frontgrill gets dirty.

The vehicle ahead of you cannotbe detected.

An abnormal tire condition isdetected, or the tires are skidding. 242


Automatic ACC Cancellation ACC Indicator

248

ACC INDICATOR

The multi-information display showsvarious messages related to ACC.For a description of each ACCmessage you may see, refer to thechart on this and the following page.

CONTINUED

Message Description

ACC is on.

ACC is on and in standby mode.

A cruising speed can be set bypressing the DECEL/SET button.

ACC is in standby mode, and thepreviously set cruising speed is inmemory.The previously set speed can beresumed by pressing the RES/ACCEL button.


Messages on theMulti-Information Display

Features

249

U.S.

CANADA

Message MessageDescription Description

ACC detects a vehicle ahead of you.

You will hear a beep when the vehiclemoves out of the ACC radar sensor’srange.

ACC does not detect a vehicle aheadof you.

You will hear a beep when ACCdetects a vehicle ahead of you.

ACC has automatically cancelledbecause its radar sensor in the frontgrill is dirty.

You will hear three beeps.

ACC has automatically cancelledbecause of bad weather or otherconditions.

You will hear three beeps.

Apply the brakes immediately.Your vehicle is too close to the vehicleahead of it.

You will hear a continuous beep.

ACC needs to be checked.

Have your vehicle checked by adealer.


250

U.S.

U.S.

CANADA

CANADA

To switch from ACC to cruisecontrol, press the distance button onthe steering wheel, and hold it for 1second.

Always be aware which mode isselected.

When the cruise control is selected,ACC does not sound a beeper ordisplay a message on the multi-information display. Make sure tokeep a safe distance from the vehicleahead of you.

When you press the button, you willsee CRUISE MODE SELECTED onthe multi-information display for 2seconds. To switch back to ACC,press and hold the distance buttonagain for 1 second.


Switching to Cruise Control

Features

251

DISTANCE BUTTON

Press the distance button.

－

To do this, press and hold the twooutside buttons on the HomeLinktransceiver for about 20 seconds,until the red indicator flashes.Release the buttons, then proceed tostep 1.

If you justreceived your vehicle and have nottrained any of the buttons inHomeLink before, you should eraseany previously learned codes beforetraining the first button.

If you are training the second orthird buttons, go directly to step 1.

Unplug the garage door openermotor from the electrical outlet.

Hold the end of the garage dooropener remote 2 to 5 inches fromHomeLink. Make sure you are notblocking your view of the redindicator in HomeLink.

The HomeLink universaltransceiver built into your vehiclecan be programmed to operate up tothree remotely controlled devicesaround your home, such as garagedoors, lighting, or home securitysystems.

If you are training HomeLink tooperate a garage door or gate, youshould unplug the motor for thatdevice during training. Repeatedlypressing the remote control buttoncould burn out the motor.

HomeLink stores the code in apermanent memory. There shouldbe no need to retrain HomeLink ifyour vehicle’s battery goes dead or isdisconnected. If your garage dooropener was manufactured beforeApril 1982, you may not be able toprogram HomeLink to operate it.They do not have the safety featurethat causes the motor to stop and

reverse if an obstacle is detectedduring closing, increasing the risk ofinjury.

Always refer to the openinginstructions and safety informationthat came with your garage dooropener or other equipment youintend to operate with HomeLink. Ifyou do not have this information,contact the manufacturer of theequipment.

For quick and accurate training,make sure the remote controltransmitter for the device (garagedoor, automatic gate, securitysystem, etc.) has a fresh battery.

1.

2.

Training HomeLink

General Information


Before you begin

HomeLink Universal Transceiver

252

Plug in the garage door openermotor, then test the HomeLinkbutton by pushing it for about 1

second.If the button works,programming is complete.If the button does not work goto step 6.

Press and hold the remotetransmitter button and one of theHomeLink buttons at the sametime.

If the red indicator in HomeLinkbegins to flash slowly at first,then rapidly, release bothbuttons, and go to step 5.

If the red indicator in HomeLinkcontinues to flash slowly (doesnot flash rapidly), your remotetransmitter may stoptransmitting after a short time.Go to step 4.

Press and hold the remotetransmitter button and one of theHomeLink buttons at the sametime. While continuing to hold theHomeLink button, press andrelease the remote transmitterbutton every 2 seconds.

If the red indicator in HomeLinkbegins to flash slowly at first,then rapidly, release bothbuttons, and go to step 5.If the red indicator in HomeLinkcontinues to flash slowly (doesnot begin to flash rapidly),repeat steps 2 thru 4.

Repeat these steps to train theother two HomeLink buttons tooperate any other compatibleremotely controlled devicesaround your home (lighting,automatic gate, security system,etc.).

If the indicator flashes rapidlyfor 2 seconds then stays on, youhave a rolling code transmitter:go to ‘‘Training with a RollingCode System’’ (see page ).

If the indicator stays on orflashes slowly, repeat steps 2thru 5.

Push and hold the HomeLinkbutton for a few seconds, thenwatch the red indicator onHomeLink.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

254

CONTINUED

HomeLink Universal TransceiverF

eatures

253

RED INDICATOR

For security purposes, newer garagedoor opening systems use a ‘‘rolling’’or variable code. Information fromthe remote control and the garagedoor opener are needed beforeHomeLink can operate the garagedoor opener.

Find the ‘‘training’’ button on yourgarage door opener unit. Thelocation will vary, depending onthe manufacturer.

Make sure you have properlycompleted the ‘‘TrainingHomeLink’’ procedure.

Press the HomeLink button again.It should operate the garage door.

The ‘‘Training HomeLink’’procedure trains HomeLink to theproper garage door opener code.The following proceduresynchronizes HomeLink to thegarage door opener so it sends andreceives the correct codes.

Press the training button on thegarage door opener unit until theindicator next to the button comeson. The indicator may blink, orcome on and stay on. You thenhave approximately 30 seconds tocomplete the following steps.

Press and hold the button onHomeLink for 3 to 4 seconds.

Press and hold the HomeLinkbutton again for 3 to 4 seconds.This should turn off the trainingindicator on the garage dooropener unit. (Some systems mayrequire you to press the button upto three times.)

6.

2.

4.

5.

1.

3.

Training With a Rolling CodeSystem

HomeLink Universal Transceiver

254

TRAINING BUTTON

You should erase all three codesbefore selling the vehicle.

To erase the codes stored in all threebuttons, press and hold the twooutside buttons until the redindicator begins to flash, thenrelease the buttons.

If you want to retrain a programmedbutton for a new device, you do nothave to erase all button memory.You can replace the existing memorycode using this procedure:

If a standard transmitter wasprogrammed, the indicator willstay on for about 25 seconds.

HomeLink is a registeredtrademark of Johnson Controls, Inc.

If you have problems with trainingthe HomeLink Universal Transceiver,or would like information on homeproducts that can be operated byHomeLink, call (800) 355-3515. Onthe Internet, go towww.homelink.com.

Once the HomeLink indicatorbegins to flash slowly, continue tohold the HomeLink button, andfollow steps 3 thru 6 under‘‘Training HomeLink’’ (see page

).

If a rolling code transmitter waspreviously programmed, theindicator will flash rapidly for 2seconds, and then stay on forabout 23 seconds.

Press and hold the HomeLinkbutton to be trained until theHomeLink indicator begins toflash slowly.

1.

2.

252




Erasing Codes

Retraining a ButtonCustomer Assistance

HomeLink Universal TransceiverF

eatures

255

Most AcuraLink functions arecontrolled by the interface dial. Theinterface dial has two parts, a knoband a selector.



AcuraLink enhances your ownershipexperience by providing a directcommunication link between yourvehicle and the Acura Server.Working through the XM radiosatellite, AcuraLink works inconjunction with the navigationsystem, HandsFreeLink (HFL), andaudio system in your vehicle. Itdisplays and receives several kindsof messages, including:

Operating tips and information onyour vehicle’s features.

Important recall and safetyinformation.

Maintenance information to keepyour vehicle in top condition.

Diagnostic information to provideinformation about any problemswith your vehicle.

U.S. models except Alaskan andHawaiian

Interface Dial

AcuraLink

256

ENTER

SELECTOR

KNOB

If you have a new message, anenvelope icon appears in the topright corner of the navigation screen.

To open a message:

Press ENTER on the interfaceselector, then select New Messagefrom the navigation system mapmenu. If there is more than onenew message, you will see a list ofmessage titles.

Unread messages have a closedenvelope icon next to them. The icondisappears when it has already beenread.

Only diagnostic infomessages appear while driving. Theyindicate if your vehicle has aproblem that may need immediateattention (see page ).

After purchasing your vehicle,messages may not appearimmediately.Your dealer has to register thevehicle identification before you canreceive messages. This can takeseveral days to process.

Select Message to display theSelect a message category screen.Then, select ALL MESSAGES.

Scroll up or down, and select themessage you want to read bypressing ENTER on the interfaceselector.

To view previously read messages,press the INFO button, then selectMESSAGES.

263

Reading Messages

AcuraLinkF

eatures

257

NOTE:

Diagnostic info and recall/campaign messages can only bedeleted by your dealer.

To delete a single message:Press the INFO button to bring upthe Information screen.

Scroll to the Messages option,then select it by pressing ENTERon the interface selector.

Use the interface knob to scroll upor down to the message title youwant to delete, and select it bypressing ENTER on the interfaceselector.

Scroll to Delete with the interfaceknob, and select it by pressingENTER on the interface selector.

When you open a message, you canread a summary of it, and thenchoose one of several options. If anoption is not available for a message,that button will not be highlighted.

Scroll to the category with themessages you want to delete, andselect the category by pressingENTER on the interface selector.

Scroll to the Delete Messagesoption, and select it by pressingENTER on the interface selector.

Use the interface knob to scroll tothe AcuraLink/Messages button,and select it by pressing ENTERon the interface selector.

Select MORE by pushing theinterface selector to the right.

Press the SETUP button to viewthe setup screen.

The Delete All Messagescommand only works for quick tipand maintenance minder messages.Other messages must be deletedindividually.

To delete all messages:

AcuraLink

Deleting Messages Message Options

258

NOTE: NOTE:

－

－

－

－

－

－

To set your AcuraLink preferences(the types of messages you want toreceive, if any), visit the Owner Linkwebsite at www.owners.acura.com,and choose what you would like toreceive. If you do not have internetaccess, call Acura Client Services at(800) 382-2238; they can set yourmessage preferences for you.

Select this button todelete the current message.

Select this button to hear avoice read the entire message. Thisgives you more information than thescreen can display at one time. Whenyou select the Voice button, itchanges to a Stop Reading button.Select the button again to stop thevoice.

Select this button to call aphone number embedded in themessage. When you select , theHandsFreeLink (HFL) dials thenumber for you.To make a call, your Bluetoothcompatible phone must be paired toyour vehicle’s HandsFreeLink (seepage ).

Select this button to find the nearestAcura dealer using the navigationsystem.

Selectthis button to call the Acura dealeryou purchased your vehicle from.AcuraLink also directs you to thisdealer so you can schedule amaintenance appointment or receiveinformation about a message. If youvisit another dealer for service twotimes within a 14-month period,AcuraLink will reset to call thatdealer.

Select this button toget more information about thecurrent diagnostic message. To usethis option, your cell phone must belinked to the HFL and have acompatible data service available.Access the Owner Link website tofind out which data services arecurrently compatible with AcuraLink.278

AcuraLink

Message PreferencesDelete

Voice

Call

Call

Find Nearest Acura Dealer

Call Your Acura Dealer

More Info

Features

259

－

－

－

－

Selectthis button to begin the processrequired to connect to Acura. This isused to access the most recentdiagnostic information when aproblem occurs.

Select ON to havethe system automatically read eachmessage to you. Select OFF tomanually select the Voice buttonwhen you want a message read toyou.

To access the following functions,press the SETUP button, push theinterface dial to the right to selectMORE, then rotate the interface dialto select AcuraLink/Messages.

Select thisbutton to delete all stored messageswithin a category, except fordiagnostic info and recall campaignmessages. These messages can onlybe deleted by a certified technicianafter the recall or problem is done orcorrected, or through a broadcastmessage from Acura.

Select ON if you want to be notifiedof new messages (envelope iconappears on the navigation screen).Select OFF if you do not want to benotified of new messages (envelopeicon does not appear on thenavigation screen).

For the Phone DataConnection button to be active, youneed a Bluetooth compatible andenabled cell phone paired to theHandsFreeLink (HFL), and acompatible data service (see

on page ).283

AcuraLink

AcuraLink/Message Screen

Phone-Data Connection

Auto Reading

Delete Messages

New Message Notification

PairingYour Phone

260

NOTE:

During the first 90 days ofownership, one of 32 differentmessages appears each day. Thesemessages help you to use andunderstand the technologicalfeatures of your vehicle.

These messages, based on updatedvehicle information and commentsfrom other RL owners, supplementyour Owner’s Manual and QuickStart Guide. They provide you withrelevant information for a safe andenjoyable ownership experience. Foradditional information, call AcuraClient Services directly through theHFL.

There are six message categories inAcuraLink: Quick Tips, FeatureGuides, Maintenance Minders,Recalls/Campaigns, Diagnostic Info,and Dealer Appointment Reminders.The system can store up to 256messages.

Message categories can be added,revised, or deleted throughbroadcast messages from Acura.

AcuraLink

Feature GuideQuick TipsMessage Categories

Features

261

If your vehicle is affected by a recallor other important safetyinformation, a letter will be mailed toyou about the issue and how to fix it.If you don’t get your vehicle fixed,you will also receive a remindermessage through AcuraLink. Youcan then use the message options tocall your dealer for an appointmentor to find the nearest dealer.

You can then use the messageoptions to call your dealer for anappointment or to find the nearestdealer.

These messages provide detailedinformation about the serviceneeded for your vehicle. When amaintenance message appears onthe multi-information display, a list ofneeded maintenance items alsoappears in an AcuraLink message.These messages tell you the exactmaintenance needed, helping you toavoid unnecessary maintenancecosts.

AcuraLink

Recall/CampaignsMaintenance Minder

262

Depending on the severity of theproblem, the message will let youknow if you should see your dealerimmediately or if you can wait awhile.

You will see information from theonboard troubleshooting database.

You can then use message options tocall your dealer for an appointment,find the nearest dealer, or find outmore information about the issue.

When an instrument panel indicatorcomes on, AcuraLink immediatelynotifies you with the message,‘‘Check more information.’’ If you donot want the information right away,select the Check Later option. If youwant the information now, select theCheck Now option. (If the navigationscreen is not active, you must selectOK from the navigation disclaimerscreen before you can check theinformation.)

If an instrument panel indicator stayson when it should go off, or amessage appears on the multi-information display, AcuraLink canidentify the problem, send theinformation to Acura for analysis,and then provide you with the mostaccurate repair information availableall before going to a dealer. Thishelps you handle the problem as itoccurs, preventing or limiting costlyrepairs.

A diagnostic message is generated ifany of the instrument panelindicators stay on when they shouldgo off. For more information on theinstrument panel indicators, see page

.

The AcuraLink system cannotdetermine some mechanicalproblems (such as squeaks orrattles) that are not triggered by thediagnostic indicator monitors.

61 CONTINUED

AcuraLink

Diagnostic Info

Features

263

When you make an appointmentthrough the Owner’s Link OnlineScheduling Service, you can bereminded about that appointmentthrough the AcuraLink two days inadvance. If you need to reschedule,you can call your dealer directly withthe HFL.

The timing of your reminder isbased on your reminder preferenceestablished on Owner Link.

When you select the More Infooption, if the HFL is connected to acellular data service, AcuraLinkgathers more information about theproblem, and sends it to Acura.There, the information is analyzedand returned to the vehicle with themost accurate repair information.

AcuraLink

Dealer Appointment Reminder

264

U.S. models onlyThe OnStar system in your vehiclegives you access to a wide range ofservices and information with thetouch of a button. An OnStar advisoris available 24 hours a day, 7 days aweek.

The Safe and Sound Plan providesthese features:

Roadside AssistanceEmergency ServicesAutomatic Notification of AirbagDeploymentAccident AssistanceRemote Door Locking/UnlockingStolen Vehicle TrackingMisplaced Vehicle AssistanceOnline Concierge Services

The Directions and ConnectionsPlan provides these additionalfeatures:

Route SupportRide AssistInformation and ConvenienceServices

The OnStar buttons and indicatorare located on the ceiling near thefront ceiling light.

OnStar

OnStar Control Panel

Features

265

VOICEACTIVATEDKEY PADBUTTON

SYSTEMSTATUSINDICATOR

EMERGENCYBUTTON

OnStar SERVICESBUTTON

CALL ANSWER/CALL END(WHITE PHONE)BUTTON

To record a message:

A microphone is located in the baseof the OnStar control panel so youcan speak to the advisor withouttaking your hands off the steeringwheel or diverting your attentionfrom the road. The OnStar advisor’svoice comes from the audio system’sspeakers. Use the volume control onthe audio system or on the steeringwheel to adjust the volume.

Depending on which service yourequest, you may need to give yourPersonal Identification Number(PIN) to the advisor. Your PIN is anumber you make up and providewhen you establish your OnStarservice.

If cellular telephone service is notavailable in the area you are drivingin, you will hear a fast busy signal.The system will retry the connectionseveral times before returning to theready mode.

Press this button to contact anOnStar advisor. You will hear achime, followed by theannouncement, ‘‘Connecting toOnStar.’’ The connection should takeabout 15 seconds. The advisor willassist you with any of the servicesincluded in your plan.

To cancel the retry, press the whitephone button. During your call to the advisor or

virtual advisor, press and releasethe OnStar button. The systembeeps to indicate that it isrecording.When you are finished recording,press and release the OnStarbutton again. The system beepsand stops recording.

When you are finished listening,press the white phone button. Thesystem responds with ‘‘Goodbye.’’

Say ‘‘Advisor playback.’’ Therecorded message is playedthrough the audio systemspeakers.

Press the white phone button. Thesystem responds with ‘‘OnStarready.’’

To hear the first playback of amessage:

You can record up to 5 minutes ofinformation from your OnStarAdvisor or the virtual advisor. This ishelpful for reviewing the route, hotel,or restaurant information youreceive from the OnStar center.

OnStar

OnStar Services Button

Recording an Advisor or VirtualAdvisor Message

266

Press this button to send dial toneswhile communicating with anautomated phone system during anOnStar personal call (see page ).

The advisor will ask about the natureof the emergency, locate yourvehicle, and notify the appropriateemergency service agencies.

If you press this button accidentally,do not cancel the call. Wait until theOnStar advisor answers, then explainyour mistake.

Say ‘‘Advisor playback.’’ Thesystem responds with ‘‘Play orResume.’’If you say ‘‘Play,’’ the messageplays from the beginning. If yousay ‘‘Resume,’’ the message playsfrom the point you previouslystopped it.

To hear a message again:

Press this button to contact anOnStar advisor only if you have anemergency situation. You will hear atone, followed by the announcement,‘‘Connecting to OnStar Emergency.’’Your call is given highest priority.

Press the white phone button. Thesystem responds with ‘‘OnStarready.’’

Recording a new message will deletethe previous message.

Press this white phone button to enda call to the OnStar advisor. If theOnStar center calls you, press thisbutton to answer the call.

This button is also used to initiatethe Personal Calling and VirtualAdvisor services, if you havesubscribed.

270

OnStar

Emergency Button

Voice Activated KeypadButton

Call Answer/Call EndButton

Features

267

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

If you are ever in anaccident that causes the airbags todeploy, the OnStar systemautomatically places a call (providedthe OnStar system and your vehicle’selectrical system are still intact). Theadvisor will attempt to speak to youto evaluate the situation, and contactthe nearest emergency servicesprovider.

The OnStar system uses the globalpositioning system (GPS) to locateyour vehicle whenever you place acall. This allows the advisor toquickly contact the nearest serviceswithout requiring you to providedetailed directions.

Contactthe OnStar advisor if you needassistance with a problem (flat tire,out of fuel, etc.) while traveling. Theadvisor will contact an appropriateagency to come and assist you.

Contact anOnStar advisor if you have anemergency situation. The advisorwill contact the nearest emergencyservices provider (ambulance, firedepartment, etc.) and advise them ofyour situation.

This indicator shows you the statusof the system.

The system is readyfor use.

A call is inprogress.

There is a problemwith the system. Press the OnStarbutton to contact an advisor. If thecall connects, the advisor will assistyou with verifying the system’soperation. If you are not able tocontact an advisor, take your vehicleto an Acura dealer to have thesystem diagnosed.

There is a problemwith the system while a call is inprogress.

TheOnStar advisor can help you if youare ever in a minor accident byasking you for information about theaccident. Complete, detailedinformation will make it easier tocomplete accident reports andinsurance claims.

OnStar

Automatic Notif ication of AirbagDeployment

Safe and Sound Plan Features

Roadside Assistance

Emergency Services

System Status Indicator

Solid Green

Blinking Green

Solid Red

Blinking Red

Accident Assistance

268

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

The OnStaradvisor can give you verbaldirections from your current locationto a desired destination.

If you need a ride(taxi, limousine service, etc.) theOnStar advisor can make thearrangements for you. Use theOnStar button, or call(888) 4-ONSTAR.

If you are unable to locate yourvehicle in a large parking lot orparking structure, contact OnStar at(888) 4-ONSTAR. The advisor willremotely activate the exterior lightsand the horn, allowing you to locateyour vehicle.

From your computer, you can loginto www. myonstar.com to makedinner reservations, purchase ticketsto events, send flowers, etc.

UsingGPS, OnStar can locate your vehiclealmost anywhere. If your vehicle isever stolen, contact OnStar at(888) 4-ONSTAR. The advisor willput you in contact with the properauthorities, and assist them withlocating your vehicle.

By sending a signal to yourvehicle, the advisor can lock orunlock your vehicle’s doors. This ishelpful if you are away from yourvehicle and realize you forgot to lockthe doors, or if you have locked theremote or built-in key in your vehicle.To get OnStar’s assistance, call(888) 4-ONSTAR (466-7827).

The Directions and ConnectionsPlan provides these additionalfeatures:

The OnStar advisor cangive you information on nearbyhotels, restaurants, ATMs, hospitals,gas stations, and many otherservices in any area you are traveling.The advisor can also help you withhotel or restaurant reservations.

OnStar

Directions and Connections PlanFeatures

Route Support

Ride Assist

Misplaced Vehicle Assistance

Online Concierge Services

Stolen Vehicle Tracking

Remote Door Locking/Unlocking

Information and ConvenienceServices

Features

269

－The OnStar Personal Calling plan isan extra-cost option that gives youthe ability to use your vehicle’sOnStar system as a hands-freecellular telephone.

To sign up for Personal Calling,press the OnStar button in yourvehicle, and notify the advisor thatyou’d like to sign up. The advisor willget all the information needed to setup your account, and provide youwith your new cellular telephonenumber.You will need to provide a credit cardnumber, and prepurchase ‘‘units’’ orminutes of air time (one unit equals1 minute).

Youmust use voice commands to givethe OnStar system your callinginformation. To make a phone call:

Press the white phone button.OnStar will respond with ‘‘OnStarready.’’Say ‘‘Dial.’’OnStar will respond with ‘‘Phonenumber to dial, please.’’Say the entire number withoutpausing.OnStar will repeat the number.Say ‘‘Yes’’ to dial the number, orsay ‘‘No’’ to try again.OnStar will respond with ‘‘Dialing’’and then repeat the completetelephone number. It will thenplace the telephone call.When you have finished yourconversation, press the whitephone button to hang up.

If you make a mistake speaking thephone number, or the systemresponds with the wrong number,say ‘‘Clear.’’ This will cause thesystem to erase the number.

OnStar

Personal Calling Placing a Telephone Call

270

－

－

You can also enter the number onedigit at a time. To make a phone call:

Press the white phone button.OnStar will respond with ‘‘OnStarready.’’Say ‘‘Digit dial.’’OnStar will respond with ‘‘Firstdigit to dial, please.’’Say the first digit of the number.OnStar will repeat that digit.Always wait for OnStar to confirmthe digit before going to the nextdigit.Say the second digit of the number.OnStar will repeat that digit.Continue this until you have givenOnStar the complete telephonenumber. Then say ‘‘Dial.’’

OnStar will respond with ‘‘Dialing’’and then repeat the completetelephone number. It will thenplace the telephone call.When you have finished yourconversation, press the whitephone button again to hang up.

If you make a mistake speaking adigit of the phone number, or thesystem responds with the wrongdigit, say ‘‘Clear.’’ This will cause thesystem to erase the last digit.

If you need to cancel the phone callattempt before entering thecomplete phone number, say ‘‘Cancel.’’The system will cancel the operationand return to Ready.

If the system has difficultyunderstanding a voice command, itcan respond with:

‘‘Pardon’’ The system could notmatch your voice command to one itknows. Repeat the commanddistinctly.

‘‘Slower please’’ The systemmissed the command because it wasnot ready for it, or there was toomuch background noise. Repeat thecommand after a short pause.

OnStarF

eatures

271

－－Thisfeature allows you to access mostvoicemail systems and respond tonumber requests from computersystems, such as ‘‘Press 1 for sales;press 2 for service.’’ To use the voiceactivated keypad during a call, dothis:

While in a personal call, press theVoice Activated Key Pad ( )button.

When someone places a telephonecall to you, the audio system willmute and you will hear the ring.Press the white phone button toanswer the call. When you havecompleted the call, press the whitephone button again to hang up.

The OnStar system can store up totwenty 32-digit telephone numbers inits memory. When you store thesenumbers in its memory, you giveeach one a name tag. When you wantto place a telephone call, you canrecall the number by giving thesystem the name tag.

Continue this until you have givenOnStar the complete number.Then say ‘‘Send.’’ OnStar will sendthe number by dial tones.

Say the second digit of the number.OnStar will repeat that digit.

OnStar will repeat that digit.Always wait for OnStar to confirmthe digit before going to the nextdigit.

Say the first digit of the numberyou want to send.

OnStar will respond with ‘‘Firstdigit to send please.’’

OnStar

Voice Activated Key Pad Incoming Telephone Calls Using Name Tags

272

－ You can also store a telephonenumber and its name tag one digit ata time. To store them in the system:

To store atelephone number and its name tagin the system, do this:

Press the white phone button.OnStar will respond with ‘‘OnStarready.’’Say ‘‘Store.’’OnStar will respond with ‘‘Phonenumber to store, please.’’Say the entire number.OnStar will repeat the number,and then say ‘‘Yes or No.’’Say ‘‘Yes,’’ or say ‘‘No’’ to try again.OnStar will respond with ‘‘Nametag, please.’’Say the name that you wantassigned to that telephone number.

Press the white phone button.OnStar will respond with ‘‘ready.’’Say ‘‘Digit store.’’OnStar will respond with ‘‘Firstdigit to store, please.’’Say the first digit of the number.OnStar will repeat that digit.Say the second digit of the number.OnStar will repeat that digit.Continue this until you have givenOnStar the complete telephonenumber. Then say ‘‘Store.’’OnStar will respond with ‘‘Nametag, please.’’Say the name that you wantassigned to that telephone number.

OnStar

Storing a Name Tag

Features

273

＜＞

＜＞

－

－

＜＞

－

Press the Call Answer or Call Endbutton.OnStar will respond with ‘‘OnStarready.’’Say ‘‘Delete.’’

Say ‘‘Yes.’’

Say the name tag for the numberyou want to delete.OnStar will respond with ‘‘Delete

name tag , yes or no.’’

OnStar will respond with ‘‘Deletingname tag .’’

To redialthe last telephone number youcalled:

Press the Call Answer or Call Endbutton.OnStar will respond with ‘‘OnStarready.’’

Say ‘‘Redial.’’OnStar will respond with‘‘Redialing,’’ then place thetelephone call.

OnStar will respond with ‘‘Nametag, please.’’

Toplace a telephone call using a nametag, do this:

Press the white phone button.OnStar will respond with ‘‘OnStarready.’’Say ‘‘Call.’’OnStar will respond with ‘‘Nametag, please.’’Say the name tag for the numberyou want to call.OnStar will respond with ‘‘Calling

name tag ,’’ then place thetelephone call.

If you have forgotten what nametags you have stored, the system willread them to you. Press the whitephone button. When the systemresponds with ‘‘OnStar ready,’’ say‘‘Directory.’’ The system will thenrepeat all stored name tags.

To deletea name tag and telephone numberfrom memory, do this:

By giving the system a security codethat you make up, you can lock outthe personal calling and virtualadvisor capabilities of the system sounauthorized people cannot maketelephone calls. To turn security onor off, do this:

Press the white phone button.OnStar will respond with ‘‘OnStarready.’’Say ‘‘Security.’’OnStar will respond with ‘‘Firstdigit of security code, please.’’Say the first digit of the code.

OnStar

Redialing a Number

Security Code

Placing a Telephone Call Deleting a Name Tag

274

＜＞

－OnStar will repeat that digit.Say the second digit of the code.OnStar will repeat that digit.Say the third digit of the code.OnStar will repeat that digit.Say the fourth digit of the code.

If you forget the security codeentered, or someone else enters asecurity code unknown to you, youmust contact an OnStar advisor toreset the code. Press the OnStarbutton, or call (888) 4-ONSTAR.

You must prepurchase units(minutes) of cellular air time. TheOnStar system tracks how manyunits you have remaining.

OnStar will respond with ‘‘Securityis ON/OFF.’’

To find out how many units you haveremaining, do this:

Press the white phone button.OnStar will respond with ‘‘OnStarready.’’Say ‘‘Units.’’OnStar will respond with ‘‘Verifyor add.’’Say ‘‘Verify.’’OnStar will respond with ‘‘Youhave number units remaining.’’

To purchase moreunits of cellular air time, do this:

Press the white phone button.OnStar will respond with ‘‘OnStarready.’’Say ‘‘Units.’’OnStar will respond with ‘‘Verifyor add.’’Say ‘‘Add.’’OnStar will connect you to anautomated system to handle yourpurchase.It is also possible to press theOnstar button and talk to anadvisor to purchase more air time.

You can also call OnStar at(888) 4-ONSTAR, or get informationabout your account at the OnStarweb site, www.onstar.com.

Keeping Track of Units Adding Units

OnStarF

eatures

275

When you subscribe to personalcalling, you can also enjoy thebenefits of virtual advisor. Thisfeature lets you hear information inyour vehicle about weather, sports,news, and stocks. It is even possibleto have your e-mail read to you.

Although Virtual Advisor canprovide information on manysubjects, you can set up acustomized profile with OnStar thatmakes it easier to get informationabout areas that are of specificinterest to you. To do this, you mustgo to the OnStar web site,www.onstar.com. This is a securesite; you will need your accountnumber and PIN to access youraccount information and to designyour customized profile.

If you do not have Internet access, adefault profile can be set up for you. You make up and provide your

Personal Identification Number(PIN) when you establish youraccount with OnStar. You shouldwrite down your PIN, and keep itwith you at all times.

You can change your PIN at any time.Contact the OnStar advisor bypressing the OnStar button, or bycalling (888) 4-ONSTAR.

If you forget your PIN, contact theOnStar advisor. For security reasons,your PIN will be mailed to you.

To use the virtual advisor from yourvehicle, do this:

Press the white phone button.OnStar will respond with ‘‘OnStarready.’’Say ‘‘Virtual Advisor.’’

The system will connect you to theVirtual Advisor. The Virtual Advisorwill prompt you for the informationyou desire.

If you would like to hear a list ofvoice commands that are available,say ‘‘What are my choices.’’ OnStaris continually upgrading the system,so new commands become available.

OnStar Virtual Advisor Personal Identif ication Number

OnStar

276

OnStar uses the global positioningsystem (GPS) to locate your vehiclefor functions such as route guidanceand roadside assistance. GPS isaffected by structures that canobstruct the signal, such as tunnels,parking structures, and tall buildings.It may not be possible for OnStar topinpoint your location if you are in ornear such structures.

OnStar uses cellular technology tocommunicate with your vehicle.Cellular coverage varies by location,which may affect the ability toestablish a connection, or the qualityof the connection.

Onstar has antennas in the rearwindow (on each side of the high-mount brake light) and on the roofnear the high-mount brake light. Toavoid reception problems, do notcover the window antennas withmetal stickers, and do not cover the

roof antenna with cargo or bicycleson a roof rack.

When you turn off your vehicle’signition, OnStar goes into low-powermode. After 48 hours, it switches tosleep mode to conserve your vehicle’sbattery power. Features such asremote door unlocking andmisplaced vehicle assistance will notwork after your vehicle has beenparked for more than 48 hours.

OnStar is a registered trademark ofthe OnStar Corporation.

As required by the FCC: This devicecomplies with Part 15 of the FCC rules.Operation is subject to the following twoconditions: (1) This device may notcause harmful interference, and (2) thisdevice must accept any interferencereceived, including interference thatmay cause undesired operation.


This device complies with IndustryCanada Standard RSS-210. Operation issubject to the following two conditions:(1) this device may not causeinterference, and (2) this device mustaccept any interference that may causeundesired operation of the device.

System Limitations

OnStarF

eatures

277

Bluetooth is a registered trademarkof Bluetooth SIG, Inc.Bluetooth is the wireless technologythat links your phone to the HFL.The HFL uses a Class 3 Bluetooth,which means the maximum rangebetween your phone and vehicle is30 feet (10 meters).

HFL recognizes simple voicecommands, such as phone numbersand names. It uses these commandsto automatically dial, receive, andstore numbers. For moreinformation on voice control, seeUsing Voice Control on page .

Here are the main features of theHFL. Instructions for using the HFLbegin on page .

Your vehicle is equipped with theHandsFreeLink (HFL). HFL usesBluetooth technology as a wirelesslink between it and your Bluetoothcompatible cell phone. When you arein your vehicle and your phone islinked to the HFL, you’ll enjoyhands-free phone use. The HFL isavailable in both English and French(Canadian models only). To changethe language, see page .

With a linked phone, the HFL allowsyou to send and receive calls in yourvehicle without holding the phone.

The HFL can store up to 50 namesand phone numbers in its phonebook.With a linked phone, you can thenautomatically dial any name ornumber in the phonebook.

Here are the main components ofthe HFL system:

The HFL microphone is on theceiling console. The microphone isshared with the navigation system.

To use the HFL, your phone musthave approved Bluetooth capabilityalong with the Hands Free Profile.This type of phone is availablethrough many phone makers andcellular carriers. You can also find anapproved phone by visiting

InCanada, visit

292

279

281

www.acura.com/handsfreelink. (www.acura.ca.) or by

calling the Hands Free Linkcustomer support at (888) 528-7876.

Bluetooth Wireless Technology

Voice Control

Incoming/Outgoing Calls

Phonebook

Microphone

HandsFreeLink

278

TM

Here is the function of each HFLbutton:

HFL Talk: This button is used beforeyou give a command, to answerincoming calls, and to confirmsystem information.

HFL Back: This button is used toend a call, go back to the previousvoice control command, and tocancel an operation.

To operate the HFL, use the HFLTalk and Back buttons on the leftside of the steering wheel. Below theHFL buttons is another set of voicecontrol buttons for the navigation,climate control, and audio systems.

When the HFL is in use, the soundcomes through the vehicle’s frontaudio system speakers. If the audiosystem is in use while making a call,the HFL over-rides the audio system.To change the volume level, use theaudio system volume knob.

HandsFreeLink

HFL ButtonsAudio System

Features

279

HFL TALKBUTTON

HFL BACKBUTTON


TM

＊

＊

＊

－

－

－

－

－

＊

Signal Strength Indicates thenetwork signal strength of thecurrent phone call. Five barsequals full strength.

ROAM Status Indicates yourphone is roaming.

Battery Level Status Indicatesthe power remaining in yourphone’s current battery charge.Five bars equals full batterystrength.

HFL Mode Indicates when youare dialing and receiving calls.

Phone Dialing Indicates thenumber you entered or thenumber of the incoming call.

Some phones do not send thisinformation to the HFL.

When you are operating the HFL, orwhen you manually select HFL onthe multi-information display, youwill see this information on thescreen:

:

HandsFreeLink


280

SIGNALSTRENGTH

BATTERYLEVEL STATUS

HFLMODE

ROAM STATUS PHONE DIALING

TM

The HFL is operated by the HFLTalk and Back buttons on the leftside of the steering wheel. The nextfew pages provide instructions for allbasic features of the HFL.

To hear a list of available optionsat any time, press the Talk button,wait for the beep, and say, ‘‘Handsfree link help.’’

Many commands can be spokentogether. For example, you cansay, ‘‘Dial 123-456-7891.’’

To enter a string of numbers in aCall or Dial command, you can saythem all at once, or you canseparate them in blocks of 3, 4, 7,10, or 11.

To skip a voice prompt, press theTalk button while the HFL isspeaking. The HFL will then beginlistening for your next command.

Here are some guidelines for usingvoice control:

To enter a command, press theTalk button. Then, after the beep,say your command in a clear,natural tone.

For best system operation, set theclimate control fan speed to low,and direct the center vents awayfrom the microphone in the ceiling.

If the HFL does not recognize acommand, its response is, ‘‘Pardon.’’If it doesn’t recognize thecommand a second time, itsresponse is, ‘‘Please repeat.’’ If itdoesn’t recognize the command athird time, it plays the Helpprompt.

All phones may notoperate identically, and some maycause inconsistent operation of theHFL.

How to Use the HFL Using Voice Control

HandsFreeLinkF

eatures

281

NOTE:

TM

To go back one step in a commandprocess, say, ‘‘Go back,’’ or pressthe Back button.

When you finish a commandsequence, the HFL goes back toits main menu. For example, whenyou store the name, ‘‘Eric,’’ theHFL response is, ‘‘Eric has beenstored.’’ The next time you pressthe Talk button, you will be at themain menu.

If nothing is said while the HFL islistening for a command, the HFLwill time out and stop its voicerecognition. The next time youpress the Talk button, the HFLbegins listening from the point atwhich it timed out.

To end a command sequence atany time, press and hold the Backbutton, or press the Talk button,wait for the beep, and say, ‘‘Cancel.’’The next time you press the Talkbutton, the HFL begins from itsmain menu.

The voice of the HFL can be set tomale or female (U.S. models only).Also, the incoming notification canbe set to a ring tone, a prompt, or nonotification.

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘System.’’ TheHFL response is, ‘‘System optionsare setup and clear.’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Setup.’’ TheHFL response is ‘‘Would you likemale or female prompts?’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Male’’ or‘‘Female,’’ depending on thesystem voice you want. The HFLresponse is, ‘‘Male (Female)prompts have been selected.Would you like an audiblenotification of an incoming call?’’

1.

2.

3.

To set up the system, do this:

HandsFreeLink

Setting Up the System

282

TM

CONTINUED

Press and release the Talk button.If you say ‘‘Yes’’ after the beep, theHFL response is, ‘‘Would you likea ring tone or a prompt?’’ If yousay ‘‘No’’ after the beep, the HFLreturns to its main menu. Saying‘‘No’’ will result in no ring tone orprompt playback during anincoming call. The audio systemwill still mute, and a message willbe displayed.

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Ring tone’’ or‘‘Prompt.’’ If you choose ‘‘Ringtone’’ you will hear a ring tonethrough the audio speakers toannounce an incoming call. If youchoose ‘‘Prompt,’’ you will hearthis message to announce anincoming call: ‘‘You have anincoming call.’’

Your Bluetooth compatible phonewith HandsFree Profile must bepaired to the HFL before you canmake and receive hands-free calls.

HFL does not allow you to pairyour phone if the vehicle ismoving.For pairing, your phone must be inits Discovery mode.Up to six phones can be paired tothe HFL.The following procedure works formost phones. If you cannot pairyour phone to the HFL with thisprocedure, refer to your phone’soperating manual, talk to yourphone retailer, or call theHandsFreeLink customer supportat (888) 528-7876.During the pairing process, turnoff any previously paired phonesbefore pairing a new phone.

4.

5.

HandsFreeLink

Pairing Your Phone

Features

283

NOTE:

TM

With your phone on and theignition in the ACCESSORY (I) orON (II) position, press and releasethe Talk button. After the beep,say ‘‘Phone set up.’’ The HFLresponse is ‘‘Phone set up optionsare status, pair, edit, delete, andlist.’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Pair.’’ TheHFL response is ‘‘The pairingprocess requires operation of yourmobile phone. For safety, onlyperform this function while thevehicle is stopped. State a four-digit code for pairing. Note thiscode. It will be requested by thephone.’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say the four-digitcode you want to use. For example,say ‘‘1, 2, 3, 4.’’ The HFL responseis, ‘‘1, 2, 3, 4. Is this correct?’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Enter.’’ TheHFL response is ‘‘Searching for aBluetooth phone.’’

Steps 5 and 6 show acommon way to get your phone intoits Discovery mode. If these steps donot work on your phone, refer to thephone’s operating manual.

Follow the prompts on your phoneto get it into its Search mode. Thephone will search for the HFL.When it comes up, selectHandsFreeLink from the list ofoptions displayed on your phone.

When asked by the phone, enterthe four-digit code from step 3 intoyour phone. The HFL response is‘‘A new phone has been found.What would you like to name thisphone?’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say the name youwant to use. For example, say‘‘Eric’s phone.’’ The HFL responseis ‘‘Eric’s phone has beensuccessfully paired. Returning tothe main menu.’’

If you want to pair another phone,repeat steps 1 through 7.

Once the paring process iscompleted, AcuraLink may display aconnection confirmation screen. Thisscreen is used to create a dataconnection between your cell phoneand the AcuraLink system. You canchoose to setup the data connectionnow, or do it later. If you want to doit now, exit the HFL menu bypressing the HFL Back button oneor more times.

1. 4.

5.

6.

7.

2.

3.

8.

HandsFreeLink

284

NOTE:

TM

To rename a paired phone, do this: To delete a paired phone, do this:Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Phone setup.’’The HFL response is ‘‘Phonesetup options are status, pair, edit,delete, and list.’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Edit.’’ TheHFL response is ‘‘Which phonewould you like to edit?’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say the name ofthe phone you want to rename.For example, say ‘‘Eric’s phone.’’The HFL response is ‘‘What is thenew name for Eric’s phone?’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say the new nameof the phone. For example, say‘‘Lisa’s phone.’’ The HFL responseis, ‘‘The name has been changed.Returning to the main menu.’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Phone setup.’’The HFL response is, ‘‘Phonesetup options are status, pair, edit,delete, and list.’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Delete.’’ TheHFL response is, ‘‘Which phonewould you like to delete?’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say the name ofthe phone you want to delete. Forexample say ‘‘Eric’s phone.’’ TheHFL response is ‘‘Would you liketo delete Eric’s phone?’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Yes.’’ TheHFL response is ‘‘Preparing todelete Eric’s phone.’’ Say ‘‘OK’’ tocontinue. Otherwise, say ‘‘Go back,’’or ‘‘Cancel.’’

Press and release the Talk button.If you say ‘‘OK’’ after the beep, theHFL response is ‘‘The phone hasbeen deleted. Returning to themain menu.’’ If you say ‘‘Go back,’’or ‘‘Cancel,’’ the phone will not bedeleted.

2.

3.

4.1. 1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

CONTINUED

HandsFreeLinkF

eatures

285

TM

To list all paired phones, do this: To find out the status of the phone beingused, do this:

To change from the currently linkedphone to another paired phone, do this:Press and release the Talk button.

After the beep, say ‘‘Phone setup.’’The HFL response is ‘‘Phonesetup options are status, pair, edit,delete, and list.’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Phone setup.’’The HFL response is ‘‘Phonesetup options are status, pair, edit,delete, and list.’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Next phone.’’The HFL response is ‘‘Searchingfor the next phone.’’ The HFLthen disconnects the linked phoneand searches for another pairedphone. If no other phones arefound, the first phone remainslinked.

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘List.’’ TheHFL responds by listing the nameof each paired phone. When allphones paired to the system havebeen read, the HFL response is‘‘The entire list has been read.Returning to the main menu.’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Status.’’ Anexample of the HFL response is,‘‘Eric’s phone is linked. Batterystrength is three bars. Signalstrength is five bars, and thephone is roaming. Returning to themain menu.’’

2.

1.1.

2.

1.

HandsFreeLink

286

TM

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Call’’ or ‘‘Dial.’’The HFL response is ‘‘Calling’’ or‘‘Dialing.’’ Once connected, youwill hear the person you calledthrough the audio speakers. Tochange the volume, use the audiosystem volume knob.

You can make calls using any phonenumber, or by using a name in theHFL phonebook. You can also redialthe last number called. During a call,the HFL allows you to talk up to 30minutes after you remove the keyfrom the ignition switch.

With your phone on and theignition in the ACCESSORY (I) orON (II) position, press and releasethe Talk button. After the beep,say ‘‘Call’’ or ‘‘Dial.’’ The HFLresponse is, ‘‘What name ornumber would you like to call/dial?’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say the numberyou want to call. For example, say‘‘123 456 7891.’’ The HFL responseis ‘‘123 456 7891. Say call, dial, orcontinue to add numbers.’’

To end the call, press the Backbutton.

With your phone on and theignition in the ACCESSORY (I) orON (II) position, press and releasethe Talk button. After the beep,say ‘‘Call’’ or ‘‘Dial.’’ The HFLresponse is ‘‘What name ornumber would you like to call/dial?’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say the name youwant to call. For example, say

‘‘Eric.’’ The HFL response is‘‘Would you like to call Eric?’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Yes.’’ TheHFL response is ‘‘Calling’’ or‘‘Dialing.’’ Once connected, youwill hear the person you calledthrough the audio speakers. Tochange the volume, use the audiosystem volume knob.

To end the call, press the Backbutton.

To redial the last number called bythe phone, press and release theTalk button. After the beep, say‘‘Redial.’’ The HFL response is,‘‘Redialing.’’ Once connected, youwill hear the person you calledthrough the audio speakers. Tochange the volume, use the audiosystem volume knob.

1.

3.

3.

1.

2.

2.

4.

4.

To make a call using a phone number,do this:

To make a call using a name in the HFLphonebook, do this:

Making a Call

HandsFreeLinkF

eatures

287

TM

If you receive a call when you are noton the phone, the HFL interrupts theaudio system (if it is on), and playsthe incoming call notification, ifactivated. To answer the call, pressthe Talk button and begin speaking.If you don’t want to answer the call,press the Back button.

The HFL allows you to sendnumbers or names during a call. Thisis useful when you call a menu-driven phone system. You can alsoprogram account numbers into theHFL phonebook for easy retrievalduring menu-driven calls.

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Send.’’ TheHFL response is, ‘‘What name ornumber would you like to send?’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say the numberyou want to send. For example,say ‘‘1, 2, 3.’’ The HFL response is‘‘1, 2, 3. Say send, or continue toadd numbers.’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Send.’’ Thedial tones will be sent, and the callwill continue.

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Send.’’ TheHFL response is ‘‘What name ornumber would you like to send?’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say the name youwant to send. For example, say‘‘Account number.’’ The HFLresponse is ‘‘Would you like tosend account number?’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Send.’’ Thedial tones will be sent, and the callwill continue.

If your phone has Call Waiting, andyou receive a call when you are onthe phone, press and release theTalk button to answer it. When youdo this, the original call is placed onhold. To return to the original call,press the Talk button again. If youdon’t want to answer the new call,disregard it, and continue with youroriginal call. If you want to hang upthe original call and answer the newcall, press the Back button.

1.

2.1.

2.

3.

3.

To send a number during a call, do this:

To send a name during a call, do this:

Receiving a CallSending Numbers or NamesDuring a Call

HandsFreeLink

288

TM

During a call, you can transfer itfrom the HFL to your phone, or fromyour phone to the HFL.

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Transfer.’’The audio switches from the HFLto the phone.

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Transfer.’’The audio switches from yourphone to the HFL.

During a call, you can mute orunmute your voice to the person youare talking to.

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Mute.’’ TheHFL response is, ‘‘Mute is active.’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Mute.’’ TheHFL response is, ‘‘Mute iscanceled.’’

The HFL phonebook can store upto 50 names with their associatednumbers. These can be any typesof numbers. For example, you canstore a phone number and use it tomake a call, or you can store anaccount number and use it duringa call to a menu-driven phonesystem.

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Phonebook.’’The HFL response is ‘‘Phonebookoptions are store, edit, delete, andlist.’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Store.’’ TheHFL response is, ‘‘What namewould you like to store?’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say the name youwould like to store. For example,say ‘‘Eric’’ or say ‘‘account number.’’The HFL response is ‘‘What is thenumber for Eric,’’ or ‘‘What is thenumber for account number?’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say the number.For example, say ‘‘123 456 7891.’’The HFL response is ‘‘123 4567891.’’

2.

3.

1.

1.

2.

4.

2.

1.

To transfer a call from the HFL to yourphone, do this:

To transfer a call from your phone to theHFL, do this:

To mute your voice, do this:

To unmute your voice, do this:

To add a name, do this:

CONTINUED

Transferring a Call

Muting a Call

Setting up the Phonebook

HandsFreeLinkF

eatures

289

TM

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say the name youwould like to delete. For example,say ‘‘Eric.’’ The HFL response is‘‘Do you want to delete Eric?’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Yes.’’ TheHFL response is, ‘‘The name hasbeen deleted. Returning to themain menu.’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Phonebook.’’The HFL response is, ‘‘ThePhonebook options are store, edit,delete, and list.’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say the newnumber for Eric. For example, say‘‘987 654 3219.’’ The HFL responseis, ‘‘987 654 3219.’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Enter.’’ TheHFL response is ‘‘The number hasbeen changed. Returning to themain menu.’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Phonebook.’’The HFL response is, ‘‘Phonebookoptions are store, edit, delete, andlist.’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Delete.’’ TheHFL response is, ‘‘What namewould you like to delete?’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Enter.’’ TheHFL response is ‘‘Eric (or accountnumber) has been stored.Returning to the main menu.’’


Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Edit.’’ TheHFL response is, ‘‘What namewould you like to edit?’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say the name youwould like to edit. For example,say ‘‘Eric.’’ The HFL response is‘‘What is the new number forEric?’’

2.

1.

4. 3.

4.5.

1.2.

1.

3.

5.

To list all names in the phonebook, dothis:

To delete a name, do this:

To edit the number of a name, do this:

HandsFreeLink

290

TM

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Clear.’’ TheHFL response is, ‘‘This processwill clear all paired phones, clearall entries in the phonebook, andclear the passcode. Is this whatyou would like to do?’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Yes.’’ TheHFL response is ‘‘Preparing toclear all paired phones, allphonebook entries, and thepasscode. This may take up to 2minutes to complete.’’ Press andrelease the Talk button. After thebeep, say ‘‘OK’’ to proceed, or say‘‘Go back’’ or ‘‘Cancel.’’

If you said ‘‘OK,’’ after a shortperiod of time, the HFL responseis, ‘‘System has been cleared.Returning to the main menu.’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘List.’’ TheHFL responds by listing thenames in the phonebook. Whenthe end of the list is reached, theHFL response is, ‘‘The entire listhas been read. Returning to themain menu.’’


Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘List.’’ TheHFL responds by listing thenames in the phonebook. When itsays the name you want to call, forexample, Eric, press the Talkbutton, and then say ‘‘Call.’’ TheHFL response is, ‘‘Would you liketo call Eric?’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Yes.’’ TheHFL response is ‘‘Calling.’’ Onceconnected, you will hear theperson you called through theaudio speakers. To change thevolume, use the audio systemvolume knob.

This operation clears the HFL ofyour passcode, your paired phones,and all names in the HFL phonebook.Clearing is recommended before yousell your vehicle.

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘System.’’ TheHFL response is, ‘‘System optionsare setup and clear.’’

2.

3.

4.

1.

1.

2.

3.

2.

To call a name from the phonebook list,do this:

To clear the system, do this:

Clearing the System

HandsFreeLinkF

eatures

291

TM

＜＞

＜＞

If there are paired phones withoutFrench name tags, the HFLresponse is ‘‘Pour que le systèmeidentifie les téléphones qui ont étéjumelés dans une autre langue, lesnoms des téléphones doivent êtreré-enregistrés.’’

If there are paired phoneswithout French name tags thefollowing prompts will continue.

The HFL response is, for example,‘‘Quel est le nom Français pourPaul’s phone ?’’ Press andrelease the Talk button. After thebeep, say ‘‘Téléphone de Paul.’’The HFL response is, ‘‘Quel est lenom Français pour Pat’s phone

?’’ Press and release the Talkbutton. Say ‘‘Téléphone de Pat.’’After all paired phones missing aFrench name tag are re-recorded,the HFL will prompt, ‘‘Retour aumenu principal.’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘ChangerLangue.’’ The HFL response is,‘‘English or Français?’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Yes.’’ If thereare no paired phones withoutEnglish name tags, the HFLresponse is ‘‘The language hasbeen changed. Returning to themain menu.’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘English.’’ TheHFL response is, ‘‘You haveselected English. Name tags thatwere stored while in French modewill not be accessible in Englishmode. Would you like tocontinue?’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Oui.’’ If thereare no paired phones withoutFrench name tags, the HFLresponse is ‘‘La langue a étéchangée. Retour au menu principal.’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Français.’’The HFL response is ‘‘Vous avezsélectionné Français. Les nomsenregistrés en mode Anglais neseront pas accessible en modeFrançais. Voulez-vous continuer?’’

Press and release the Talk button.After the beep, say ‘‘Changelanguage.’’ The HFL response is‘‘English or Français?’’

1.

2.

3.

4.

1.

2.

3.

To change from French to English, dothis:

To change from English to French, dothis:

HandsFreeLink

Changing LanguageCanadian models only

292

NOTE:

TM

＜＞

＜＞

If there are paired phones withoutEnglish name tags, the HFLresponse is ‘‘The language has beenchanged. For the system to identifyphones that were paired while inanother language, the phone namesneed to be re-recorded.’’

If there are paired phoneswithout English name tags, thefollowing prompts will continue.

The HFL says, for example, ‘‘Whatis the English name forTéléphone de Paul ?’’ Press andrelease the Talk button. After thebeep, say ‘‘Paul’s phone. ’’ TheHFL response is ‘‘What is theEnglish name for Téléphone dePat ?’’ Press and release the Talkbutton. After the beep, say ‘‘Pat’sphone.’’ After all paired phonesmissing an English name tag arere-recorded, the HFL will say‘‘Returning to the main menu.’’

In addition, you cannot use the HFLwhile using AcuraLink.

When OnStar is activated during anHFL call or when using voice control,the HFL call is placed on hold, or theHFL stops its voice recognition. TheHFL call will continue when OnStaruse is ended. To operate the HFLagain, press the Talk button. Thenafter the beep, say the appropriatecommand.

4.

HandsFreeLink

HFL Limitations

Features

293

NOTE:

TM

Before you begin driving yourvehicle, you should know whatgasoline to use and how to check thelevels of important fluids. You alsoneed to know how to properly storeluggage or packages. Theinformation in this section will helpyou. If you plan to add anyaccessories to your vehicle, pleaseread the information in this sectionfirst.

.............................Break-in Period . 296.................Fuel Recommendation . 296

.........Service Station Procedures . 297.....................................Refueling .297

.TIGHTEN Fuel Cap Message .298Opening and Closing

.................................the Hood .299....................................Oil Check .301

..............Engine Coolant Check .301...............................Fuel Economy . 302

...Accessories and Modifications . 303.............................Carrying Cargo . 305

Before DrivingB

eforeD

riving

295

Help assure your vehicle’s futurereliability and performance by payingextra attention to how you driveduring the first 600 miles (1,000 km).During this period:

Avoid full-throttle starts and rapidacceleration.

Avoid hard braking for the first200 miles (300 km).

Do not change the oil until thescheduled maintenance time.

You should also follow theserecommendations with anoverhauled or exchanged engine, orwhen the brakes are replaced.

Do not tow a trailer.

We recommend quality gasolinescontaining detergent additives thathelp prevent fuel system and enginedeposits.

In addition, in order to maintain goodperformance, fuel economy, andemissions control, we stronglyrecommend, in areas where it isavailable, the use of gasoline thatdoes NOT contain manganese-basedfuel additives such as MMT.Use of gasoline with these additivesmay adversely affect performance,and cause the malfunction indicatorlamp on your instrument panel tocome on. If this happens, contactyour authorized dealer for service.

Your vehicle is designed to operateon premium unleaded gasoline with apump octane of 91 or higher. If thisoctane grade is unavailable, regularunleaded gasoline with a pumpoctane of 87 or higher may be usedtemporarily. The use of regularunleaded gasoline can cause metallicknocking noises in the engine andwill result in decreased engineperformance. The long-term use ofregular-grade gasoline can lead toengine damage.

Break-in Period Fuel Recommendation

Break-in Period, Fuel Recommendation

296

CONTINUED

Park with the driver’s side closestto the service station pump.

Some gasoline today is blended withoxygenates such as ethanol orMTBE. Your vehicle is designed tooperate on oxygenated gasolinecontaining up to 10% ethanol byvolume and up to 15% MTBE byvolume. Do not use gasolinecontaining methanol.

If you notice any undesirableoperating symptoms, try anotherservice station or switch to anotherbrand of gasoline.

For further important fuel-relatedinformation, please refer to your

.Open the fuel fill door by pressingthe button on the driver’s door.(To open the fuel fill doormanually, see page .)

1.

2.

412

Service Station Procedures

Refueling

Quick Start Guide

Before

Driving

297

FUEL FILL CAP

FUEL FILL DOOR RELEASE BUTTON

Stop the engine, and keepheat, sparks, and flamesaway.Handle fuel only outdoors.Wipe up spills immediately.

Gasoline is highly flammableand explosive. You can beburned or seriously injuredwhen handling fuel.

Remove the fuel fill cap slowly.You may hear a hissing sound aspressure inside the tank escapes.Place the cap in the holder on thefuel fill door.

Stop filling the tank after the fuelnozzle automatically clicks off. Donot try to ‘‘top off’’ the tank. Leavesome room for the fuel to expandwith temperature changes.

even though the tank is not full,there may be a problem with yourvehicle’s fuel vapor recoverysystem. The system helps keepfuel vapors from going into theatmosphere. Consult your dealer.

If your fuel cap is loose or missing, a‘‘TIGHTEN FUEL CAP’’ messageappears on the multi-informationdisplay after you turn the ignitionswitch to the ON (II) position, afteryou start the engine or while you aredriving. Turn the ignition switch offand confirm the fuel cap is installed.If it is, loosen the cap, then retightenuntil it clicks at least once.

Screw the fuel fill cap back onuntil it clicks at least once. If youdo not properly tighten the cap,you will see a ‘‘TIGHTEN FUELCAP’’ message on the multi-information display (see rightcolumn on this page), and themalfunction indicator lamp mayalso come on (see page ).

Push the fuel fill door closed untilit latches.

3.

4.

5.

6.

410

If the fuel nozzle keeps clicking off


Tighten Fuel Cap Message

298

Park the vehicle, and set theparking brake. Pull the hoodrelease lever located under thelower left corner of the dashboard.The hood will pop up slightly.

Turn the engine off, and check orretighten the fuel cap until it clicks atleast once. The MIL goes out afterseveral days of normal driving oncethe cap is tightened or replaced. If itdoes not go out, have your dealerinspect the vehicle. For moreinformation, see page .

The TIGHTEN FUEL CAP message,displayed after you turn the ignitionswitch to the ON (II) position orstart the engine, should go off aftertightening the fuel cap, turning theignition switch off and on, thendriving over 12 mph (US) or 20km/h (Canada) for at least 10minutes. Due to different drivingconditions, it may take a few drivetrips to make the message go off.

The TIGHTEN FUEL CAP messagedisplayed while driving should go offafter tightening the fuel cap, turningthe ignition switch off and on, thendriving over 30 mph (US) or 48km/h (Canada) for at least 45seconds. Due to different drivingconditions, it may take a few drivetrips to make the message go off.

If the system still detects a loose ormissing fuel cap, the malfunctionindicator lamp (MIL) comes on. If aloose or missing fuel cap was not thecause of the TIGHTEN FUEL CAPmessage coming on, the MIL willalso come on. When the MIL comeson, the message goes off.

1.

410

CONTINUED

Opening and Closing the Hood

Service Station ProceduresB

eforeD

riving

299

HOOD RELEASE LEVER

Lift the hood up most of the way.The hydraulic supports will lift itup the rest of the way and hold itup.

If the hood latch handle movesstiffly, or if you can open the hoodwithout lifting the handle, themechanism should be cleaned andlubricated.

Reach between the hood and thefront bumper with your finger.Slide the latch handle up.

To close the hood, lower the hood toabout a foot (30 cm) above thefender, then firmly press down onthe front edge of the hood. Makesure it is securely latched.

3.2.


300

LATCH

Remove the dipstick again, andcheck the level. It should bebetween the upper and lowermarks.

If it is near or below the lowermark, see onpage .

Wait a few minutes after turning theengine off before you check the oil.

Remove the dipstick (orange loop).

Wipe the dipstick with a cleancloth or paper towel.

Insert it all the way back in its hole.

Look at the coolant level in theradiator reserve tank. Make sure it isbetween the MAX and MIN lines. Ifit is below the MIN line, see

on page .

4.

1.

2.

3.

366

363

CONTINUED

Engine Coolant Check

Adding Engine Oil

Oil Check

AddingEngine Coolant

Service Station ProceduresB

eforeD

riving

301

RESERVE TANK

MAX

MIN

LOWER MARK

UPPER MARK

DIPSTICK

Combine several short trips intoone.

The air conditioning puts an extraload on the engine which makes ituse more fuel. Use the fresh-airventilation when possible.

an underinflated tirecauses more ‘‘rolling resistance,’’which uses more fuel.

The build-up of snow or mud onyour vehicle’s underside addsweight and rolling resistance.Frequent cleaning helps your fuelmileage and reduces the chance ofcorrosion.

Always drive in the highest gearpossible.

Refer toon page for information

about checking other items on yourvehicle.

Always maintain your vehicleaccording to the maintenanceschedule. See

on page.

Drive moderately. Rapidacceleration, abrupt cornering,and hard braking use more fuel.

Try to maintain a constant speed.Every time you slow down andspeed up, your vehicle uses extrafuel. Use cruise control whenappropriate.

356

356

For example,

Improving Fuel EconomyOwner’s MaintenanceChecks

Owner’sMaintenance Checks

Service Station Procedures, Fuel Economy

302

When properly installed, cellularphones, alarms, two-way radios, andlow-powered audio systems shouldnot interfere with your vehicle’scomputer controlled systems, suchas your airbags and anti-lock brakes.

Before installing any accessory:

Make sure the accessory does notobscure any lights, or interferewith proper vehicle operation orperformance.

Modifying your vehicle, or installingsome non-Acura accessories, canmake your vehicle unsafe. Beforeyou make any modifications or addany accessories, be sure to read thefollowing information.

Your dealer has Acura accessoriesthat allow you to personalize yourvehicle. These accessories havebeen designed and approved for yourvehicle, and are covered by warranty.

Although non-Acura accessories mayfit on your vehicle, they may notmeet factory specifications, andcould adversely affect your vehicle’shandling and stability (see page ).

Do not install accessories on theside pillars or across the rearwindows as these may interferewith proper operation of the sidecurtain airbags.

Before installing any electronicaccessory, have the installercontact your dealer. If possible,have your dealer inspect the finalinstallation.

Be sure electronic accessories donot overload electrical circuits(see page ) or interfere withthe proper operation of yourvehicle.

306

413

Accessories

Accessories and ModificationsB

eforeD

riving

303

Improper accessories ormodifications can affect yourvehicle’s handling, stability, andperformance, and cause acrash in which you can be hurtor killed.

Follow all instructions in thisowner’s manual regardingaccessories and modifications.

Some examples are:

Larger or smaller wheels and tirescan interfere with the operation ofyour vehicle’s anti-lock brakes andother systems.

Modifying your steering wheel orany other part of your vehicle’ssafety systems could make thesystems ineffective.

If you plan to modify your vehicle,consult your dealer.

Raising your vehicle with a non-Acura suspension kit can affectthe handling and stability.

Lowering the vehicle with a non-Acura suspension kit thatsignificantly reduces groundclearance can allow theundercarriage to hit speed bumpsor other raised objects, whichcould cause the airbags to deploy.

Non-Acura wheels can causeexcessive stress on suspensioncomponents and are notcompatible with the tire pressuremonitoring system.

Removing parts from your vehicle,or replacing components with non-Acura components could seriouslyaffect your vehicle’s handling,stability, and reliability.

Modifying Your Vehicle

Accessories and Modifications

304

Your vehicle has several convenientstorage areas:

Glove boxFront door and seat-back pocketsConsole compartment

In addition, the trunk pass-throughallows you to carry longer items.

However, carrying too much cargo,or improperly storing it, can affectyour vehicle’s handling, stability,stopping distance, and tires, andmake it unsafe. Before carrying anytype of cargo, be sure to read thefollowing pages.

TrunkUtility pocket

Carrying CargoB

eforeD

riving

305

TRUNK SEAT-BACK POCKETS GLOVE BOX

UTILITY POCKETCONSOLE COMPARTMENT FRONT DOOR POCKET

－ ×Steps for determining correct loadlimit:

Locate the statement, ‘‘thecombined weight of occupants andcargo should never exceed 850lbs’’ on your vehicle’s placard.[The placard is on the driver’sdoorjamb.]

Determine the combined weightof the driver and passengers thatwill be riding in your vehicle.

The resulting figure equals theavailable amount of cargo andluggage load capacity.For example, if the maximum loadis 850 lbs and there will be five 150lb. passengers in your vehicle, theamount of available cargo andluggage load capacity is 100 lbs.

(850 750 (5 150) = 100 lbs.)

Subtract the combined weight ofthe driver and passengers from850 lbs (395 kg).

Determine the combined weightof luggage and cargo being loadedin the vehicle. That weight mayunsafely exceed the availablecargo and luggage load capacity instep 4.

In addition, the total weight of thevehicle, all occupants, accessories,cargo, and trailer tongue loadmust not exceed the gross vehicleweight rating (GVWR) or thegross axle weight rating (GAWR).Both are on a label on the driver’sdoorjamb.

If your vehicle will be towing atrailer, load from your trailer willbe transferred to your vehicle.Consult this manual to determinehow this reduces the availablecargo and luggage load capacity ofyour vehicle (see page ).

The maximum load for your vehicleis 850 lbs (385 kg) for U.S. vehicles,and 395 kg for Canadian vehicles.This figure includes the total weightof all occupants, cargo, andaccessories, and the tongue load ifyou are towing a trailer.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

341

Carrying Cargo

Load Limits

306

Overloading or improperloading can affect handling andstability and cause a crash inwhich you can be hurt or killed.

Follow all load limits and otherloading guidelines in thismanual.

Store or secure all items that couldbe thrown around and hurtsomeone during a crash.

Do not put any items on top of therear shelf. They can block yourview and be thrown around thevehicle during a crash.

Be sure items placed on the floorbehind the front seats cannot rollunder the seats and interfere withthe pedals or seat operation.

Keep the glove box closed whiledriving. If it is open, a passengercould injure their knees during acrash or sudden stop.

Distribute cargo evenly on thefloor of the trunk, placing theheaviest items on the bottom andas far forward as possible.

If you carry large items thatprevent you from closing the trunklid, exhaust gas can enter thepassenger area. To avoid thepossibility of

, follow the instructionson page .

If you carry any items on a roofrack, be sure the total weight ofthe rack and the items does notexceed the maximum allowableweight. Please contact your dealerfor further information.

If you carry any items extendingthrough the trunk pass-through,tie down or secure all items thatcould be thrown around thevehicle and hurt someone during acrash or sudden stop.

56

carbon monoxidepoisoning

Carrying Items in the PassengerCompartment

Carrying Cargo in the Trunk or ona Roof Rack

Carrying CargoB

eforeD

riving

307

The cargo floor hooks can also beused to tie down and secure items onthe floor.

There are hooks on the floor andboth sides of the trunk. They can beused to install the cargo net forsecuring items. The side cargohooks are designed to hold lightitems (maximum load: 6 lbs or 3 kgsfor each hook). Heavy objects maydamage the side hooks.

Cargo Hooks

Carrying Cargo

308

SIDE CARGO HOOKS CARGO FLOOR HOOKS

........................Preparing to Drive . 310.......................Starting the Engine . 311

Check Starting System.................................Message . 312

..............Automatic Transmission . 313...........................SH-AWD System . 320

...........................................Parking . 321.............................Braking System . 322

................Anti-lock Brakes(ABS) . 323Collision Mitigation Brake System

......................................(CMBS) . 325Tire Pressure

...Monitoring System (TPMS) . 335Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA)

........................................System . 339...........................Towing a Trailer . 341

...................Towing Your Vehicle . 346

This section gives you tips onstarting the engine under variousconditions, and how to operate theautomatic transmission. It alsoincludes important information onparking your vehicle, the brakingsystem, the SH-AWD system, thevehicle stability assist (VSA) system,the tire pressure monitoring system(TPMS), the collision mitigationbrake system (CMBS), and facts youneed if you are planning to tow atrailer.

DrivingD

riving

309

Make sure all windows, mirrors,and outside lights are clean andunobstructed. Remove frost, snow,or ice.

Check that the hood is fully closed.

Visually check the tires. If a tirelooks low, use a gauge to check itspressure.

Check that any items you may becarrying are stored properly orfastened down securely.

Check the seat adjustment (seepage ).

Check the steering wheeladjustment (see page ).

Make sure the doors and thetrunk are securely closed andlocked.

Fasten your seat belt. Check thatyour passengers have fastenedtheir seat belts (see page ).

You should do the following checksand adjustments before you driveyour vehicle.

Check the adjustment of theinside and outside mirrors (seepages and ).

When you start the engine, checkthe gauges and indicators in theinstrument panel, and themessages on the multi-informationdisplay (see page , and

).

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

9.

10.

17

151

155154

78

143

7061

Preparing to Drive

310

If the engine does not start within15 seconds, or starts but stallsright away, repeat step 4 with theaccelerator pedal pressed halfwaydown. If the engine starts, releasepressure on the accelerator pedalso the engine does not race.

If the engine fails to start, pressthe accelerator pedal all the waydown, and hold it there whilestarting to clear flooding. If theengine still does not start, returnto step 5.

Apply the parking brake.

In cold weather, turn off allelectrical accessories to reducethe drain on the battery.

Make sure the shift lever is inPark. Press on the brake pedal.

Your vehicle’s starting system has anauto control mode. When you turnthe ignition switch to the START(III) position, this feature keeps theengine’s starter motor running untilthe engine starts. Follow theseinstructions to start the engine:

Without touching the acceleratorpedal, turn the ignition switch tothe START (III) position, thenrelease the ignition switch. You donot need to hold the ignitionswitch in the START (III) positionto start the engine. Depending onthe outside temperature, thestarter motor runs for about 6 to 9

seconds until the engine starts.

If you hold the ignition switch inthe START (III) position for morethan 7 seconds, the starter motor,depending on the outsidetemperature, runs for about 10 to25 seconds until the engine starts.

If the engine does not start, wait atleast 10 seconds before tryingagain.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

6.

146

Starting the EngineD

riving

311

The engine is harder to start in coldweather. Also, the thinner air f ound ataltitudes above 8,000 f eet (2,400meters) adds to this problem.

The immobilizer system protects yourvehicle f rom thef t. If an improperly-coded key (or other device) is used, theengine’s f uel system is disabled. Formore inf ormation, see page .

If there is a problem with thestarting system, you will see a‘‘CHECK STARTING SYSTEM’’message on the multi-informationdisplay when the ignition switch isturned to the ON (II) position. Youwill also see this message when theauto control mode of the startingsystem has a problem.

If this message is on, the ignitionswitch has to be held in theSTART (III) position manuallyuntil the engine starts. Theignition switch can be held in thatposition up to 15 seconds.

Even though you may be able tostart the engine manually withoutthe auto control mode of the startingsystem, have your dealer inspectyour vehicle.

Starting the Engine

Check Starting System Message

312

These indicators on the instrumentpanel show which position the shiftlever is in. In the SequentialSportShift Mode, the ‘‘M’’ indicatornext to the ‘‘D’’ indicator comes on,and the illuminated number underthe low oil pressure indicator showsyou the gear you have selected.

To shift from any position, pressfirmly on the brake pedal and slidethe lever along the guide on theconsole. You cannot shift out of Parkwhen the ignition switch is in theLOCK (0) or the ACCESSORY (I)position.

The ‘‘D’’ indicator comes on for afew seconds when you turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position. If it flashes while driving (inany shift position), it indicates apossible problem in the transmission.

If the malfunction indicator lampcomes on along with the ‘‘D’’indicator, there is a problem in theautomatic transmission controlsystem. Avoid rapid acceleration, andhave the transmission checked byyour dealer as soon as possible.

When the ‘‘D’’ indicator warns of apossible problem with thetransmission, you will see a ‘‘CHECKTRANSMISSION’’ message on themulti-information display (see page

).78

Shift Lever Position Indicators Shifting

Automatic TransmissionD

riving

313

－－

－

－

－

－

To avoid transmission damage, cometo a complete stop before shiftinginto Park. The shift lever must be inPark before you can remove the keyfrom the ignition switch.

Your vehicle has a reverse lockout soyou cannot accidentally shift toreverse from neutral or any otherdriving position when the vehiclespeed exceeds 5 6 mph (8 10km/h).

If there is a problem in the reverselockout system, or your vehicle’s

battery is disconnected or goes dead,you cannot shift to reverse. (Refer to

on page ).

Use neutral if youneed to restart a stalled engine, or ifit is necessary to stop briefly withthe engine idling. Shift to the Parkposition if you need to leave yourvehicle for any reason. Press on thebrake pedal when you are movingthe shift lever from neutral toanother gear.This position mechani-

cally locks the transmission. UsePark whenever you are turning off orstarting the engine. To shift out ofPark, you must press on the brakepedal and have your foot off theaccelerator pedal.

If you have done all of the above andstill cannot move the lever out ofPark, see onpage .

Press the brakepedal to shift from Park to reverse.To shift from neutral to reverse,come to a complete stop and thenshift.

Use this position foryour normal driving. Thetransmission automatically selects asuitable gear (1 through 5) for yourspeed and acceleration. You maynotice the transmission shifting up athigher engine speeds when theengine is cold. This helps the enginewarm up faster.

If you cannot shift to reverse whenthe vehicle is stopped, press thebrake pedal, slowly shift to neutral,and then shift to reverse.

318

318Do this:

Press the brake pedal, thenmove the shift lever.

Move the lever.

To shift from:P to R

R to NN to DD toDD to DD to NN to RR to P

3

3

Shift Lock Release

Neutral (N)

Park (P)

Shift Lock Release

Reverse (R)

Drive (D)

Automatic Transmission

314

＋－

＋

－

－

＋

With the shift lever in ‘‘D’’ position,you can select the SequentialSportShift mode to shift gears muchlike a manual transmission, butwithout a clutch pedal.

To enter the Sequential SportShiftmode, move the shift lever further tothe driver’s side. To return to ‘‘D,’’move the shift lever to thepassenger’s side.In Sequential SportShift mode, eachtime you push forward on the shiftlever, the transmission shifts to ahigher gear. Pull back on the lever todownshift. The number of the gearselected is displayed on theinstrument panel.

When you move the shift lever from‘‘D’’ to ‘‘M’’ position, the displayshows the selected gear.

While in the Sequential SportShiftmode, you can also shift up or downusing the (right side) or (leftside) paddle shifters on the right andleft side of the steering wheel.

For up shift, press the right side ( )paddle shifter.For down shift, press the left side( ) paddle shifter.

CONTINUED

Sequential SportShift Mode


riving

315

SELECTED GEAR

( ) DOWN SHIFT

( ) UP SHIFT

PADDLE SHIFTER

→

→

→

→

The transmission may automaticallydownshift from the higher gear tothe lower gear under theseconditions:

Driving on level roads and downhill

Driving uphill

Downshifting gives you more powerwhen climbing, and provides enginebraking when going down a steep hill.

The gear indicator will flash thenumber of the lower gear severaltimes, then return to the higher gear.

To shift from

4 3

5 4

To shift from

4 3

5 4

The transmission remains in theselected gear (5, 4, 3, 2, or 1). Thereis no automatic downshift when youpush the accelerator pedal to thefloor.

Speed range

under 17 mph(27 km/h)


When you accelerate away from astop, the transmission starts in firstgear. You have to manually upshiftbetween first and fifth gears. Makesure you upshift before the enginespeed reaches the tachometer’s redzone.

The transmission also shiftsautomatically as the vehicle comes toa complete stop. It downshifts to firstgear when the vehicle speed is under8 mph (13 km/h).

If you try to manually downshift at aspeed that would cause the engine toexceed the redline in a lower gear,the transmission does not downshift.

If the vehicle speed slows to belowthe redline of the selected lower gearposition while the indicator isflashing, the transmissiondownshifts, and the display showsthe selected lower gear.

Speed range




316

→

→

→

→

→

→

→

The table shows the speed rangesfor upshifting and downshifting. When you are in Sequential

SportShift mode, and the vehicle isstopped, push forward on the shiftlever to shift to second gear. Youwill see ‘‘2’’ in the display. Startingout in second gear will help toreduce wheelspin in deep snow oron a slippery surface.

If you start out in second gear, thetransmission will be fixed in thatgear.

To shift from

1 2

2 3

3 4

4 5

To shift from

3 2

4 3

5 4

The transmission will notautomatically downshift to first geareven when the vehicle speed isunder 8 mph (13 km/h). You need toshift down to first gear manually.

Speed range

over 0 mph(0 km/h)

over 8 mph(13 km/h)

over 17 mph(27 km/h)

over 37 mph(60 km/h)

Speed range




CONTINUED

Starting in Second Gear


riving

317

－If you exceed the maximum speedfor the gear you are in, the enginespeed will enter into the tachometer’sred zone. If this occurs, you may feelthe engine cut in and out. This iscaused by a limiter in the engine’scomputer controls. The engine willrun normally when you reduce therpm below the red zone.

Make sure the ignition switch is inthe LOCK (0) position.

Set the parking brake.

Before downshifting, make sure theengine will not go into thetachometer’s red zone.

This allows you to move the shiftlever out of Park if the normalmethod of pushing on the brakepedal does not work.

This position issimilar to D, except only the firstthree gears are selected. Use Dwhen towing a trailer in hilly terrain,or to provide engine braking whengoing down a steep hill. D can alsokeep the transmission from cyclingbetween third, fourth, and fifth gearsin stop-and-go driving.

For faster acceleration when in D orD, you can get the transmission toautomatically downshift by pushingthe accelerator pedal to the floor.The transmission will shift down one,two, or three gears, depending onyour speed.

To release the reverse lockout, makesure the ignition switch is in theACCESSORY(I) position.

1.

2.

3

3

3

Engine Speed Limiter Shift Lock ReleaseDrive (D )


3

318

If you need to use the shift lockrelease, it means your vehicle isdeveloping a problem. Have thevehicle checked by a dealer.

Put a cloth on the edge of the shiftlock release slot cover next to theshift lever. Use a small flat-tippedscrewdriver or a metal fingernailfile to remove the cover. Carefullypry on the edge of the cover.

Insert a built-in key into the shiftlock release slot.

Push down on the built-in key, andmove the shift lever out of Park toneutral.

Remove the built-in key from theshift lock release slot, thenreinstall the cover. Make sure thenotch on the cover is on the driver’sside. Press the brake pedal, andrestart the engine.

To release the reverse lockout,move the shift lever from neutralto reverse, then to Park.

3. 4.

5.

6.


riving

319

COVER SHIFT LOCK RELEASE SLOT

Each torque indicator is displayedas a bar graph divided into 5segments. The number ofsegments represents the amountof torque distributed to eachwheel.

The SH-AWD torque distributionmonitor on the multi-informationdisplay shows you the amount oftorque being sent to the wheels.Each wheel: right front (RF), leftfront (LF), right rear (RR), and leftrear (LR), has its own torqueindicator.

When cruise control is on whiledriving, the torque distributionmonitor is not shown.

The SH-AWD system is a full timeall-wheel-drive system thatautomatically controls and transfersvarying amounts of engine torque toall wheels independently, accordingto the driving conditions.

When there is only a slight change intorque distribution while driving,such as cruising on level roads at thesame speed, the torque distributionmonitor may stop displaying theamount of torque. This is not asystem problem. The monitor willshow the amount if the systemsenses any change in torquedistribution.

While the SH-AWD system helps toenhance the vehicle’s drivingstability in all situations, it is stillyour responsibility to drive andcorner at reasonable speeds and toleave a sufficient margin of safety.

SH-AWD Torque DistributionMonitor

SH-AWD System

320

TORQUE INDICATOR

TORQUE INDICATOR

If the SH-AWD indicator on theinstrument panel stays on, and themulti-information display shows anSH-AWD message, there is aproblem with the system. Yourvehicle still has normal front-wheeldrive with vehicle stability assist(VSA), but does not have theadvantages of SH-AWD. Have yourvehicle checked by a dealer as soonas possible.

Check the indicator on theinstrument panel to verify that thesecurity system is set.

If the vehicle is facing downhill,turn the front wheels toward thecurb.

If the vehicle is facing uphill, turnthe front wheels away from thecurb.

Never park over dry leaves, tallgrass, or other flammablematerials. The hot three waycatalytic converter could causethese materials to catch on fire.

Make sure the parking brake isfully released before driving away.Driving with the parking brakepartially set can overheat ordamage the rear brakes.

Always use the parking brake whenyou park your vehicle. Make surethe parking brake is set firmly, oryour vehicle may roll if it is parkedon an incline.

Set the parking brake before you putthe transmission in Park. This keepsthe vehicle from moving and puttingpressure on the parking mechanismin the transmission.

Make sure the moonroof and thewindows are closed.

Turn off the lights.

Place any packages, valuables, etc.,in the trunk or take them with you.

Lock the doors.

SH-AWD System, Parking

Parking

Parking Tips

Driving

321

Check the brakes after drivingthrough deep water. Apply thebrakes moderately to see if they feelnormal. If not, apply them gently andfrequently until they do. Be extracautious in your driving.

The hydraulic system that operatesthe brakes has two separate circuits.Each circuit works diagonally acrossthe vehicle (the left-front brake isconnected with the right-rear brake,etc.). If one circuit should develop aproblem, you will still have brakingat two wheels.

If the brake pads need replacing, youwill hear a distinctive, metallicscreeching sound when you applythe brake pedal. If you do not havethe brake pads replaced, they willscreech all the time. It is normal forthe brakes to occasionally squeal orsqueak when you apply them.

Your vehicle is equipped with discbrakes at all four wheels. A powerassist helps reduce the effort neededon the brake pedal. EmergencyBrake Assist System gains thestopping force when you depressedthe brake pedal hard in an emergentsituation. The anti-lock brake system(ABS) helps you retain steeringcontrol when braking very hard.

Constant application of the brakeswhen going down a long hill buildsup heat and reduces their effective-ness. Use the engine to assist thebrakes by taking your foot off theaccelerator and downshifting to alower gear.

Resting your foot on the pedal keepsthe brakes applied lightly, builds upheat, and reduces their effectiveness.It also keeps your brake lights on allthe time, confusing drivers behindyou.

Braking System Design

Brake Wear Indicators

Braking System

322

The anti-lock brake system (ABS)helps prevent the brakes fromlocking up, and helps you retainsteering control by pumping thebrakes rapidly, much faster than aperson can do it.

this defeats the purpose of the ABS.Let the ABS work for you by alwayskeeping firm, steady pressure on thebrake pedal as you steer away fromthe hazard. This is sometimesreferred to as ‘‘stomp and steer.’’

You will feel a pulsation in the brakepedal when the ABS activates, andyou may hear some noise. This isnormal: it is the ABS rapidlypumping the brakes. On drypavement, you will need to press onthe brake pedal very hard before theABS activates. However, you mayfeel the ABS activate immediately ifyou are trying to stop on snow or ice.

If this indicator comes on, the anti-lock function of the braking systemhas shut down. The brakes still worklike a conventional system, butwithout anti-lock. You should haveyour dealer inspect your vehicle assoon as possible.

If the ABS indicator comes on whiledriving, test the brakes as shown onpage .

When the ABS indicator comes on,you will also see a ‘‘CHECK ABSSYSTEM’’ message on the multi-information display.

411You should never pump the brake pedal;

ABS Indicator

Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)D

riving

323

ABS INDICATOR

on loose oruneven surfaces, such as gravel orsnow, than a vehicle without anti-lock.

Always steer moderatelywhen you are braking hard. Severeor sharp steering wheel movementcan still cause your vehicle to veerinto oncoming traffic or off the road.

such as trying to take acorner too fast or making a suddenlane change. Always drive at a safespeed for the road and weatherconditions.

It only helps with steeringcontrol during braking.

Important Safety Reminders A vehicle with ABS may require alonger distance to stop

ABS cannot prevent the loss ofstability.

ABS will not prevent a skid thatresults from changing directionabruptly,

ABS does not reduce the time ordistance it takes to stop thevehicle.

Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)

324

The CMBS does not activate if thespeed difference between yourvehicles is less than 10 mph (15km/h). CMBS may also notactivate if you turn the steeringwheel to avoid the collision.

The CMBS consists of a radarsensor in the front grille, a brakeactuator in the engine compartment,an indicator on the instrument panel,seat belt e-pretensioners on the frontseats, and an on/off switch on thedashboard.

When the CMBS activates, the brakelights also come on.

The collision mitigation brakesystem (CMBS) can assist you whenthere is a possibility of your vehiclehitting the vehicle in front of you. Itis designed to reduce the speed ofyour vehicle before an unavoidablecollision occurs and, if possible, toalert you to a potential collision whilethere is time to prevent it. Here is abrief description of what the CMBScan do:

When your speed is above 10 mph(15 km/h), the CMBS radarsensor in the front grille can sensea vehicle ahead of you. When yourvehicle gets too close to thevehicle ahead of you, the systemmay activate a warning beep,causing automatic application ofthe brakes, and causing thee-pretensioners to tighten thefront seat belts (see page ).23

If equipped

Collision Mitigation Brake System (CMBS)

Overview

Driving

325

RADAR SENSOR

BRAKE ACTUATOR

SEAT BELTE-PRETENSIONER

The radar sensor is located behindthe Acura emblem in the front grille.If the emblem is covered with mud,dirt, dead leaves, wet snow, etc., or ifyou put a sticker on it, the CMBS willautomatically shut off, and theCMBS indicator on the instrumentpanel will come on. You will also seea CHECK CMBS RADAR SENSORmessage on the multi-informationdisplay for about 5 seconds.

Always keep the emblem clean. If itgets dirty, clean it with water or amild detergent. Never use chemicalsolvents or polishing powder.

Do not allow anything to impact theradar sensor or the emblem. If eitherof these parts receives a strongimpact, turn off the system bypressing the CMBS Off switch, andhave your vehicle checked by adealer. If the front grille ever needsto be repaired, consult a dealer first.

There are three bolts on the sides ofthe radar sensor. Do not tamper withthese bolts, or you may cause thesystem to malfunction.

If the front emblem or the radarsensor every needs to be removed,take your vehicle to a dealer.


Radar Sensor

326

EMBLEM

BOLTS(Do not tamper)

When the CMBS is on, the radarsensor constantly scans for vehiclesahead of you. This means thatdriving on a road with a few or novehicles could cause a CHECKCMBS RADAR SENSOR message toappear on the multi-informationdisplay. This is normal and not acause for concern.

The radar sensor may not alwaysscan as intended. Here are twoexamples:

The tires are not correctlymaintained. Always make sure thetire pressures are correct (seepage ), and that the tires arethe correct size and in goodcondition (see Tires on page ).

Your vehicle is tilted because of aheavy load in the rear or frommodifications to the suspension.Do not overload your vehicle (seeCarrying Cargo on page ), anddo not make any modifications tothe suspension (see Accessoriesand Modifications on page ).

305

303

384

384

Collision Mitigation Brake System (CMBS)D

riving

327

If the system senses a likely collisionwith a vehicle or object ahead of you,it alerts you with an audible and avisual alarm.

The audible alarm is a constantbeeping sound; the visual alert is anamber colored BRAKE message thatflashes in the multi-informationdisplay. If these alarms come on,take the appropriate means toprevent a collision (apply the brakes,change lanes, etc.).

To turn the CMBS off, press theCMBS OFF switch on the dashboardfor about 1 second. When you do this,a beeper sounds, a CMBS indicatoron the instrument panel comes on,and a CMBS OFF message appearson the multi-information display. Toturn the system back on, press theswitch again for about 1 second.

Collision Alarm CMBS OFF Switch


328

CMBS OFF SWITCH

The CMBS will automaticallyrecover when these conditions areimproved.

Any of the conditions below cancause the CMBS to shut off. Whenthe system shuts off, the CMBSindicator in the instrument panelcomes on, and a CHECK CMBSSYSTEM message appears on themulti-information display for about 5seconds.

This indicator comes on for severalseconds when you turn the ignitionswitch to the ON (II) position. It alsocomes on and stays on when youturn the CMBS off by pressing theCMBS OFF switch.

An abnormal tire condition isdetected (wrong tire size, flat tire,etc.).

Extended off-road or mountainousdriving.

Driving your vehicle with theparking brake applied.

Driving your vehicle in badweather (rain, fog, snow, etc.).

A dirty emblem on the front grille.

CONTINUED

CMBS IndicatorAutomatic Shut Off


riving

329

CMBS INDICATOR

The CMBS indicator normally comeson under these conditions:

When you manually turn off thesystem.

When the system shuts offautomatically.

When you drive in bad weather(rain, snow, fog, etc.).

When the VSA system indicatorcomes on (see page ).

When you turn the ignition switchto the ON (II) position, the CMBSindicator should come on for a fewseconds, then go off. If theindicator comes on at any othertime and a CHECK CMBSSYSTEM message appears on themulti-information display, there isa problem with the CMBS. Youcan still drive your vehicle, butCMBS will not be operating. Haveyour vehicle checked by a dealer.

To turn the CMBS back on, makesure the vehicle is stopped and theignition switch is in the ON (II)position, then press the CMBS OFFswitch for about 1 second.

If anything covers the front grille(dirt, mud, dry leaves, wet snow,etc.).

339


330

CONTINUED

A vehicle cuts in front of you andbrakes suddenly.

When you accelerate rapidly andapproach the vehicle ahead of youat high speed.

Driving in heavy, stop-and-gotraffic.

The vehicle ahead of you is amotorcycle or other small vehicle.

Immediately after you drive off.

The CMBS may not activate undersome conditions. Here are a fewexamples:

The distance between your vehicleand the vehicle ahead of you is tooshort.

A vehicle cuts in front of you at aslow speed.


Limitations

Driving

331

YOUR VEHICLEYOUR VEHICLE

Even with little or no chance of acollision, the CMBS may activateunder these conditions:

A vehicle suddenly crosses in frontof you.

When you approach or pass avehicle ahead of you that isturning left or right in anintersection.

When you change lanes quickly,then overtake the vehicle ahead ofyou.


332

YOUR VEHICLEYOUR VEHICLE

The CMBS is not designed to detectpedestrians.

CONTINUED

When you pass a low bridge athigh speed.

When you go over a sharp-edgedspeed bump at high speed.

When you approach train tracks atthe bottom of a hill and you do notapply the brakes.

Because of the road condition(curved, winding, etc.) or the state ofyour vehicle (turning angle, laneposition, etc.), CMBS can sometimesmistake a stationary object (lightpole, traffic sign, etc.) as a vehicleahead of you and temporarilyoperate. This is normal.


riving

333

LOW BRIDGE

RAILS

YOUR VEHICLE

SIGN, POLE, etc.




The main purpose of the CMBS is toreduce the severity of injuriescaused by an unavoidable collision.While the CMBS may help to alertyou and minimize the severity of acollision, it may not activate in everydangerous situation.

Even with the CMBS, it is still yourresponsibility to operate the brakepedal and steering wheelappropriately, according to thedriving conditions.


Important Safety Reminder

334

Your vehicle is equipped with a tirepressure monitoring system (TPMS)that turns on every time you start theengine and monitors the pressure inyour tires while driving.

Each tire has its own pressuresensor. If the air pressure of a tirebecomes significantly low, thesensor in that tire immediately sendsa signal that causes the low tirepressure indicator in theinstrumental panel and theappropriate tire position indicator onthe tire pressure monitor on themulti-information display (see page

) to come on.

For example, if you check and fillyour tires in a warm area, then drivein extremely cold weather, the tirepressure will be lower thanmeasured and could be underinflatedand cause the low tire pressureindicator to come on. Or, if youcheck and adjust your tire pressurein cooler conditions, and drive intoextremely hot conditions, the tiremay become overinflated. However,the low tire pressure indicator willnot come on if the tires areoverinflated.

When the low tire pressure indicatoris on, one or more of your tires issignificantly underinflated. Themulti-information display also showsa ‘‘CHECK TIRE PRESSURE’’message (see page ). You shouldstop and check your tires as soon aspossible, and inflate them to theproper pressure as indicated on thevehicle’s tire information placard.

Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire tooverheat and can lead to tire failure.Under-inflation also reduces fuelefficiency and tire tread life, and mayaffect the vehicle’s handling andstopping ability.

Because tire pressure varies bytemperature and other conditions,the low tire pressure indicator maycome on unexpectedly.

Refer to page for tire inflationguidelines.

383336

335

CONTINUED

Low Tire PressureIndicator

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)D

riving

335

Although your tire pressure ismonitored, you must manually checkthe tire pressures monthly.

If you have a flat tire, the low tirepressure and tire monitor indicatorswill come on. Replace the indicatedflat tire with the compact spare tire(see page ).

When all tire pressures are normal,the multi-information display willshow ‘‘TIRE PRESSURE OKSYSTEM FUNCTION NORMAL.’’

Each tire, including the spare, shouldbe checked monthly when cold, andset to the recommended inflationpressure as specified on the vehicleplacard and in the owner’s manual(see page ).

If you think you can safely drive ashort distance to a service station,proceed slowly to the station, theninflate the tire to the recommendedpressure.

If the tire is flat, or if the tirepressure is too low to continuedriving, replace the tire with thecompact spare tire.

When any of the tires has lowpressure, the multi-informationdisplay shows a ‘‘TIRE PRESSUREERROR SYSTEM FUNCTIONNORMAL’’ message (see page ).

After you replace the flat tire withthe spare, the low tire pressureindicator stays on. This is normal;the system is not monitoring thespare tire pressure. Manually checkthe spare tire pressure to be sure itis correct.

Never use a puncture-repairing agentin a flat tire. If used, you will have toreplace the tire pressure sensor.Have the flat tire repaired by yourdealer as soon as possible.

384

397

74

Changing a Tire with TPMS Tire Pressure Monitor

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)

336

CONTINUED

If there is a system error with theTPMS, the multi-information displayshows a ‘‘SYSTEM FUNCTIONERROR’’ message (see page ),and the tire pressure readings willnot be displayed. You will also see a‘‘CHECK TPMS SYSTEM’’ messageon the multi-information display (seepage ).

If any of the tires have low pressure,the multi-information display willshow a ‘‘CHECK TIRE PRESSURE’’message. You will also see one ormore low pressure tire positionsblinking in the display (see page

).

When the TPMS is functioningnormally, you can press the SEL/RESET button on the steering wheelto see the pressure readings of eachtire in psi (U.S. models) or kPa(Canadian models) (see page ).

78

338

33576


Tire Pressure Readings

Driving

337

VEHICLE ICON

U.S.

If one or more tires have lowpressure, the low tire pressureindicator on the instrument panelalso comes on (see page ).

When cruise control is on whiledriving, the pressure reading cannotbe checked by the tire pressuremonitor on the multi-informationdisplay.

If there is a problem with the TPMS,the multi-information display showsa ‘‘CHECK TPMS SYSTEM’’message (see page ). If you seethis message, the system is notmonitoring tire pressure. Have yourvehicle checked by a dealer as soonas possible.

If the low tire pressure indicatorcomes on, or the multi-informationdisplay shows a ‘‘CHECK TPMSSYSTEM’’ message, the VSA systemautomatically turns on even whenthe VSA system is turned off bypressing the VSA OFF switch (seepage ). If this happens, youcannot turn the VSA system off bypressing the VSA OFF switch again.

335

340

79


Check TPMS System Message

338

CANADA

When VSA activates, you will see theVSA activation indicator blink (seepage ).

If this indicator comes on whiledriving, pull to the side of the roadwhen it is safe, and turn off theengine. Reset the system byrestarting the engine. If the VSAsystem indicator stays on, or comesback on while driving, have the VSAsystem inspected by your dealer.

If the indicator does not come onwhen the ignition switch is turned tothe ON (II) position, there may be aproblem with the VSA system. Haveyour dealer inspect your vehicle assoon as possible (see page ).

The vehicle stability assist (VSA)system helps to stabilize the vehicleduring cornering if the vehicle turnsmore or less than desired. It alsoassists you in maintaining tractionwhile accelerating on loose orslippery road surfaces. It does thisby regulating the engine’s output andby selectively applying the brakes.

When VSA activates, you may noticethat the engine does not respond tothe accelerator in the same way itdoes at other times.

The VSA system cannot enhance thevehicle’s driving stability in allsituations and does not control yourvehicle’s entire braking system. It isstill your responsibility to drive andcorner at reasonable speeds and toleave a sufficient margin of safety.

65

65




CONTINUED

VSA Activation Indicator

VSA System Indicator

Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA)System

Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS), Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA) SystemD

riving

339

Driving with varying tire or wheelsizes may cause the VSA tomalfunction. When replacing tires,make sure they are of the same sizeand type as your original tires (seepage ).

Deactivate the VSA system if youneed to drive with the compact sparetire installed (see page ).

If you install winter tires, make surethey are the same size as those thatwere originally supplied with yourvehicle. Exercise the same cautionduring winter driving as you would ifyour vehicle was not equipped withVSA.

This switch is at the right side of theleft vent. Press it to turn VSA on andoff.

When VSA is off, the VSA activationindicator comes on as a reminder.

VSA is turned on every time youstart the engine, even if you turned itoff the last time you drove thevehicle.

When the VSA system indicatorcomes on, you will also see a‘‘CHECK VSA SYSTEM’’ messageon the multi-information display.

Without VSA, your vehicle still hasnormal braking and cornering ability,but it does not have VSA traction andstability enhancement.

If the low tire pressure indicatorcomes on (see page ), or themulti-information display shows a‘‘CHECK TPMS SYSTEM’’ message(see page ), the VSA systemautomatically turns on even whenthe VSA system is turned off withthe VSA OFF switch. In this case,you cannot turn the VSA system offby pressing the VSA OFF switchagain.

335

338

384

397

Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA) System

VSA and Tire SizesVSA Off Switch

340

VSA OFF SWITCH

Your vehicle has been designed toprimarily carry passengers and theircargo. You can also use it to tow atrailer if you carefully observe theload limits, use the proper equipment,and follow the guidelines in thissection.

The weight thatthe tongue of a fully-loaded trailerputs on the hitch should beapproximately 10 percent of thetrailer weight. Too much tongueload reduces front-tire traction andsteering control. Too little tongueload can make the trailer unstableand cause it to sway.

Themaximum allowable weight of thetrailer and everything in or on itmust not exceed 1,000 lbs (450 kg).Towing a load that is too heavycan seriously affect your vehicle’shandling and performance. It canalso damage the engine anddrivetrain.

CONTINUED

Load Limits

Tongue Load:Total Trailer Weight:

Towing a TrailerD

riving

341

Exceeding any load limit orimproperly loading your vehicleand trailer can cause a crash inwhich you can be seriously hurtor killed.

Check the loading of yourvehicle and trailer carefullybefore starting to drive.

To achieve a proper tongue load,start by loading 60 percent of theload toward the front of the trailerand 40 percent toward the rear, thenre-adjust the load as needed.

The best way to confirm that vehicleand trailer weights are within limitsis to have them checked at a publicscale.

Using a suitable scale or a specialtongue load gauge, check the tongueload the first time you set up atowing combination (a fully-loadedvehicle and trailer), then recheck thetongue load whenever the conditionschange.

The maximum allowable weight ofthe vehicle, all occupants, all cargo,and the tongue load is: 4,980 lbs(2,260 kg)

The maximum allowable weight ofthe vehicle axles are: 2,680 lbs(1,215 kg) on the front axle, and2,380 lbs (1,080 kg) on the rearaxle.

Towing generally requires a varietyof supplemental equipment,depending on the size of your trailer,how much load you are towing, andwhere you tow. To ensure the bestquality, we recommend that youpurchase Acura equipmentwhenever possible.

Discuss your needs with your trailersales or rental agency, and follow theguidelines in the rest of this section.Also make sure that all equipment isproperly installed and maintained,and that it meets federal, state,province, and local regulations.

Any hitch used on your vehicle mustbe properly bolted to the underbody.

Checking Loads Towing Equipment andAccessories

Gross Vehicle Weight Rating(GVWR):

Gross Axle Weight Rating(GAWR):

Towing a Trailer

Hitches

342

Always use safety chains when youtow a trailer. Make sure the chainsare secured to the trailer and hitch,and that they cross under the tongueand can catch the trailer if itbecomes unhitched. Leave enoughslack to allow the trailer to turncorners easily, but do not let thechains drag on the ground.

Acura recommends that any trailerhaving a total weight of 1,000 lbs(450 kg) or more be equipped withits own electric or surge-type brakes.

If you choose electric brakes, besure they are electrically actuated.Do not attempt to tap into yourvehicle’s hydraulic system. Nomatter how successful it may seem,any attempt to attach trailer brakesto your vehicle’s hydraulic systemwill lower braking effectiveness andcreate a potential hazard.

Trailer lights and equipment mustcomply with federal, state, and localregulations. Check with your localrecreational vehicle dealer for therequirements in your area, and useonly equipment designed for yourvehicle.

Since lighting and wiring vary bytrailer type and brand, you shouldhave a qualified technician install asuitable connector between thevehicle and the trailer. Improperequipment or installation can causedamage to your vehicle’s electricalsystem and affect your vehiclewarranty.

Safety Chains Trailer LightsTrailer Brakes

Towing a TrailerD

riving

343

Many states and Canadian provincesrequire special outside mirrors whentowing a trailer. Even if they don’t,you should install special mirrors ifyou cannot clearly see behind you, orif the trailer creates a blind spot.

Ask your trailer sales or rentalagency if any other items arerecommended or required for yourtowing situation.

When preparing to tow, and beforedriving away, be sure to check thefollowing:

The vehicle has been properlyserviced, and the tires, brakes,suspension, cooling system, andlights are in good operatingcondition.

All items in or on the trailer areproperly secured and cannot shiftwhile you drive.

The hitch, safety chains, and anyother attachments are secure.

All weights and loads are withinlimits.

The trailer has been properlyserviced and is in good condition,and the lights and brakes on thetrailer are working properly.

Your vehicle tires and spare areproperly inflated, and the trailertires and spare are inflated asrecommended by the trailermaker.

Additional Towing Equipment Pre-Tow Checklist

Towing a Trailer

344

－－

－－

－－

The added weight, length, andheight of a trailer will affect yourvehicle’s handling and performance,so driving with a trailer requiressome special driving skills andtechniques.

For your safety and the safety ofothers, take time to practice drivingmaneuvers before heading for theopen road, and follow the guidelinesbelow.

When driving uphill and downhill,use the Sequential SportShift modeto provide the proper engine powerand engine braking on each gear.Select fourth, third, second, or firstgear; depending on the vehiclespeeds and road condition. Do notuse fifth gear. The recommendedspeed range for each gear position isshown in the table.

Make turns more slowly and widerthan normal. The trailer tracks asmaller arc than your vehicle, and itcan hit or run over something thevehicle misses. Allow more time anddistance for braking. Do not brake orturn suddenly as this could cause thetrailer to jackknife or turn over.

Drive slower than normal in alldriving situations, and obey postedspeed limits for vehicles with trailers.Use D position when towing a traileron level roads. D is the proper shiftlever position to use when towing atrailer in hilly terrain. (See ‘‘

’’ on the next page foradditional gear information.)

Gear position

1

2

3

4

Speed range

0 19 mph(0 30 km/h)

19 31 mph(30 50 km/h)

31 41 mph(50 65 km/h)

over 41 mph(over 65 km/h)

3

CONTINUED

Driving Safely With a Trailer

Towing Speeds and Gears

Making Turns and Braking

Drivingon Hills

Towing a TrailerD

riving

345

Crosswinds and air turbulencecaused by passing trucks can disruptyour steering and cause trailer tosway. When being passed by a largevehicle, keep a constant speed, andsteer straight ahead. Do not try tomake quick steering or brakingcorrections.

Follow all normal precautions whenparking, including firmly setting theparking brake and putting thetransmission in Park. Also, placewheel chocks at each of the trailer’stires.

When driving down hills, reduceyour speed, and shift down to secondgear. Do not ‘‘ride’’ the brakes, andremember, it will take longer to slowdown and stop when towing a trailer.

If you must stop when facing uphill,use the foot brake or parking brake.Do not try to hold the vehicle inplace by pressing on the accelerator,as this can cause the automatictransmission to overheat.

When climbing hills, closely watchyour temperature gauge. If it nearsthe red (hot) mark, turn the airconditioning off, reduce speed and, ifnecessary, pull to the side of theroad to let the engine cool.

If the automatic transmission shiftsfrequently while going up a hill, shiftto D .

Always drive slowly and havesomeone guide you when backing up.Grip the of the steeringwheel; turn the wheel to the left toget the trailer to move to the left,and turn the wheel right to move thetrailer to the right.

Your vehicle is not designed to betowed behind a motor home. If yourvehicle needs to be towed in anemergency, see page .421

3

bottom

Backing Up

Handling Crosswinds and Buffeting

Parking

Driving on Hills

Towing a Trailer, Towing Your Vehicle

Towing Your Vehicle

346

This section explains why it isimportant to keep your vehicle wellmaintained and how to follow basicmaintenance safety precautions.

This section also includesinstructions on how to read themaintenance messages in the multi-information display, a maintenancerecord, and instructions for simplemaintenance tasks you may want totake care of yourself.

If you have the skills and tools toperform more complex maintenancetasks on your vehicle, you may wantto purchase the service manual. Seepage for information on how toobtain a copy, or see your dealer.

......................Maintenance Safety . 348....................Maintenance Minder . 349....................Maintenance Record . 359

..............................Fluid Locations . 361......Engine Compartment Covers . 362

........................Adding Engine Oil . 363.........Changing the Oil and Filter . 364

..............................Engine Coolant . 366....................Windshield Washers . 368

....Automatic Transmission Fluid . 368....................................Brake Fluid . 369

....................Power Steering Fluid . 370....................................Timing Belt . 371

.............................................Lights . 372................Cleaning the Seat Belts . 379

.....................................Floor Mats . 380.................................Wiper Blades . 381

...............................................Tires . 383...................Checking the Battery . 390

.............................Vehicle Storage . 392

441

MaintenanceM

aintenance

347

To eliminate potential hazards, readthe instructions before you begin,and make sure you have the toolsand skills required.

To clean parts, use a commerciallyavailable degreaser or partscleaner, not gasoline.

Be sure there isadequate ventilation whenever youoperate the engine.

Let theengine and exhaust system coolbefore touching any parts.

Donot run the engine unlessinstructed to do so.

Some of the most important safetyprecautions are given here. However,we cannot warn you of everyconceivable hazard that can arise inperforming maintenance. Only youcan decide whether or not youshould perform a given task.

Make sure your vehicle is parkedon level ground, the parking brakeis set, and the engine is off.

To reduce the possibility of fire orexplosion, keep cigarettes, sparks,and flames away from the batteryand all fuel-related parts.

Wear eye protection andprotective clothing when workingwith the battery or compressed air.

All service items not detailed in thissection should be performed by acertified technician or other qualifiedmechanic.

Maintenance Safety


Potential Vehicle HazardsCarbon Monoxide poison fromengine exhaust.

Burns from hot parts.

Injury from moving parts.

348

Improperly maintaining thisvehicle, or failing to correct aproblem before driving cancause a crash in which you canbe seriously hurt or killed.

Always follow the inspectionand maintenancerecommendations andschedules in this owner’smanual.

Failure to properly followmaintenance instructions andprecautions can cause you tobe seriously hurt or killed.

Always follow the proceduresand precautions in this owner’smanual.

－－－－－－－－－－－－

One of the most convenient andimportant features of the multi-information display on your vehicleis the maintenance minder.

Based on engine operatingconditions and accumulated enginerevolutions, the onboard computer inyour vehicle calculates the remainingengine oil life.

The system also displays the codefor other scheduled maintenanceitems needing service.

To see the remaining engine oil lifedisplayed on the lower right corneron the multi-information display as apercentage, turn the ignition switchto the ON (II) position, and press theSEL/RESET button on the steeringwheel repeatedly until the engine oillife appears (see page ).

The remaining engine oil life isdisplayed according to the tableshown below.

Calculated EngineOil Life (%)

100% 91%90% 81%80% 71%70% 61%60% 51%50% 41%40% 31%30% 21%20% 16%15% 11%10% 6%5% 1%

0%

DisplayedEngine Oil Life

(%)100%90%80%70%60%50%40%30%20%15%10%5%0%

73

CONTINUED

Maintenance Minder

Engine Oil Life

Maintenance

349

REMAINING ENGINE OIL LIFE

▼ ▲▼ ▲

The message will be canceled if theor button on the steering wheel

is pressed. Press the or buttonto see the message again.

When the remaining engine oil life is15 to 6 percent, the multi-informationdisplay shows a ‘‘SERVICE DUESOON’’ message along with themaintenance schedule codeindicating the main and sub itemsrequired at the time of the oil change.Refer to page and for acomplete list of the maintenancemain items and sub items.

Press the SEL/RESET button on thesteering wheel repeatedly to selectthe engine oil life. The message‘‘SERVICE OIL’’ along with thepercentage of oil life remaining andthe maintenance item code, appearon the lower part of the multi-information display.357 358

Maintenance Minder

350

MESSAGE

MAINTENANCECODE

REMAININGENGINE OIL LIFT

MAINTENANCEMAIN ITEM

MAINTENANCESUB ITEMS

▼ ▲▼ ▲

－



When the remaining oil life is 1 to 5percent, the multi-informationdisplay shows a ‘‘SERVICE DUENOW’’ message with the samemaintenance items ‘‘SERVICE DUESOON’’ was displayed with. Whenyou see this message have theindicated maintenance performed assoon as possible.

Press the SEL/RESET button on thesteering wheel repeatedly to selectthe engine oil life. The message‘‘SERVICE OIL’’, along with ‘‘5%’’,and the maintenance item code aredisplayed on the lower part of themulti-information display when thecalculated engine oil life is 1 5percent (see page ).349

CONTINUED

Maintenance MinderM

aintenance

351

▼ ▲

▲ ▼Your dealer will reset the displayafter completing the requiredmaintenance service. You will see‘‘OIL LIFE 100%’’ on the display thenext time you turn the ignitionswitch to the ON (II) position.

Press and hold the SEL/RESETbutton on the steering wheel formore than 10 seconds. Theremaining engine oil life resetmode will be shown on the multi-information display.

If maintenance service is done bysomeone other than your dealer,reset the maintenance minder asfollows:

Turn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position.

To reset the engine oil life, pressthe or button on the steeringwheel to select RESET on thedisplay, and press the SEL/RESET button.

To cancel resetting the oil life,press the or button on thesteering wheel to select CANCELon the display, and press the SEL/RESET button.

If you do not complete the resetprocedure within 30 seconds afterselecting the reset mode, the modewill be canceled automatically.

If you have the required serviceperformed but do not reset thedisplay, or reset the display withoutperforming the service, the systemwill not show the propermaintenance intervals. This can leadto serious mechanical problemsbecause you will no longer have anaccurate record of whenmaintenance is needed.

If the oil life minder is notdisplayed, press the SEL/RESETbutton on the steering wheelrepeatedly until it is.

1.

2.3.

Maintenance Minder

352

U.S.

CANADA

▼ ▲▼ ▲

－

Immediately have the serviceperformed, and make sure to resetthe oil life minder as previouslydescribed.



If the indicated maintenance serviceis not done and the remaining engineoil life reaches 0 %, the multi-information display will show themessage ‘‘SERVICE PAST DUE’’and the maintenance item code. Thismessage is displayed when the totalmileage after reaching 0 % engine oillife is less than 10 miles (for U.S.models)/10 km (for Canadianmodels).

Press the SEL/RESET button on thesteering wheel repeatedly to selectthe engine oil life minder. Themessage ‘‘SERVICE OIL’’, along with‘‘0%’’, and the maintenance item codeare displayed on the lower part of themulti-information display when thecalculated engine oil life is 0 1percent.

CONTINUED

Maintenance MinderM

aintenance

353

▼ ▲▼ ▲

And also, the percentage ‘‘0’’ keepsblinking on the display.

If the indicated required service isnot done and the remaining engineoil life becomes 0 %, the multi-information display will show a‘‘SERVICE PAST DUE’’ message,the total mileage after the remainingoil life became 0 %, and themaintenance item code.

This message is displayed when youdrive over 10 miles (for U.S. models)or 10 km (for Canadian models)after seeing the 0 % message.

Immediately have the serviceperformed, and make sure to resetthe display as previously described.

The maximum total mileage shownwith this message is ‘‘999 mile (forU.S. models) or 999 km (forCanadian models)’’.



This particular message is displayedwhen the mileage after the engine oillife became 0 % reaches 10 miles (forU.S. models)/10 km (for Canadianmodels).

Maintenance Minder

354

MAINTENANCE CODECANADA

U.S.

TOTAL PAST DUE MILEAGE

－－

This particular message is displayedwhen you drive over 10 miles (forU.S. models) or 10 km (for Canadianmodels) after seeing 0 %.

Your authorized dealer knows yourvehicle best and can providecompetent, efficient service.However, service at a dealer is notmandatory to keep your warrantiesin effect. Maintenance may be doneby any qualified service facility orperson who is skilled in this type ofautomotive service. Keep all receiptsas proof of completion, and have theperson who does the work fill out themaintenance record. Check yourwarranty booklet for moreinformation.

We recommend the use of Acuraparts and fluids whenever you havemaintenance done. These aremanufactured to the same high-quality standards as the originalcomponents, so you can be confidentof their performance and durability.

The maximum total negative mileageis ‘‘ 999 mile (for U.S. models) or

999 km (for Canadian models)’’.

When you press the SEL/RESETbutton to select the engine oil lifeminder, the message ‘‘SERVICEOIL’’, along with the maintenanceitem code and the total negativemileage after the oil life became 0percent, will be displayed on thelower part of the multi-informationdisplay.

CONTINUED

Maintenance MinderM

aintenance

355

U.S.

CANADA

TOTAL PAST DUE MILEAGE

－

－

－

－

－

－

＃

You should check the followingitems at the specified intervals. Ifyou are unsure of how to performany check, turn to the appropriatepage listed.

Engine oil level Check everytime you fill the fuel tank. Seepage .

Engine coolant level Check theradiator reserve tank every timeyou fill the fuel tank. See page .

Automatic transmission Checkthe fluid level monthly. See page

.

Brakes Check the fluid levelmonthly. See page .

Tires Check the tire pressuremonthly. Examine the tread forwear and foreign objects. See page

.

Lights Check the operation ofthe headlights, parking lights,taillights, high-mount brake light,and license plate lights monthly.See page .

U.S. Vehicles:

According to state and federalregulations, failure to performmaintenance on the items markedwith will not void your emissionswarranties. However, Acurarecommends that all maintenanceservices be performed in accordancewith the intervals indicated by theMulti-Information Display.

301

366

368

369

383

372

Maintenance Minder

Owner’s Maintenance ChecksMaintenance, replacement, orrepair of emissions controldevices and systems may be doneby any automotive repairestablishment or individual usingparts that are ‘‘certif ied’’ to EPAstandards.

356

＊

＃

＃

＃

＊

CONTINUED

Maintenance Minder

357

:

Maintenance Main ItemsReplace engine oilReplace engine oil and oil filterInspect front and rear brakesCheck parking brake adjustmentVisually inspect these items:

Tie rod ends, steering gear box, and bootsSuspension componentsDriveshaft bootsBrake hoses and line (including ABS)All fluid levels and condition of fluidsExhaust systemFuel lines and connections

AB

Symbol1

If the message ‘‘SERVICE DUE NOW’’ does not appear more than 12 monthsafter the display is reset, change the engine oil every year.

See information on maintenance and emissions warranty in the first columnon page .

Independent of the maintenance messages in the Multi-InformationDisplay, replace the brake fluid every 3 years.Inspect idle speed every 160,000 miles (256,000 km).Adjust the valves during services A, B, 1, 2, or 3 only if they are noisy.

NOTE:

1 :

356

Main

tenance

Min

der

－－

Maintenance Minder

358

Maintenance Sub ItemsReplace rear differential fluid

Driving in mountainous areas at very low vehiclespeeds or trailer towing results in higher level ofmechanical (shear) stress to fluid This requiresdifferential fluid changes more frequently thanrecommended by the Maintenance Minder. If youregularly drive your vehicle under these conditions,have the differential fluid changed at 7,500 miles(12,000 km), then every 15,000 miles (24,000 km).

Maintenance Sub ItemsRotate tiresReplace air cleaner element

If you drive in dusty conditions, replace every 15,000miles (24,000 km).

Replace dust and pollen filterIf you drive primarily in urban areas that have highconcentrations of soot in the air from industry andfrom diesel-powered vehicles, replace every 15,000miles (24,000 km).

Inspect drive beltReplace transmission and transfer fluid

Driving in mountainous areas at very low vehiclespeeds or trailer towing results in highertransmission and transfer temperatures.This requires transmission and transfer fluid changesmore frequently than recommended by theMaintenance Minder. If you regularly drive yourvehicle under these conditions, have the transmissionand transfer fluid changed at 60,000 miles(100,000 km), then every 30,000 miles (48,000 km).

Replace spark plugsReplace timing belt and inspect water pump

If you drive regularly in very high temperatures (over110°F, 43°C), or in very low temperatures (under

20°F, 29°C), replace every 60,000 mile (U.S.)/100,000 km (Canada)

Inspect valve clearanceReplace engine coolant

Symbol12

3

4

5

Symbol6

Main

tenance

Min

der

CONTINUED

Maintenance RecordM

aintenance

359

mi

mi

mi

mi

mi

mi

mi

mi

mi

mi

mi

mi

mi

mi

Mileage

km

km

km

km

km

km

km

Signature

Date

Mileage

km

km

km

km

km

km

km

Signature

Date

MaintenancePerformed

A B 1 2 3 4 5 6

A B 1 2 3 4 5 6

A B 1 2 3 4 5 6

A B 1 2 3 4 5 6

A B 1 2 3 4 5 6

A B 1 2 3 4 5 6

A B 1 2 3 4 5 6


A B 1 2 3 4 5 6

A B 1 2 3 4 5 6

A B 1 2 3 4 5 6

A B 1 2 3 4 5 6

A B 1 2 3 4 5 6

A B 1 2 3 4 5 6

A B 1 2 3 4 5 6

You or the servicing dealer can record all completed maintenance here. When maintenance is performed, record the mileage, circle the coded item(s)completed, and write in any other non-coded items (such as brake fluid replacement) below the codes. Keep the receipts for all work done on yourvehicle. Maintenance can also be recorded in your-Acura maintenance journal.

Maintenance Record

360

mi

mi

mi

mi

mi

mi

mi

mi

mi

mi

mi

mi

mi

mi

Signature

Date

Mileage

km

km

km

km

km

km

km

Mileage

km

km

km

km

km

km

km

Signature

Date


A B 1 2 3 4 5 6

A B 1 2 3 4 5 6

A B 1 2 3 4 5 6

A B 1 2 3 4 5 6

A B 1 2 3 4 5 6

A B 1 2 3 4 5 6

A B 1 2 3 4 5 6


A B 1 2 3 4 5 6

A B 1 2 3 4 5 6

A B 1 2 3 4 5 6

A B 1 2 3 4 5 6

A B 1 2 3 4 5 6

A B 1 2 3 4 5 6

A B 1 2 3 4 5 6

＊

＊: The power steering fluid reservoir is located under the right compartment cover.

Fluid LocationsM

aintenance

361

RADIATOR CAP

ENGINE OILFILL CAP

ENGINE OIL DIPSTICK(Orange loop)

AUTOMATICTRANSMISSIONFLUID DIPSTICK(Yellow loop)

ENGINECOOLANTRESERVOIR

BRAKE FLUID(Black cap)

WASHER FLUID(Black cap)

POWER STEERINGFLUID(Red cap)

The component parts in the enginecompartment are protected byseveral covers. You may need toremove the covers when youperform some simple maintenancework.

All of the covers are secured byholding clips.

To remove the front bulkhead cover,remove the holding clips with a flat-tipped screwdriver.

To remove the left or right enginecompartment cover, remove theholding clips by loosening the pins inthe center of the fastener.

To remove the battery cover, turnthe knob of the fastener (see page

).391

Engine Compartment Covers

362

FRONT BULKHEAD COVER

RIGHT COMPARTMENT COVER LEFT COMPARTMENT COVER

BATTERY COVER

Install the engine oil fill cap, andtighten it securely. Wait a fewminutes, and recheck the oil level.Do not fill above the upper mark; youcould damage the engine.

Oil is major contributor to yourengine’s performance and longevity.Always use a premium-gradedetergent oil displaying the APICertification Seal. This seal indicatesthe oil is energy conserving and thatit meets the American PetroleumInstitute’s latest requirements.

Unscrew and remove the engine oilfill cap on top of the valve cover.Pour in the oil slowly and carefully soyou do not spill any. Clean up anyspills immediately. Spilled oil coulddamage components in the enginecompartment.

Honda Motor Oil is the preferred5W-20 lubricant for your vehicle. It ishighly recommended that you useHonda Motor Oil in your vehicle foroptimum engine protection. Makesure the API Certification Seal says‘‘For Gasoline Engines.’’The oil viscosity or weight isprovided on the container’s label.5W-20 oil is formulated for year-round protection of your vehicle toimprove cold weather starting andfuel economy.

CONTINUED

Recommended Engine Oil

Adding Engine OilM

aintenance

363

API CERTIFICATION SEAL

ENGINE OIL FILL CAP

Ambient Temperature

Your vehicle does not require any oiladditives. Additives may adverselyaffect the engine or transmissionperformance and durability.

Open the hood, and remove theengine oil fill cap. Remove the oildrain bolt and washer from thebottom of the engine. Drain the oilinto an appropriate container.

You may use a synthetic motor oil ifit meets the same requirementsgiven for a conventional motor oil: itdisplays the API Certification Seal,and it is the proper weight. You mustfollow the oil and filter changeintervals given on the maintenanceschedule.

Always change the oil and filteraccording to the maintenancemessages shown on the multi-information display. The oil and filtercollect contaminants that candamage your engine if they are notremoved regularly.

Changing the oil and filter requiresspecial tools and access fromunderneath the vehicle. The vehicleshould be raised on a service station-type hydraulic lift for this service.Unless you have the knowledge andproper equipment, you should havethis maintenance done by a skilledmechanic.

Run the engine until it reachesnormal operating temperature,then shut it off.

1.

2.

Synthetic Oil

Engine Oil Additives

Changing the Oil and Filter

Adding Engine Oil, Changing the Oil and Filter

364

WASHER

OIL DRAIN BOLT

Remove the oil filter, and let theremaining oil drain. A specialwrench (available from yourdealer) is required.

Refill the engine with therecommended oil.Engine oil change capacity(including filter):

Replace the engine oil fill cap.Start the engine. The oil pressureindicator should go out within 5seconds. If it does not, turn off theengine, and check your work.

Let the engine run for severalminutes, then check the drain boltand oil filter for leaks.

Turn off the engine and let it sitfor several minutes, then checkthe oil level on the dipstick. Ifnecessary, add more oil.

Put a new washer on the drain bolt,then reinstall the drain bolt.Tighten the drain bolt to:

Check the oil filter to make sureits gasket did not stick to theengine block. A stuck gasket couldcause an oil leak.

Install a new oil filter according tothe instructions that come with it.

3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

9.

10.

Changing the Oil and FilterM

aintenance

365

OIL FILTER

29 lbf·ft (39 N·m , 4.0 kgf·m)

4.5 US qt (4.3 )

Improper disposal of engine oil can beharmf ul to the environment. If youchange your own oil, please dispose ofthe used oil properly. Put it in a sealedcontainer, and take it to a recyclingcenter. Do not discard it in a trash binor dump it on the ground.

If the coolant level in the reservetank is at or below the MIN line, addcoolant to bring it up to the MAX line.Inspect the cooling system for leaks.

If the reserve tank is completelyempty, you should also check thecoolant level in the radiator.

If Honda antifreeze/coolant is notavailable, you may use anothermajor-brand non-silicate coolant as atemporary replacement. Make sure itis a high-quality coolantrecommended for aluminum engines.Continued use of any non-Hondacoolant can result in corrosion,causing the cooling system tomalfunction or fail. Have the coolingsystem flushed and refilled withHonda antifreeze/coolant as soon aspossible.

Always use Honda Long-life Anti-freeze/Coolant Type 2. This coolantis pre-mixed with 50 percentantifreeze and 50 percent water.Never add straight antifreeze orplain water.

Adding Engine Coolant

Engine Coolant

366

RESERVE TANK

Removing the radiator capwhile the engine is hot cancause the coolant to spray out,seriously scalding you.

Always let the engine andradiator cool down beforeremoving the radiator cap.

The coolant level should be up tothe base of the filler neck. Addcoolant if it is low.

When the radiator and engine arecool, relieve any pressure in thecooling system by turning theradiator cap counterclockwise,without pressing down.

Remove the radiator cap bypushing down and turningcounterclockwise.

Put the radiator cap back on, andtighten it fully.

Pour coolant into the reserve tank.Fill it to halfway between the MAXand MIN marks. Put the cap backon the reserve tank.

Do not add any rust inhibitors orother additives to your vehicle’scooling system. They may not becompatible with the coolant orengine components.

Pour the coolant slowly and carefullyso you do not spill any. Clean up anyspill immediately; it could damagecomponents in the enginecompartment.

3.1.

2.

4.

5.

Engine CoolantM

aintenance

367

RADIATOR CAP

RESERVE TANK

Check the fluid level in thewindshield washer reservoir at leastmonthly during normal use.

Check the fluid level with the engineat normal operating temperature.

Park the vehicle on level ground.Shut off the engine.

Remove the dipstick (yellow loop)from the transmission, and wipe itwith a clean cloth.

Fill the reservoir with a good-qualitywindshield washer fluid. Thisincreases the cleaning capability andprevents freezing in cold weather.When you refill the reservoir, cleanthe edges of the windshield wiperblades with windshield washer fluidon a clean cloth. This will help tocondition them.

If the washer fluid is low, a‘‘WASHER FLUID LOW’’ messageappears on the multi-informationdisplay.

Insert the dipstick all the way intothe transmission as shown.

Remove the dipstick and checkthe fluid level. It should bebetween the upper and lowermarks.

1.

2.

3.

4.

Windshield Washers Automatic Transmission Fluid

Windshield Washers, Automatic Transmission Fluid

368

NOTICE:

UPPER MARKLOWER MARK

DIPSTICK

Do not use engine antif reezeor a vinegar/water solution in thewindshield washer reservoir. Antif reezecan damage your vehicle’s paint, whilea vinegar/water solution can damagethe windshield washer pump. Use onlycommercially-available windshieldwasher f luid.

Check the brake fluid level in thereservoirs monthly.

Replace the brake fluid every 3 years,independent of mileage.

If the level is below the lowermark, add fluid into the dipsticktube to bring it to the upper mark.

Pour the fluid slowly and carefullyso you do not spill any. Clean upany spill immediately; it coulddamage components in the enginecompartment.

Insert the dipstick all the way backinto the transmission securely asshown in the illustration.

The transmission should be drainedand refilled with new fluid when thisservice is shown on a maintenancemessage in the multi-informationdisplay.

If you are not sure how to add fluid,contact your dealer.

Always use Honda ATF-Z1(automatic transmission fluid). Ifit’s not available, you may use aDEXRON III automatictransmission fluid as a temporaryreplacement. However, continueduse can affect the shift quality.Have the transmission flushed andrefilled with Honda ATF-Z1 assoon as it is convenient.

Always use Honda Heavy DutyBrake Fluid DOT 3. If it is notavailable, you should use only DOT 3or DOT 4 fluid, from a sealedcontainer, as a temporaryreplacement.

Brake fluid marked DOT 5 is notcompatible with your vehicle’sbraking system and can causeextensive damage.

Using any non-Honda brake fluid cancause corrosion and decrease the lifeof the system. Have the brakesystem flushed and refilled withHonda Heavy Duty Brake FluidDOT 3 as soon as possible.

5. 6.

CONTINUED

Brake Fluid

Automatic Transmission Fluid, Brake FluidM

aintenance

369

The fluid level should be betweenthe MIN and MAX marks on the sideof the reservoir. If the level is at orbelow the MIN mark, your brakesystem needs attention. Have thebrake system inspected for leaks orworn brake pads.

After removing the right enginecompartment cover (see page ),check the level on the side of thereservoir when the engine is cold.The fluid should be between theUPPER LEVEL and LOWER LEVEL.If not, add power steering fluid to theUPPER LEVEL mark.

Pour the fluid slowly and carefully soyou do not spill any. Clean up anyspill immediately; it could damagecomponents in the enginecompartment.

A low power steering fluid level canindicate a leak in the system. Checkthe fluid level frequently, and havethe system inspected as soon aspossible.

Always use Honda Power SteeringFluid. You may use another powersteering fluid as an emergencyreplacement, but have the powersteering system flushed and refilledwith Honda PSF as soon as possible.

362

Power Steering Fluid

Brake Fluid, Power Steering Fluid

370

MAX MIN

UPPER LEVEL

LOWER LEVEL

－－

In very high temperatures(over 110°F, 43°C).

In very low temperatures(under 20°F, 29°C).

If you frequently tow a trailer.

The timing belt should be replacedat the intervals shown on themaintenance minder. Replace thebelt at 60,000 miles (100,000 km) ifyou regularly drive your vehicle inone or more of these conditions:

Power Steering Fluid, Timing Belt

Timing Belt

Maintenance

371

Turning the steering wheel to f ull lef tor right lock and holding it there candamage the power steering pump.

The low beam headlight bulbs are atype of high voltage discharge tube.High voltage can remain in thecircuit even with the light switch offand the key removed. Because ofthis, you should not attempt toexamine or change a low beamheadlight bulb yourself. If a lowbeam headlight bulb fails, take thevehicle to your dealer to have itreplaced.

Your vehicle has halogen high beamheadlight bulbs which are also usedfor the daytime running light.Handle it by its base and protect theglass from contact with your skin orhard objects. If you touch the glass,clean it with denatured alcohol and aclean cloth.

Your vehicle is equipped with anautomatic headlight adjustingsystem that adjusts the vertical aimof the low beam headlightsautomatically. Refer to page formore information.The high beam headlights wereproperly aimed when your vehiclewas new. If you regularly carryheavy items in the trunk or pull atrailer, readjustment may berequired. Adjustment of the highbeam headlights should beperformed by a dealer or othermechanic.

140

Lights

Headlight Aiming Replacing a Headlight/DaytimeRunning Light Bulb

372

Halogen bulbs get very hot when lit. Oil,perspiration, or a scratch on the glasscan cause the bulb to overheat andshatter.

CONTINUED

Remove the electrical connectorfrom the bulb by pushing on thetab and pulling the connectordown.

Remove the bulb by turning it one-quarter turn counterclockwise.

Remove the left or right sideengine compartment cover fromthe side you are working on bycarefully pulling the cover out (seepage ).

If you are replacing the bulb onthe driver’s side, remove thebattery cover (see page ), thenremove the battery hold-down byremoving the two nuts with a 10mm wrench. Then carefully slidethe battery toward the engine toaccess the bulb.

2.

3.

1.

362

391

LightsM

aintenance

373

NUTS BULB

BATTERY HOLD-DOWN

Insert the new bulb into the hole,and turn it one-quarter turnclockwise to lock it in place.

Turn on the headlights to test thenew bulb.

(Driver’s side)

Reinstall the engine compartmentside cover.

Push the electrical connector backonto the bulb. Make sure it is onall the way.

Remove the socket from theheadlight assembly by turning itone-quarter turn counterclockwise.

Push the bulb in slightly, and turnit counterclockwise.

Reinstall the battery in the reverseorder of removal, and reinstall thecover on the battery.

Remove the left or right sideengine compartment cover fromthe side you are working on bycarefully pulling the cover out (seepage ).

If you are replacing a driver’s sidebulb, slide the battery toward theengine to get more clearance (seepage ).

2.

1.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.3.

362

391

Lights

Replacing a Front Turn SignalBulb

374

SOCKETBULB

Install the new bulb into thesocket.

Insert the socket back into theheadlight assembly. Turn itclockwise to lock it in place.

Turn on the lights to make surethe new bulb is working.

(Driver’s side)

Remove the socket from theheadlight assembly by turning itone-quarter turn counterclockwise.

Pull the bulb straight out of itssocket.

Remove the left or right sideengine compartment cover (seepage ).

(Passenger’s side)Use a flat-tipped screwdriver toremove the holding clip from thewindshield washer reservoir.

If you are replacing a driver’s sidebulb, slide the battery toward theengine to get more clearance (seepage ).

Reinstall the battery and thebattery cover.


1.

2.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.3.

4.

362

391

CONTINUED

Lights

Replacing a Front Position/SideMarker Light Bulb

Maintenance

375

BULB

HOLDING CLIP

Use a Phillips-head screwdriver toremove the two mounting boltsand remove the holding clip with aflat-tipped screwdriver.

Carefully push up the side undercover into the bumper.

Your vehicle uses halogen lightbulbs. When replacing a bulb, handleit by its plastic case, and protect theglass from contact with your skin orhard objects. If you touch the glass,clean it with denatured alcohol and aclean cloth.

Install the new bulb into thesocket.

Insert the socket back into theheadlight assembly. Turn itclockwise to lock it in place.

Turn on the lights to make surethe new bulb is working.

(Driver’s side)Reinstall the battery and thebattery cover.

Reinstall the windshield washerreservoir.

(Passenger’s side)


1.

2.

5.

6.

7.

8.

9.

Lights

Replacing a Front Fog Light Bulb

376

BOLTS

CLIPHalogen bulbs get very hot when lit. Oil,perspiration, or a scratch on the glasscan cause the bulb to overheat andshatter.

Remove the electrical connectorfrom the bulb by pushing on thetab and pulling the connectordown.

Remove the bulb by turning it one-quarter turn counterclockwise.

Insert the new bulb into the hole,and turn it one-quarter turnclockwise to lock it in place.

Push the electrical connector backonto the bulb. Make sure it is onall the way.

Turn on the fog lights to test thenew bulb.

Reinstall the two mounting boltson the side under cover andtighten them securely. Put theholding clip back on the sideunder cover and push on thecenter until it locks (the center isflush with the head).

3.

4.

5.

6.

8.

7.

LightsM

aintenance

377

BULB

Determine which of the two bulbsis burned out: turn signal or back-up light.

Remove the socket by turning itone-quarter turn counterclockwise.

Remove the burned out bulb bypulling it straight out of its socket.

Open the trunk lid, and removethe left or right maintenance lid.

Remove the mounting nut with an8 mm wrench.

Carefully pry in the top or bottomedge of the trim with a small flat-tipped screwdriver, and pull thetrim straight back.

Remove the two mounting boltswith an 8 mm wrench.

Pull the taillight assembly straightback out of the body.

2.

1. 3.

4.

5.

6.

7.

8.

Lights

Replacing Rear Bulbs

378

MOUNTING NUT

MAINTENANCE LID

BOLTS

BULBS

TAIL LIGHT TRIM

Dirt build-up in the loops of the seatbelt anchors can cause the belts toretract slowly. Wipe the insides ofthe loops with a clean clothdampened in mild soap and warmwater or isopropyl alcohol.

If your seat belts get dirty, use a softbrush with a mixture of mild soapand warm water to clean them. Donot use bleach, dye, or cleaningsolvents. Let the belts air-dry beforeyou use the vehicle.

Install the new bulb in the socketby pushing it straight in the socketuntil it bottoms.

Reinstall the socket into the lightassembly. Turn it clockwise tolock it in place.

Test the lights to make sure thenew bulb is working.

Tighten the mounting nut securely,and reinstall the maintenance lid.

When reinstalling the taillightassembly, align and pop the snapfasteners in place. Tighten the twomounting bolts and reinstall thetrim in place.

9.

10.

11.

12.

13.

Cleaning the Seat Belts

Lights, Cleaning the Seat BeltsM

aintenance

379

LOOP

Make sure the rear floor mats areproperly hooked to the floor matanchors. Your vehicle is equippedwith front passenger’s seat weightsensors. If the rear passenger’s floormat is on the seat rail of the frontpassenger’s seat, the sensors willdetect the decreased weight on theseat, and they may not work properly.

If you use a non-Acura floor mat,make sure it fits properly and that itcan be used with the floor matanchors. Do not put additional floormats on top of the anchored mats.

If you remove a floor mat, make sureto re-anchor it when you put it backin your vehicle.

The floor mats that came with yourvehicle hook over floor mat anchors.This keeps the floor mats fromsliding forward/rearward andpossibly interfering with the pedalsor making the front passenger’sweight sensors ineffective.

Floor Mats

Floor Mats

380

HOOK HOOK

HOOKFront

FrontFront

DRIVER’S SIDE FLOOR MAT FRONT PASSENGER’SSIDE FLOOR MAT

REAR PASSENGER’S FLOOR MAT

Push the edge of the cover on theblade assembly until the other sideof edge is pivoted out, and removethe cover.

Disconnect the blade assemblyfrom the wiper arm by removingthe two screws from the arm.

Adjust the windshield wiper armsto the winter position by holdingboth wiper arms as shown in theillustration at the same time (seepage ). Raise the wiper armsoff the windshield.

Check the condition of the wiperblades at least every 6 months.Replace them if you find signs ofcracking in the rubber, areas that aregetting hard, or if they leave streaksand unwiped areas when used.

2.1.

3.135

Wiper BladesM

aintenance

381

COVER

SCREWSWIPER ARMS

HOLDING LOCATIONS

Do not open the hood when the wiperarms are raised, or you will damagethe hood and the wiper arms.

Remove the blade from its holderby grasping the tabbed end of theblade. Pull firmly until the tabscome out of the holder.

Examine the new wiper blades. Ifthey have no plastic or metalreinforcement along the backedge, remove the metalreinforcement strips from the oldwiper blade, and install them inthe slots along the edge of the newblade.

Slide the new wiper blade into theholder until the tabs lock.

Reinstall the blade assembly to thewiper arm and tighten the twoscrews securely. Reinstall thecover by pushing in.

Set the wiper arms back on thewindshield. Adjust the windshieldwipers to their previously parkedposition.

4. 5.

6.

7.

8.

Wiper Blades

382

BLADE BLADE

REINFORCEMENT

CONTINUED

To safely operate your vehicle, yourtires must be the proper type andsize, in good condition with adequatetread, and correctly inflated.

Keeping the tires properly inflatedprovides the best combination ofhandling, tread life, and ridingcomfort.

Underinflated tires wear unevenly,adversely affect handling and fueleconomy, and are more likely tofail from being overheated.

Overinflated tires can make yourvehicle ride more harshly, aremore prone to damage from roadhazards, and wear unevenly.

The following pages give moredetailed information on how to takecare of your tires and what to dowhen they need to be replaced.

Check the pressure in the tires whenthey are cold. This means the vehiclehas been parked for at least threehours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6km).

Use a gauge to measure the airpressure in each tire at least once amonth. Even tires that are in goodcondition may lose one to two psi (10to 20 kPa, 0.1 to 0.2 kgf/cm ) permonth. Remember to check thespare tire at the same time.

We recommend that you visuallycheck your tires every day. If youthink a tire might be low, check itimmediately with a tire gauge.

The tire pressure monitoring system(TPMS) will warn you when a tirepressure is low. See page forinformation on the TPMS. Add or release air, if needed, to

match the recommended cold tirepressures on page .384

335

Tires

Inflation Guidelines

Maintenance

383

Using tires that are excessivelyworn or improperly inflated cancause a crash in which you canbe seriously hurt or killed.

Follow all instructions in thisowner’s manual regarding tireinflation and maintenance.

Cold Tire PressureFront

Rear

Cold Tire Pressure forNormal Driving

Tire Size

Tire Size/Type

Compact Spare

Front:

Rear:

This chart shows the recommendedcold tire pressures for most normaland high speed driving conditions.

Excessive tread wear.

Cuts, splits, or cracks in the sideof the tire. Replace the tire if youcan see fabric or cord.

Bumps or bulges in the tread orside of the tire. Replace the tire ifyou find either of these conditions.

Every time you check inflation, youshould also examine the tires fordamage, foreign objects, and wear.

You should look for:

For convenience, the recommendedtire sizes and cold tire pressures areon a label on the driver’s doorjamb.

For additional technical informationabout your tires, see page .

If you check the pressure when thetires are hot [driven for several miles(kilometers)], you will see readings 4to 6 psi (30 to 40 kPa, 0.3 to0.4 kgf/cm ) higher than the coldreading. This is normal; do notrelease air to match the coldpressure. The tires will beunderinflated.

You should get your own tirepressure gauge and use it wheneveryou check your tire pressures. Thiswill make it easier for you to tell if apressure loss is due to a tire problemand not due to a variation betweengauges.

While tubeless tires have someability to self-seal if they arepunctured, you should look closelyfor punctures if a tire starts losingpressure.

427

On models with the Michelin PAXsystem

Tires

Recommended Tire Pressures

Tire Inspection

384

T155/70D17110M

P245/50R17 98V32 psi (220 kPa , 2.2 kgf/cm )

30 psi (210 kPa , 2.1 kgf/cm )60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )

32 psi (220 kPa ,2.2 kgf/cm )30 psi (210 kPa ,2.1 kgf/cm )

245-680R460A102V

In addition to proper inflation,correct wheel alignment helps todecrease tire wear. If you find a tireis worn unevenly, have your dealercheck the wheel alignment.

Have your dealer check the tires ifyou feel a consistent vibration whiledriving. A tire should always berebalanced if it is removed from thewheel. When you have new tiresinstalled, make sure they arebalanced. This increases ridingcomfort and tire life. For best results,have the installer perform a dynamicbalance.

To help increase tire life anddistribute wear more evenly, rotatethe tires every 7,500 miles (12,000km). Move the tires to the positionsshown in the chart each time theyare rotated. If you purchasedirectional tires, rotate only front-to-back.

Your tires have wear indicatorsmolded into the tread. When thetread wears down, you will see aband 1/2 inch (12.7 mm) wide acrossthe tread. This shows there is lessthan 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of tread lefton the tire.

A tire this worn gives very littletraction on wet roads. You shouldreplace the tire if you can see threeor more tread wear indicators.

When the tires are rotated, makesure the air pressures are checked.

Tires

Tire Maintenance Tire Rotation

Maintenance

385

INDICATOR LOCATION MARKS

TREAD WEAR INDICATORS

Front Front

(For DirectionalTires and Wheels)

(For Non-directionalTires and Wheels)

Improper wheel weights can damageyour vehicle’s aluminum wheels. Useonly Acura wheel weights f or balancing.

It is best to replace all four tires atthe same time. If that is not possibleor necessary, replace the two fronttires or two rear tires as a pair.Replacing just one tire can seriouslyaffect your vehicle’s handling.

Wheels:Replace your tires with radial tires ofthe same size, load range, speedrating, and maximum cold tirepressure rating (as shown on thetire’s sidewall).

Mixing radial and bias-ply tires onyour vehicle can reduce brakingability, traction, and steeringaccuracy. Using tires of a differentsize or construction can cause theABS and vehicle stability assistsystem (VSA) to work inconsistently.

If you ever need to replace a wheel,make sure the wheel’s specificationsmatch those of the original wheelthat came on your vehicle.Replacement wheels are available atyour Acura dealer.

Tires:

See page for DOT tire qualitygrading information, and page

for tire size explanation.430

428



Tires

Replacing Tires and Wheels Wheels and Tires

386

17 x 8.0J AL (TPMS)

P245/50R17 98V

245-680R460A 102V

235 x 460A (TPMS)

Installing improper tires on yourvehicle can affect handling andstability. This can cause a crashin which you can be seriouslyhurt or killed.

Always use the size and type oftires recommended in thisowner’s manual.

＋Tires marked ‘‘M S’’ or ‘‘AllSeason’’ on the sidewall have an all-weather tread design suitable formost winter driving conditions.

For the best performance in snowyor icy conditions, you should installsnow tires or tire chains. They maybe required by local laws undercertain conditions.

Mount tire chains on your tires whenrequired by driving conditions orlocal laws. Install them only on thefront tires.

If you mount snow tires on yourvehicle, make sure they are radialtires of the same size and load rangeas original tires. Mount snow tires onall four wheels. The tractionprovided by snow tires on dry roadsmay be lower than your original tires.Check with the tire dealer formaximum speed recommendations.

Because your vehicle has limited tireclearance, Acura stronglyrecommends using the chain listedbelow, made by Security ChainCompany (SCC).

Tire chains cannot be used with aflat front tire. If a front tire goes flatwhen a tire chain is installed on it,remove the chain, and follow theprecautions described underMichelin PAX System (see page

).

Cable-type: SCC Radial ChainCH2612T

389

CONTINUED

Tires

Winter Driving Tire ChainsSnow Tires

Maintenance

387

When installing cables, follow themanufacturer’s instructions, andmount them as tight as you can.Make sure they are not contactingthe brake lines or suspension. Driveslowly with them installed. If youhear them coming into contact withthe body or chassis, stop andinvestigate. Remove them as soon asyou begin driving on cleared roads.

Your vehicle is not designed forMichelin PAX system wheels or tires.Use only the wheels and tiresdesignated in this owner’s manual.Never mix conventional wheels ortires with PAX system wheels ortires.

Vehicles without the Michelin PAXSystem

Tires

388

Using the wrong chains, or notproperly installing chains, candamage the brake lines andcause a crash in which you canbe seriously injured or killed.

Follow all instructions in thisowner’s manual regarding theselection and use of tire chains.

Traction devices that are the wrongsize or improperly installed candamage your vehicle’s brake lines,suspension, body, and wheels. Stopdriving if they are hitting any part ofthe vehicle.

There are no snow tires compatiblewith the PAX system, and not all tirechains are suitable for use on thePAX system tires. To prevent tirechain damage to your PAX systemtire or wheel, ensure that no part ofthe chain contacts the PAX system.

If you must continue driving with aflat tire, follow all the proceduresand precautions described on page

.

Never use a tire repair agent in aPAX system tire, and never repaira PAX system tire by yourself.Repair or replacement must bedone by an Acura dealer or anauthorized Michelin PAX systemdealer.

If you mount snow chains on youtires, use the chains recommendedby Acura (see page ).

Do not replace the PAX system tiresand wheels with conventional tiresand wheels. Doing so would disablethe PAX system and the tirepressure monitoring system (TPMS),and may void your new vehiclewarranty.

Your vehicle is equipped with theMichelin PAX System which,together with the tire pressuremonitoring system (TPMS), enablesyou to continue driving even if one ormore of your tires loses its pressure.

The tires and wheels on your vehicleare specially designed for the PAXsystem, and the PAX system isspecifically designed and fine-tunedfor your vehicle.

Because of these reasons, use onlythe wheels and tires designated inthis owner’s manual. Never mix PAXsystem wheels or tires withconventional wheels or tires.

387

394

If equipped

Tires

Michelin PAX System Important Precautions

Maintenance

389

－

Check the condition of the batterymonthly by looking at the testindicator window. The label on thebattery explains the test indicator’scolors.

Battery posts,terminals, and related accessoriescontain lead and lead compounds.

Check the terminals for corrosion (awhite or yellowish powder). Toremove it, cover the terminals with asolution of baking soda and water. Itwill bubble up and turn brown. Whenthis stops, wash it off with plainwater. Dry off the battery with acloth or paper towel. Coat theterminals with grease to help preventfuture corrosion.

If additional battery maintenance isneeded, see your dealer or aqualified technician.

If you need to connect the battery toa charger, disconnect both cables toprevent damaging your vehicle’selectrical system. Always disconnectthe negative ( ) cable first, andreconnect it last.

To see the label, remove the batterycover (see page ).391

WARNING:

Wash your hands after handling.

Checking the Battery

390

TEST INDICATOR WINDOW

The battery gives off explosivehydrogen gas during normaloperation.

A spark or flame can cause thebattery to explode with enoughforce to kill or seriously hurt you.

Wear protective clothing and aface shield, or have a skilledmechanic do the batterymaintenance.

If your vehicle’s battery isdisconnected or goes dead, all storeddriving positions will be lost. Tostore the driving positions again, seethe storing procedure on page .

The navigation system will alsodisable itself. The next time you turnon the ignition switch, the systemwill require you to enter a PINbefore it can be used. Refer to thenavigation system manual.

Push the tabs and remove thecover by pulling it up carefully.

To reinstall the cover, put the tabsof the cover back to the originalposition properly.

Turn the knob of the cover toLOCK position as showing in theillustration.

If your vehicle’s battery isdisconnected or goes dead, the audiosystem will disable itself. The nexttime you turn on the radio you willsee ‘‘ ’’ in the frequencydisplay. Use the preset buttons toenter the five-digit code (see page

).

If your vehicle’s battery isdisconnected or goes dead, thepower tilt and telescopic steering

wheel system will be disabled. Thesystem needs to be reset afterreconnecting the battery (see page

).

Turn the knob of the battery coverto UNLOCK as shown in theillustration.

1.

2.

3.

4.

232

156144

On vehicles with navigation system

Checking the Battery

Removing the Battery Cover

Maintenance

391

KNOBTAB

LOCKUNLOCK

If you need to park your vehicle foran extended period (more than 1month), there are several things youshould do to prepare it for storage.Proper preparation helps preventdeterioration and makes it easier toget your vehicle back on the road. Ifpossible, store your vehicle indoors.

Fill the fuel tank.

Change the engine oil and filter.

Block the rear wheels.

If the vehicle is to be stored for alonger period, it should besupported on jackstands so thetires are off the ground.

Leave one window open slightly (ifthe vehicle is being storedindoors).

Disconnect the battery.

Support the front wiper bladearms with a folded towel or rag sothey do not touch the windshield.

To minimize sticking, apply asilicone spray lubricant to all doorand trunk seals. Also, apply avehicle body wax to the paintedsurfaces that mate with the doorand trunk seals.

Cover the vehicle with a‘‘breathable’’ cover, one madefrom a porous material such ascotton. Non-porous materials, suchas plastic sheeting, trap moisture,which can damage the paint.

If possible, periodically run theengine until it reaches fulloperating temperature (thecooling fans cycle on and offtwice). Preferably, do this once amonth.

Wash and dry the exteriorcompletely.

Clean the interior. Make sure thecarpeting, floor mats, etc., arecompletely dry.

Leave the parking brake off. Putthe transmission in Park.

Vehicle Storage

392

This section covers the morecommon problems that motoristsexperience with their vehicles. Itgives you information about how tosafely evaluate the problem and whatto do to correct it. If the problem hasstranded you on the side of the road,you may be able to get going again.If not, you will also find instructionson getting your vehicle towed.

...............Driving with a Flat Tire . 394......................Compact Spare Tire . 397....................Changing a Flat Tire . 398

.............If the Engine Won’t Start . 402................................Jump Starting . 403

..............If the Engine Overheats . 406.........Low Oil Pressure Indicator . 409..........Charging System Indicator . 409

.......Malfunction Indicator Lamp . 410...............Brake System Indicator . 411

Opening the Fuel Fill Door....................................Manually . 412

..............................................Fuses . 413..............................Fuse Locations . 418

......................Emergency Towing . 421..........If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck . 421

Taking Care of the UnexpectedTaking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

393

Your vehicle is equipped with theMichelin PAX system. Since eachMichelin PAX system tire has aninner support ring that allows it tocontinue running without air, it maybe difficult to immediately judgefrom its appearance if a tire ispunctured. Your vehicle is alsoequipped with a tire pressuremonitoring system (TPMS), and thissystem may be your first detection ofa flat tire.

If the indicator and the messagecome on again, you probably have aflat tire. In this case, you will see a‘‘PAX SYSTEM WARNING’’message on the multi-informationdisplay.

The TPMS monitors the air pressureof all four tires whenever the ignitionswitch is in the ON (II) position. Itwill immediately sense if a tire startsto lose its pressure, and give youwarning with the low tire pressureindicator in the instrument panel anda ‘‘CHECK TIRE PRESSURE’’message on the multi-informationdisplay. If the indicator and thewarning message do not come onagain after you inflate the tire to itscorrect air pressure (see page ),

it was probably a natural loss of theair pressure and you can continuedriving as before.

384

If equipped

Driving With a Flat Tire

Michelin PAX System

394

If you get a flat tire, never try torepair it yourself, and never replace aflat tire with a compact spare tire.

With the PAX system tires, you candrive up to about 125 miles (200 km)even if one or more of your tires arepunctured. This allows you to driveto the nearest Acura dealer orauthorized Michelin PAX systemdealer to have the tire(s) repaired.

The above message shows that youare driving your vehicle on a flat tire,and should observe the ‘‘RUN FLATDRIVING’’ speed limit of 50 mph(80 km/h). Drive to your nearestAcura dealer or authorized MichelinPAX system dealer, or call the PAXhelp hotline at 1-877-PAXTIRE(1-877-729-8473).

If the display changes to the abovemessage, it means that ‘‘RUN FLATDRIVING’’ is nearing the limit, andyou have to stop driving soon. Takeyour vehicle to the nearest Acuradealer or authorized Michelin PAXsystem dealer as soon as possible.

Follow the instructions shown on themulti-information display, and drivevery carefully.

CONTINUED

Driving With a Flat TireTaking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

395

If you see the above message on themulti-information display, you havereached the limit of run flat driving,and you should stop drivingimmediately. Be aware that if youcontinue to drive, the noise andvibration level from the tire willincrease significantly, and the tiremay no longer be repairable.

Stop driving immediately whenyou see a ‘‘RUN FLAT LIMITSTOP DRIVING’’ message on themulti-information display.Continuous driving after thismessage will make it impossible torepair the tire.

Call a professional towing servicewho can transport your vehicle onflat-bed equipment. Never tow your

vehicle behind another vehicle with arope or chain. Flat-bed equipment isthe only way to transport yourvehicle.

Do not drive faster than 50 mph(80 km/h).

Drive carefully. Your vehicle mayhandle differently from when thetires are properly inflated,especially when cornering.

In its run flat mode, a PAX systemtire is somewhat noisier than whenit is fully inflated, this is normal.

Although your vehicle is capable ofrun flat driving, you should alwaysobserve the following: If you cannot find an Acura dealer or

an authorized Michelin PAX systemdealer where you are driving, call thePAX help hotline at 1-877-PAXTIRE(1-877-729-8473).

Driving With a Flat Tire


396

Use the compact spare tire as atemporary replacement only. Getyour regular tire repaired or replaced,and put it back on your vehicle assoon as you can.

Check the inflation pressure of thecompact spare tire every time youcheck the other tires. It should beinflated to:

Follow these precautions:

Never exceed 50 mph (80 km/h).

This tire gives a harsher ride andless traction on some road sur-faces. Use greater caution whiledriving.

Do not mount snow chains on thecompact spare tire.

Do not use your compact sparetire on another vehicle unless it isthe same make and model.

Turn off the VSA system (seepage ). Driving with thecompact spare tire may activatethe VSA system.

Replace the tire when you can seethe tread wear indicator bars. Thereplacement should be the same sizeand design tire, mounted on thesame wheel. The spare tire is notdesigned to be mounted on a regularwheel, and the spare wheel is notdesigned for mounting a regular tire.

340

Compact Spare TireTaking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

397

INDICATOR LOCATION MARKS

TREAD WEAR INDICATORS60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )

Park the vehicle on firm, level, andnon-slippery ground. Put thetransmission in Park. Apply theparking brake. Take the tool case out of the spare

tire.Turn on the hazard warning lights,and turn the ignition switch to theLOCK (0) position. Have allpassengers get out of the vehiclewhile you change the tire.

Open the trunk, and fold the trunkfloor forward.

Unscrew the wing bolt, andremove the spacer cone. Thentake the spare tire out of its well.

If you have a flat tire while driving,stop in a safe place to change it.Drive slowly along the shoulder untilyou get to an exit or an area to stopthat is far away from the traffic lanes.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

Models without Michelin PAX System

Changing a Flat Tire

398

SPARE TIRETRUNK FLOOR

TOOL CASE JACK

The vehicle can easily roll offthe jack, seriously injuringanyone underneath.

Follow the directions forchanging a tire exactly, andnever get under the vehiclewhen it is supported only by thejack.

△

Use the extension and the wheelnut wrench as shown to raise thevehicle until the flat tire is off theground.

Remove the wheel nuts, thenremove the flat tire. Temporarilyplace the flat tire on the groundwith the outside surface of thewheel facing up. You could scratchthe wheel if you put it face down.

Loosen each wheel nut 1/2 turnwith the wheel nut wrench.

Place the jack under the jackingpoint nearest the tire you need tochange. It is pointed to by amark molded into the underside ofthe body. Turn the end bracketclockwise until the top of the jackcontacts the jacking point. Makesure the jacking point tab isresting in the jack notch.

6. 7. 8.

9.

CONTINUED

Changing a Flat TireTaking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

399

WHEEL NUT WRENCH

WHEEL NUT WRENCH

EXTENSION

Before mounting the spare tire,wipe any dirt off the mountingsurface of the wheel and hub witha clean cloth. Wipe the hubcarefully; it may be hot fromdriving.

Put on the spare tire. Put thewheel nuts back on finger-tight,then tighten them in a crisscrosspattern with the wheel nut wrenchuntil the wheel is firmly againstthe hub. Do not try to tightenthem fully.

Lower the vehicle to the ground,and remove the jack.

10. 11. 12.

Changing a Flat Tire

400

BRAKE HUB

Store the jack and tools in the toolcase. Place the tool case in the flattire.

Tighten the wheel nuts securely inthe same crisscross pattern. Havethe wheel nut torque checked atthe nearest automotive servicefacility.Tighten the wheel nuts to:

Place the flat tire face down in thespare tire well.

Wrap the spacer cone and sparetire wing bolt with cloth or paper,and store them in the spare tirewell.

14.13.

15.

16.

Changing a Flat TireTaking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

401

SPACER CONE

WING BOLT

94 lbf·ft (127 N·m , 13 kgf·m)

Loose items can fly around theinterior in a crash and couldseriously injure the occupants.

Store the wheel, jack, and toolssecurely before driving.

You hear nothing, or almostnothing. The engine’s startermotor does not operate at all, oroperates very slowly.

You can hear the starter motoroperating normally, or the startermotor sounds like it is spinningfaster than normal, but the enginedoes not start up and run.

When you turn the ignition switch tothe START (III) position, you do nothear the normal noise of the enginetrying to start. You may hear aclicking sound or series of clicks, ornothing at all.

Turn the ignition switch to theSTART (III) position. If theheadlights do not dim, check thecondition of the fuses. If the fusesare OK, there is probablysomething wrong with theelectrical circuit for the ignitionswitch or starter motor. You willneed a qualified technician todetermine the problem (see

on page ).

If the headlights dim noticeably orgo out when you try to start theengine, either the battery isdischarged or the connections arecorroded. Check the condition ofthe battery and terminalconnections (see page ). Youcan then try jump starting thevehicle from a booster battery(see page ).

Diagnosing why the engine won’tstart falls into two areas, dependingon what you hear when you turn theignition switch to the START (III)position:

Check these things:

Turn the ignition switch to the ON(II) position. Turn on theheadlights, and check theirbrightness. If the headlights arevery dim or do not come on at all,the battery is discharged. See

on page .

Check the transmission interlock.The transmission must be in Parkor neutral or the starter will notoperate.

Make sure the remote is with you,inside the vehicle.

390

421

403

403

Nothing Happens or the StarterMotor Operates Very Slowly

Emergency Towing

Jump Starting

If the Engine Won’t Start

402

In this case, the starter motor’sspeed sounds normal, or even fasterthan normal, when you turn theignition switch to the START (III)position, but the engine does not run.

Are you using the proper startingprocedure? Refer to

on page .

There may be an electricalproblem, such as no power to thefuel pump. Check all the fuses(see page ).

If you find nothing wrong, you willneed a qualified technician to findthe problem. See

on page .

Are you using a properly codedbuilt-in key or remote? Animproperly coded built-in key orremote will cause the immobilizersystem indicator in the instrumentpanel to blink rapidly (see page

).

Do you have fuel? Check the fuelgauge; the low fuel indicator maynot be working.

Although this seems like a simpleprocedure, you should take severalprecautions.

You cannot start your vehicle bypushing or pulling it.

311

64

415

421

The Starter Operates Normally

Starting theEngine

EmergencyTowing

Jump Starting

If the Engine Won’t Start, Jump StartingTaking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

403

A battery can explode if you donot follow the correct procedure,seriously injuring anyonenearby.

Keep all sparks, open flames,and smoking materials awayfrom the battery.

＋＋

＋

Open the hood, and check thephysical condition of the battery.In very cold weather, check thecondition of the electrolyte. If itseems slushy or frozen, do not tryjump starting until it thaws.

Turn off all the electrical acces-sories: heater, A/C, climatecontrol, stereo system, lights, etc.Put the transmission in Park, andset the parking brake.

Remove the battery cover (seepage ), then remove thesecondary under-hood fuse boxcover from the positive ( )terminal on the battery.

Connect one jumper cable to thepositive ( ) terminal on yourvehicle’s battery. Connect theother end to the positive ( )terminal on the booster battery.

The numbers in the illustration showyou the order to connect the jumpercables.

1.

2.

3.

4.

391

To Jump Start Your Vehicle:

Jump Starting

404

COVER

BOOSTER BATTERY

If a battery sits in extreme cold, theelectrolyte inside can f reeze.Attempting to jump start with a f rozenbattery can cause it to rupture.

＋－

Start your vehicle. If the startermotor still operates slowly, checkthat the jumper cables have goodmetal-to-metal contact.

Once your vehicle is running,disconnect the negative cable fromyour vehicle, then from thebooster battery. Disconnect thepositive cable from your vehicle,then from the booster battery.

Reinstall the secondary under-hood fuse box cover over thepositive ( ) terminal of thebattery, then reinstall the batterycover.

Keep the ends of the jumpercables away from each other andany metal on the vehicle untileverything is disconnected.Otherwise, you may cause anelectrical short.

If the booster battery is in anothervehicle, have an assistant startthat vehicle and run it at a fast idle.

Connect the second jumper cableto the negative ( ) terminal onthe booster battery. Connect theother end to the grounding pointas shown. Do not connect thisjumper cable to any other part ofthe engine.

7.

5.

6.

8.

9.

Jump StartingTaking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

405

Connecting the jumper cable to thesecondary under-hood f use box causesthe f uses blown.

The pointer of the vehicle’stemperature gauge should stay inthe midrange. If it climbs to the redmark, you should determine thereason (hot day, driving up a steephill, etc.).

If your vehicle overheats, you shouldtake immediate action. The onlyindication may be the temperaturegauge climbing to or above the redmark. Or you may see steam orspray coming from under the hood.

If you do not see steam or spray,leave the engine running, andwatch the temperature gauge. Ifthe high heat is due to overloading,the engine should start to cooldown almost immediately. If itdoes, wait until the temperaturegauge comes down to the midpoint,then continue driving.

If the temperature gauge stays atthe red mark, turn off the engine.

Look for any obvious coolant leaks,such as a split radiator hose.Everything is still extremely hot,so use caution. If you find a leak, itmust be repaired before youcontinue driving (see

on page ).

If you see steam and/or spraycoming from under the hood,turn off the engine. Wait untilyou see no more signs of steamor spray, then open the hood.

Safely pull to the side of the road.Put the transmission in Park, andset the parking brake. Turn off allaccessories, and turn on thehazard warning indicators.

1.

2.

3.

4.

5.

421Emergency

Towing

If the Engine Overheats

406

Steam and spray from anoverheated engine canseriously scald you.

Do not open the hood if steamis coming out.

Driving with the temperature gaugepointer at the red mark can causeserious damage to the engine.

If you do not find an obvious leak,check the coolant level in theradiator reserve tank. Add coolantif the level is below the MIN mark.

If there was no coolant in thereserve tank, you may need to addcoolant to the radiator. Let theengine cool down until the pointerreaches the middle of the tempera-ture gauge, or lower, before check-ing the radiator.

Using gloves or a large heavycloth, turn the radiator capcounterclockwise, without pushingdown, to the first stop. After thepressure releases, push down onthe cap, and turn it until it comesoff.

Put the radiator cap back ontightly. Run the engine, and watchthe temperature gauge. If it goesback to the red mark, the engineneeds repair (see

on page ).

If the temperature stays normal,check the coolant level in theradiator reserve tank. If it hasgone down, add coolant to theMAX mark. Put the cap back ontightly.

Start the engine, and set theinterior temperature to maximum(climate control to FULL AUTO at‘‘ ’’). Add coolant to theradiator up to the base of the fillerneck. If you do not have theproper coolant mixture available,you can add plain water.Remember to have the coolingsystem drained and refilled withthe proper mixture as soon as youcan.

6.

7.

8.

9.

10.

11.

421Emergency

Towing

If the Engine OverheatsTaking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

407

Removing the radiator capwhile the engine is hot cancause the coolant to spray out,seriously scalding you.

Always let the engine andradiator cool down beforeremoving the radiator cap.

You can still drive your vehicle evenif this message appears on the multi-information display, however youshould check the temperature gaugewhile driving.

If there is a problem with theradiator system, you will see a‘‘CHECK RADIATOR SYSTEM’’message on the multi-informationdisplay (see page ).

If you notice the temperature gaugeclimbing to or above the red mark,Safely pull to the side of the road.Follow the instructions on pages

and .

If you see this message, the enginehas probably overheated. You shouldtake your vehicle to a dealer, andhave it repaired as soon as possible.

78

406 407

Check Radiator System

If the Engine Overheats

408

Safely pull off the road, and shutoff the engine. Turn on the hazardwarning indicators.

Let the vehicle sit for a minute.Open the hood, and check the oillevel (see page ). An enginevery low on oil can lose pressureduring cornering and other drivingmaneuvers.

If necessary, add oil to bring thelevel back to the full mark on thedipstick (see page ).

Start the engine, and watch the oilpressure indicator. If it does not goout within 10 seconds, turn off theengine. There is a mechanicalproblem that needs to be repairedbefore you can continue driving(see on page

).

This indicator should nevercome on when the engine is

running. If it starts flashing or stayson, or if you see a ‘‘CHECK ENGINEOIL LEVEL’’ message on the multi-information display, the oil pressurehas dropped very low or lostpressure. Serious engine damage ispossible, and you should takeimmediate action.

If the charging systemindicator comes on brightly

when the engine is running, or if yousee a ‘‘CHECK CHARGINGSYSTEM’’ message on the multi-information display, the battery isnot being charged.

Immediately turn off all electricalaccessories. Try not to use otherelectrically operated controls such asthe power windows. Keep the enginerunning; starting the engine willdischarge the battery rapidly.

Go to a dealer or a service stationwhere you can get technicalassistance.

1.

2.

3.

4.

363

301

421

Low Oil Pressure Indicator

Emergency Towing

Charging System Indicator

Low Oil Pressure Indicator, Charging System IndicatorTaking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

409

Running the engine with low oilpressure can cause serious mechanicaldamage almost immediately. Turn of fthe engine as soon as you can saf ely getthe vehicle stopped.

To check if they are set, turn theignition switch to the ON (II)position, without starting the engine.The malfunction indicator lamp willcome on for 20 seconds. If it thengoes off, the readiness codes are set.If it blinks five times, the readinesscodes are not set. If possible, do nottake your vehicle for a stateemissions test until the readinesscodes are set. Refer to

for moreinformation (see page ).

Your vehicle has certain ‘‘readinesscodes’’ that are part of the on-boarddiagnostics for the emissionssystems. In some states, part of theemissions testing is to make surethese codes are set. If they are notset, the test cannot be completed.

If this indicator comes onwhile driving, or if you seea ‘‘CHECK EMISSION

SYSTEM’’ message in the multi-information display, it means one ofthe engine’s emissions controlsystems may have a problem. Eventhough you may feel no difference inyour vehicle’s performance, it canreduce your fuel economy and causeincreased emissions. Continuedoperation may cause serious damage.

If the indicator comes on repeatedly,even though it may go off as youcontinue driving, have the vehiclechecked by your dealer as soon aspossible.

If your vehicle’s battery has beendisconnected or gone dead, thesecodes are erased. It can take severaldays of driving under variousconditions to set the codes again.

If you have recently refueled yourvehicle, the indicator coming oncould be due to a loose or missingfuel fill cap. You will also see a‘‘TIGHTEN FUEL CAP’’ message onthe multi-information display.Tighten the cap until it clicks at leastonce (see page ). Tightening thecap will not turn the indicator offimmediately; it can take several daysof normal driving.

298

435

StateEmissions Testing

Readiness Code

Malfunction Indicator Lamp

410

If you keep driving with themalf unction indicator lamp on, you candamage your vehicle’s emissionscontrols and engine. Those repairs maynot be covered by your vehicle’swarranties.

However, if the brake pedal does notfeel normal, you should takeimmediate action. A problem in onepart of the system’s dual circuitdesign will still give you braking attwo wheels. You will feel the brakepedal go down much farther beforethe vehicle begins to slow down, andyou will have to press harder on thepedal.

Slow down by shifting to a lowergear, and pull to the side of the roadwhen it is safe. Because of the longdistance needed to stop, it ishazardous to drive the vehicle. Youshould have it towed and repaired assoon as possible (see

on page ).

If the fluid level is low, take yourvehicle to a dealer, and have thebrake system inspected for leaks orworn brake pads.

You will also see a ‘‘CHECK BRAKESYSTEM’’ message on the multi-information display.

If the brake system indicator comeson while driving, the brake fluid levelis probably low. You will see a‘‘BRAKE FLUID LOW’’ message onthe multi-information display. Presslightly on the brake pedal to see if itfeels normal. If it does, check thebrake fluid level the next time youstop at a service station (see page

).

The brake systemindicator normallycomes on when

you turn the ignition switch to theON (II) position and as a reminder tocheck the parking brake. If you donot release the parking brake, theindicator will stay on, and you willsee a ‘‘RELEASE PARKINGBRAKE’’ message on the multi-information display.

369

421Emergency

Towing

Brake System IndicatorTaking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

411

U.S. Canada

If you must drive the vehicle a shortdistance in this condition, driveslowly and carefully.

If the ABS indicator and the VSAsystem indicator come on with thebrake system indicator, have yourvehicle inspected by your dealerimmediately.

If the fuel fill door release buttondoes not work, use the release leverinside the left maintenance lid in thetrunk.

To open the fuel fill door, pull therelease lever rearward.

Brake System Indicator, Opening the Fuel Fill Door Manually

Opening the Fuel Fill DoorManually

412

LID RELEASE LEVER

To remove the fuse box lid, put yourfinger in the notch on the lid, pull ittoward you, and take it out of itshinges.

The fuses are located in five fuseboxes. The interior fuse boxes arelocated under the dashboard on thedriver’s and passenger’s side.

To open the secondary fuse box lid,push the tab in the direction shownin the illustration.

FusesTaking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

413

FUSE BOX TAB

INTERIOR FUSE BOXINTERIOR FUSE BOXDriver’s side

SECONDARY INTERIOR FUSE BOXDriver’s sidePassenger’s side

NOTCH NOTCH

The primary under-hood fuse box isin the engine compartment on thedriver’s side. To open it, push thetabs as shown.

The secondary under-hood fuse boxis on the battery. To open it, pushthe tabs as shown.

To check the fuse box, remove thebattery cover first (see page ).391

Fuses

414

PRIMARY UNDER-HOOD FUSE BOX SECONDARY UNDER-HOOD FUSE BOX

TAB

TAB

Turn the ignition switch to theLOCK (0) position. Make sure theheadlights and all otheraccessories are off.Remove the cover from the fusebox.

If something electrical in yourvehicle stops working, the first thingyou should check for is a blown fuse.Determine from the chart on pages

, , and , or the diagramon the fuse box lid, which fuse orfuses control that device. Checkthose fuses first, but check all thefuses before deciding that a blownfuse is the cause. Replace any blownfuses, and check if the device works.

Check each of the large fuses inthe under-hood fuse box bylooking through the top at the wireinside. Removing these fusesrequires a Phillips-headscrewdriver.

Check the smaller fuses in theunder-hood fuse box and all thefuses in the interior fuse boxes bypulling out each fuse with the fusepuller. The fuse puller is inside theprimary under-hood fuse box.

3. 4.1.

2.

418 419 420

Checking and Replacing Fuses

FusesTaking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

415

FUSE

BLOWN

FUSEPULLER

If you cannot drive the vehiclewithout fixing the problem, and youdo not have a spare fuse, take a fuseof the same rating or a lower ratingfrom one of the other circuits withthe fuse puller provided in the under-hood fuse box. Make sure you cando without that circuit temporarily(such as the accessory power socketor radio).If you replace the blown fuse with aspare fuse that has a lower rating, itmight blow out again. This does notindicate anything wrong. Replace thefuse with one of the correct rating assoon as you can.

If the replacement fuse of thesame rating blows in a short time,there is probably a seriouselectrical problem with yourvehicle. Leave the blown fuse inthat circuit, and have your vehiclechecked by a qualified mechanic.

Look for a blown wire inside thefuse. If it is blown, replace it withone of the spare fuses of the samerating or lower.

6.

5.

Fuses

416

BLOWN

Replacing a f use with one that has ahigher rating greatly increases thechances of damaging the electricalsystem. If you do not have areplacement f use with the proper ratingf or the circuit, install one with a lowerrating.

If the fuse for the driving positionmemory system is removed, allstored driving positions will be lost.To store the driving positions again,see page .

If the radio fuse is removed, theaudio system will disable itself. Thenext time you turn on the radio youwill see ‘‘ ’’ in the frequencydisplay. Use the preset buttons toenter the five-digit code (see page

).

If the fuse for the power tilttelescopic steering is removed, thesystem will be disabled. The systemneeds to be reset after reinstallingthe fuse (see page ).

If the navigation system fuse isremoved, the navigation system willdisable itself. The next time you turnon the ignition switch, the systemwill require you to enter a PINbefore it can be used. Refer to thenavigation system manual.

156

232

143

On vehicles with navigation system

FusesTaking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

417

－

＊

＊

No. Amps. Amps.

No. Amps.

No.

Circuits Protected

Circuits Protected Circuits Protected

123456789

1011121314

15 A30 A10 A15 A10 A15 A

7.5 A15 A30 A30 A20 A7.5 A15 A40 A

40 A15 A30 A40 A40 A

40 A70 A

120 A50 A50 A

1 50 A

1516171819202122

23

Radiator fan

Left headlight low beamRear defroster coilLeft headlight high beamSmall lightRight headlight high beamRight headlight low beamBack-upFI ECUWiperHeadlight washerFog lightsMG clutchHorn, StopRear defroster

Back-up, ACCHazardVSA motorVSADrive by wire, Laf heaterNot used (OP)Heater motorPassenger’s fuse boxBatteryIG mainPower window

: On Canadian models

Fuse Locations

418

PRIMARY UNDER-HOOD FUSE BOX

SECONDARY UNDER-HOOD FUSE BOX

No. No.

No. Circuits Protected

Circuits Protected Circuits ProtectedAmps.Amps.

Amps.

123456789

10

111213141516

1718192021222324252627282930313233

12

Starter diag.Starter signal

Drive by WireIgnition coilDaytime running lightLaf heaterRadioInterior lightBack-upDoor lockAccessory socketOccupant position detectionsystemWiper

Driver’s power seat slidingPower lumbar supportDriver’s power seat reclining

ACGFuel PumpIGN SOLMeterSRSIGP (PGM-FI ECU)Left rear power windowETS (telescopic)ETS (tilt)Driver’s power windowMoonroofAFSA/CSH-AWDACCOption

20 A15 A20 A15 A10 A10 A7.5 A20 A20 A20 A30 A20 A7.5 A7.5 A7.5 A10 A

(7.5 A)

15 A15 A10 A15 A7.5 A7.5 A10 A20 A20 A7.5 A

7.5 A7.5 A20 A20 A10 A20 A

7.5 A7.5 A

Tire pressure monitoring systemPassenger’s power seat reclining

Passenger’s power seat sliding

Fuse LocationsTaking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

419

INTERIOR FUSE BOXDriver’s side

SECONDARY INTERIOR FUSE BOXDriver’s side

No. Amps. Circuits Protected No. Amps. Circuits Protected1234

5

30 A30 A30 A30 A

20 A

SH-AWDPremium amplifierPassenger’s power windowDriver’s automatic seat belttensioner/e-pretensionerRight rear power window

67

8

9

20 A7.5 A

30 A

7.5 A

Heated seatsInterior lightsPassenger’s automatic seatbelt tensioner/e-pretensionerAir conditioner

Fuse Locations

420

INTERIOR FUSE BOXPassenger’s side

To use the towing hook:Remove the cover from the frontbumper by pushing the rightcorner edge of the cover with afinger until the cover comes out asshown in the illustration.

The operator will loadyour vehicle on the back of a truck.Any other method of towing willdamage the drive system. When youcontact the towing agency, informthem a flat-bed is required.

If your vehicle needs to be towed,call a professional towing service ororganization. Never tow your vehiclewith just a rope or chain. It is verydangerous.

If your vehicle gets stuck in sand,mud, or snow, call a towing serviceto pull it out (see the previouscolumn).

For very short distances, such asfreeing the vehicle, you can use thedetachable towing hook that mountson the anchor in the front bumper.

1.

Emergency Towing, If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck

The only way you can safely towyour vehicle is with flat-bedequipment.

Emergency Towing If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck

Taking

Care

ofthe

Unexpected

421

Push

COVER

Towing with only two tires on theground will damage parts of theall-wheel-drive system. Your vehicleshould be transported on a f lat-bedtruck or trailer.

Screw the towing hook into thehole, and tighten it with the wheelnut wrench.

Remove the towing hook andwheel nut wrench from the toolcase in the spare tire.

The cover is attached to the bumperwith a tether.

2.

3.

If Your Vehicle Gets Stuck

422

WHEEL NUT WRENCHCOVER

TETHER

To avoid damage to your vehicle, usethe towing hook f or straight, f latground towing only. Do not tow at anangle. The tow hook should not be usedto tow the vehicle onto a f lat bed. Donot use it as a tie down.

The diagrams in this section giveyou the dimensions and capacities ofyour vehicle, and the location ofidentification numbers. It alsoincludes information you shouldknow about your vehicle’s tires andemissions control systems.

................Identification Numbers . 424................................Specifications . 426

DOT Tire Quality Grading......................(U.S. Vehicles) . 428

.................................Treadwear . 428......................................Traction . 428

.............................Temperature . 429.................................Tire Labeling . 430

.......................Emissions Controls . 432.....................The Clean Air Act . 432

Crankcase Emissions Control....................................System . 432

Evaporative Emissions Control....................................System . 432

Onboard Refueling Vapor................................Recovery . 432

...Exhaust Emissions Controls . 433....................PGM-FI System . 433

Ignition Timing Control................................System . 433

Exhaust Gas Recirculation...................(EGR) System . 433

Three Way Catalytic...........................Converter . 433

....................Replacement Parts . 433..Three Way Catalytic Converter . 434

..............State Emissions Testing . 435

Technical InformationTechnicalInform

ation

423

Your vehicle has several identifyingnumbers in various places.

The vehicle identification number(VIN) is the 17-digit number yourdealer uses to register your vehiclefor warranty purposes. It is alsonecessary for licensing and insuringyour vehicle. The easiest place tofind the VIN is on a plate fastened tothe top of the dashboard. You cansee it by looking through thewindshield on the driver’s side. It isalso on the certification labelattached to the driver’s doorjamb,and is stamped on the enginecompartment bulkhead. The VIN isalso provided in bar code on thecertification label.

Identif ication Numbers

424

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER

CERTIFICATION LABEL

U.S. vehicle is shown.

The engine number is stamped intothe engine block. It is on the frontleft, below the valve cover.

The transmission number is on alabel on top of the transmission.

Identif ication NumbersTechnicalInform

ation

425

ENGINE NUMBER

TRANSMISSION NUMBER

－－

＊

＊

＊

＊

Specifications

426

Dimensions

Weights

Air Conditioning

Capacities

4.2 US qt (4.0 )

193.6 in (4,917 mm)72.7 in (1,847 mm)57.1 in (1,451 mm)110.2 in (2,800 mm)62.0 in (1,576 mm)62.4 in (1,585 mm)

HFC-134a (R-134a)15.8 17.60 oz (450 500 g)

ND-OIL8

1.59 US gal (6.0 )2.27 US gal (8.6 )

4.5 US qt (4.3 )

5.3 US qt (5.0 )2.9 US qt (2.7 )7.6 US qt (7.2 )

LengthWidthHeightWheelbaseTrack

Gross vehicle weight rating

Refrigerant typeCharge quantityLubricant type

See the certification label attachedto the driver’s doorjamb.

0.79 US qt (0.75 )0.77 US qt (0.73 )

Excluding the oil remaining in the engine

Including the coolant in the reserve tank and that remaining in theengineReserve tank capacity:

6.9 US qt (6.5 )2.6 US qt (2.5 )

0.45 US qt (0.43 )0.48 US qt (0.45 )

3.3 US qt (3.1 )

Fuel tank

EnginecoolantEngine oil

AutomatictransmissionfluidRear differential fluid

SH-AWDdifferentialcaseSH-AWDclutch case

TransferassemblyfluidWindshieldwasherreservoir

1 :

2 :

Approx.

FrontRear

ChangeTotalChange

Including filterWithout filter

TotalChangeTotal

ChangeTotal

ChangeTotalChangeTotal

U.S. vehiclesCanadianvehicles

19.4 US gal (73 )

0.16 US gal (0.58 )

2.8 US qt (2.7 )

1

2

－－

－－－－－－－－－－－－

－－

＊

＊

＊

＋－

＊

SpecificationsTechnicalInform

ation

427

Battery

Fuses

EngineLights

Alignment

Tires

12 V12 V

60 W24/2.2 CP

12 V12 V12 V12 V12 V12 V12 V12 V12 V12 V

3 CP21 W21 W55 W5 W8 W8 W2 W2 CP5 W

Capacity

Interior

Under-hood

12 V12 V

55 AH/5 HR72 AH/20 HR

TypeBore x StrokeDisplacementCompression ratioSpark plugs

Spark plug gap

3.54 x 3.58 in (89 x 93 mm)212 cu-in (3,471 cm )

11.0 : 1IZFR6K11SKJ20DR-M11

0.04 in (1.1 mm)

0.00 in (0.0 mm)0.08 in (2.0 mm)

0°8’1°15’

2°10’

P245/50R17 98V

SOHC VTEC V-6 gasoline engineHeadlights (High Beam)Front turn signalFront side markerRear turn signal lightsBack-up lightFog lightsLicense plate lightsCeiling lights

Vanity mirror lightsDoor courtesy lightsTrunk light

Toe-in

Camber

CasterLow beam headlight bulbs are a type of high voltage dischargetube (D2S).

Size

Pressure

60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )30 psi (210 kPa , 2.1 kgf/cm )32 psi (220 kPa , 2.2 kgf/cm )

T155/70D17 110M245-680R460A 102V

See page 419 and 420 or the fuselabel attached to the inside ofeach fuse box cover.See page 418 or the fuse boxcover.

FrontRearFrontRearFront

FrontRear

NGK:DENSO:

(Amber)

:

(Amber)

: Michelin PAX system model

Front/Rear

SpareFrontRearSpare

00.1 mm

－The tires on your vehicle meet allU.S. Federal Safety Requirements.All tires are also graded fortreadwear, traction, and temperatureperformance according toDepartment of Transportation(DOT) standards. The followingexplains these gradings.

All passenger car tires must conformto Federal Safety Requirements inaddition to these grades.

Quality grades can be found whereapplicable on the tire sidewallbetween the tread shoulder and themaximum section width. Forexample:

The treadwear grade is a compara-tive rating based on the wear rate ofthe tire when tested under controlledconditions on a specified governmenttest course. For example, a tiregraded 150 would wear one and one-half (1 1/2) times as well on thegovernment course as a tire graded100. The relative performance oftires depends upon the actual condi-tions of their use, however, and maydepart significantly from the normdue to variations in driving habits,service practices, and differences inroad characteristics and climate.

The traction grades, from highest tolowest, are AA, A, B, and C. Thosegrades represent the tire’s ability tostop on wet pavement as measuredunder controlled conditions onspecified government test surfacesof asphalt and concrete. A tiremarked C may have poor tractionperformance.

Warning: The traction gradeassigned to this tire is based onstraight-ahead braking traction tests,and does not include acceleration,cornering, hydroplaning, or peaktraction characteristics.

DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)

Treadwear 200Traction AATemperature A

Uniform Tire Quality Grading

Treadwear Traction AA, A, B, C

428

－The temperature grades are A (thehighest), B, and C, representing thetire’s resistance to the generation ofheat, and its ability to dissipate heatwhen tested under controlledconditions on a specified indoorlaboratory test wheel. Sustained hightemperature can cause the materialof the tire to degenerate and reducetire life, and excessive temperaturecan lead to sudden tire failure. GradeC corresponds to a level ofperformance that all passenger cartires must meet under the FederalMotor Vehicle Safety Standard No.109. Grades B and A representhigher levels of performance on thelaboratory test wheel than theminimum required by law.

Warning: The temperature grade forthis tire is established for a tire thatis properly inflated and notoverloaded. Excessive speed,underinflation, or excessive loading,either separately or in combination,can cause heat buildup and possibletire failure.

DOT Tire Quality Grading (U.S. Vehicles)

Temperature A, B, C

TechnicalInform

ation

429

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

Whenever tires are replaced, theyshould be replaced with tires of thesame size. Following is an exampleof tire size with an explanation ofwhat each component means.

Vehicle type (P indicatespassenger vehicle).

Tire width in millimeters.

Aspect ratio (the tire’s sectionheight as a percentage of itswidth).

Tire construction code (Rindicates radial).

Rim diameter in inches.

Load index (a numerical codeassociated with the maximumload the tire can carry).

Speed symbol (analphabetical code indicatingthe maximum speed rating).

The tire identification number (TIN)is a group of numbers and lettersthat look like the following exampleTIN.

This indicates that the tiremeets all requirements ofthe U.S. Department ofTransportation.

Manufacturer’sidentification mark.

Tire type code.

Date of manufacture.The tires that came on your vehiclehave a number of markings. Thoseyou should be aware of are describedbelow. The maximum air

pressure the tire canhold.

The maximum load thetire can carry atmaximum air pressure.

Max Press

Max Load

P

R

V

DOT

B97R

FW6X

2202

245

50

17

98

Tire Labeling

Tire Size

Tire Identif ication Number

Maximum Tire Pressure

Maximum Tire Load

430

DOT B97R FW6X 2202

P245/50R17 98V

Load index (a numerical codeassociated with the maximumload the tire can carry).

Speed symbol (analphabetical code indicatingthe maximum speed rating).

The PAX system tires have differentmarkings from conventional tiremarkings. Following is an example ofPAX system tire size with anexplanation of what each componentmeans.

Symmetric

Nominal diameter at the rimseat in millimeters.

Tire construction code (Rindicates radial)

Outside diameter of the tire inmillimeters.

Tire width in millimeters.

A

R

460

102

V

680

245

U.S. model only

Tire Labeling (PAX System Tires)

PAX System Tire Labeling

TechnicalInform

ation

431

245-680R460A 102V

＊

＊The burning of gasoline in yourvehicle’s engine produces several by-products. Some of these are carbonmonoxide (CO), oxides of nitrogen(NOx), and hydrocarbons (HC).Gasoline evaporating from the tankalso produces hydrocarbons. Con-trolling the production of NOx, CO,and HC is important to the environ-ment. Under certain conditions ofsunlight and climate, NOx and HCreact to form photochemical ‘‘smog.’’Carbon monoxide does not contri-bute to smog creation, but it is apoisonous gas.

In Canada, Acura vehicles complywith the Canadian emissionrequirements, as specified in anagreement with EnvironmentCanada, at the time they aremanufactured.

Your vehicle has a positivecrankcase ventilation system. Thiskeeps gasses that build up in theengine’s crankcase from going intothe atmosphere. The positive

crankcase ventilation valve routesthem from the crankcase back to theintake manifold. They are thendrawn into the engine and burned.

As gasoline evaporates in the fueltank, an evaporative emissionscontrol canister filled with charcoaladsorbs the vapor. It is stored in thiscanister while the engine is off. Afterthe engine is started and warmed up,the vapor is drawn into the engineand burned during driving.

The onboard refueling vaporrecovery (ORVR) system capturesthe fuel vapors during refueling. Thevapors are adsorbed in a canisterfilled with activated carbon. Whiledriving, the fuel vapors are drawninto the engine and burned off.

The United States Clean Air Actsets standards for automobileemissions. It also requires thatautomobile manufacturers explain toowners how their emissions controlswork and what to do to maintainthem. This section summarizes howthe emissions controls work.Scheduled maintenance is on pages

and .357 358

The Clean Air Act

Crankcase Emissions ControlSystem

Evaporative Emissions ControlSystem

Onboard Refueling VaporRecovery

Emissions Controls

432

The exhaust emissions controlsinclude four systems: PGM-FI,ignition timing control, exhaust gasrecirculation, and three way catalyticconverter. These four systems worktogether to control the engine’scombustion and minimize theamount of HC, CO, and NOx thatcome out the tailpipe. The exhaustemissions control systems areseparate from the crankcase andevaporative emissions controlsystems.

The PGM-FI system uses sequentialmultiport fuel injection.It has three subsystems: air intake,engine control, and fuel control. Thepowertrain control module (PCM)uses various sensors to determinehow much air is going into theengine. It then controls how muchfuel to inject under all operatingconditions.

This system constantly adjusts theignition timing, reducing the amountof HC, CO, and NOx produced.

The exhaust gas recirculation (EGR)system takes some of the exhaustgas and routes it back into the intakemanifold. Adding exhaust gas to theair/fuel mixture reduces the amountof NOx produced when the fuel isburned.

The emissions control systems aredesigned and certified to worktogether in reducing emissions tolevels that comply with the Clean AirAct. To make sure the emissionsremain low, you should use only newAcura replacement parts or theirequivalent for repairs. Using lowerquality parts may increase theemissions from your vehicle.

The emissions control systems arecovered by warranties separate fromthe rest of your vehicle. Read yourwarranty manual for more informa-tion.The three way catalytic converters

are in the exhaust system. Throughchemical reactions, they convert HC,CO, and NOx in the engine’s exhaustto carbon dioxide (CO ), nitrogen(N ), and water vapor.

2

2

Exhaust Emissions Controls Replacement Parts

PGM-FI System

Ignition Timing Control System

Exhaust Gas Recirculation (EGR)System

Three Way Catalytic Converter

Emissions ControlsTechnicalInform

ation

433

The three way catalytic converterscontain precious metals that serve ascatalysts, promoting chemicalreactions to convert the exhaustgasses without affecting the metals.The catalytic converters are referredto as three-way catalysts, since theyact on HC, CO, and NOx.Replacement units must be originalAcura parts or their equivalent.

The three way catalytic convertersmust operate at a high temperaturefor the chemical reactions to takeplace. They can set on fire anycombustible materials that comenear them. Park your vehicle awayfrom high grass, dry leaves, or otherflammables.

A defective three way catalyticconverter contributes to air pollution,and can impair your engine’s per-formance. Follow these guidelines toprotect your vehicle’s three waycatalytic converters.

Always use unleaded gasoline.Even a small amount of leadedgasoline can contaminate thecatalyst metals, making the threeway catalytic convertersineffective.

Have your vehicle diagnosed andrepaired if it is misfiring, back-firing, stalling, or otherwise notrunning properly.

Keep the engine tuned-up.

Three Way Catalytic Converters

434

THREE WAY CATALYTIC CONVERTER

THREE WAY CATALYTIC CONVERTERS

If you take your vehicle for a stateemissions test shortly after thebattery has been disconnected orgone dead, it may not pass the test.This is because of certain ‘‘readinesscodes’’ that must be set in the on-board diagnostics for the emissionssystems. These codes are erasedwhen the battery is disconnected,and set again only after several daysof driving under a variety ofconditions.

If the testing facility determines thatthe readiness codes are not set, youwill be requested to return at a laterdate to complete the test. If you mustget the vehicle retested within thenext two or three days, you cancondition the vehicle for retesting bydoing the following.

Make sure the gas tank is nearly,but not completely, full (around3/4).

Without touching the acceleratorpedal, start the engine, and let itidle for 20 seconds.

Keep the vehicle in Park. Increasethe engine speed to 2,000 rpm, andhold it there until the temperaturegauge rises to at least 1/4 of thescale (about 3 minutes).

Make sure the vehicle has beenparked with the engine off for 6hours or more.

Make sure the ambienttemperature is between 40° and95°F.

Testing of Readiness Codes

State Emissions TestingTechnicalInform

ation

435

Then drive in city/suburbantraffic for at least 10 minutes.When traffic conditions allow, letthe vehicle coast for severalseconds without using theaccelerator pedal or the brakepedal.

If the testing facility determines thereadiness codes are still not set, seeyour dealer.

Select a nearby lightly traveledmajor highway where you canmaintain a speed of 50 to 60 mph(80 to 97 km/h) for at least 20minutes. Drive on the highway inD. Do not use cruise control.When traffic allows, drive for 90seconds without moving theaccelerator pedal. (Vehicle speedmay vary slightly; this is okay.) Ifyou cannot do this for acontinuous 90 seconds because oftraffic conditions, drive for at least30 seconds, then repeat it twomore times (for a total of 90seconds).

State Emissions Testing

436

Customer Service................................Information . 438

....................Warranty Coverages . 439Reporting Safety Defects

..........................(U.S. Vehicles) . 440.....................Authorized Manuals . 441

Warranty and Customer RelationsW

arrantyand

Custom

erR

elations

437

If you are dissatisfied with thedecision made by the dealership’smanagement, contact the AcuraClient Services Office.

U.S. Owners:

Canadian Owners:

In Puerto Rico and the U.S. VirginIslands:

When you call or write, please giveus this information:

Acura dealership personnel aretrained professionals. They shouldbe able to answer all your questions.If you encounter a problem that yourdealership does not solve to yoursatisfaction, please discuss it withthe dealership’s management. Theservice manager or general managercan help. Almost all problems aresolved in this way.

Vehicle identification number(see page )Name and address of the dealerwho services your vehicleDate of purchaseMileage on your vehicleYour name, address, and tele-phone numberA detailed description of theproblemName of the dealer who sold thevehicle to you

424

Customer Service Information

438

CUSTOMER RELATIONS

RELATIONS AVEC LA CLIENTÈLE

Honda Canada Inc.715 Milner AvenueToronto, ONM1B 2K8

Tel: 1-888-9-ACURA-9Fax: Toll-free 1-877-939-0909

Toronto (416) 287-4776

American Honda Motor Co., Inc.Acura Client ServicesMail Stop 500-2N-7E1919 Torrance Blvd.Torrance, CA 90501-2746

Tel: (800) 382-2238

Vortex Motor Corp.Bella InternationalP.O. Box 190816San Juan, PR 00919-0816

Tel: (787) 620-7028

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

－

covers your new vehicle, except forthe battery, emissions controlsystems, and accessories, againstdefects in materials andworkmanship.

these twowarranties cover your vehicle’semissions control systems. Time,mileage, and coverage areconditional. Please read yourwarranty booklet for exactinformation.

this warranty gives upto 100 percent credit toward areplacement battery.

a seatbelt that fails to function properly iscovered for the useful life of thevehicle.

all exterior body panels arecovered for rust-through from theinside for the specified time periodwith no mileage limit.

Acura accessories are covered underthis warranty. Time and mileagelimits depend on the type ofaccessory and other factors. Pleaseread your warranty manual fordetails.

covers all Acurareplacement parts against defects inmaterials and workmanship.

providescoverage for as long as the pur-chaser of the muffler owns thevehicle.

Your new vehicle is covered by thesewarranties:

provides proratedcoverage for a replacement batterypurchased from your dealer.

Restrictions and exclusions apply toall these warranties. Please read the2006 Acura Warranty Informationbooklet that came with your vehiclefor precise information on warrantycoverages. Your vehicle’s originaltires are covered by theirmanufacturer. Tire warrantyinformation is in a separate booklet.

Please refer to the 2006 WarrantyManual that came with your vehicle.

Warranty Coverages

U.S. Owners

Canadian Owners

New Vehicle Limited Warranty

Emissions Control Systems DefectsWarranty and EmissionsPerformance Warranty

Original Equipment Battery LimitedWarranty

Seat Belt Limited Warranty

Rust Perforation Limited Warranty

Accessory Limited Warranty

Replacement Parts LimitedWarranty

Replacement Muffler LifetimeLimited Warranty

Replacement Battery LimitedWarranty

Warranty

andC

ustomer

Relations

439

If you believe that your vehicle has adefect which could cause a crash orcould cause injury or death, youshould immediately inform theNational Highway Traffic SafetyAdministration (NHTSA), in additionto notifying American Honda MotorCo., Inc.

If NHTSA receives similarcomplaints, it may open aninvestigation, and if it finds that asafety defect exists in a group ofvehicles, it may order a recall andremedy campaign. However, NHTSAcannot become involved in individualproblems between you, your dealer,or Acura Automobile Division,American Honda Motor Co., Inc.

To contact NHTSA, you may call theVehicle Safety Hotline toll-free at1-888-327-4236(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to

; or write to:Administrator, NHTSA, 400 SeventhStreet, SW., Washington, DC 20590.You can also obtain otherinformation about motor vehiclesafety from .

Reporting Safety Defects (U.S. Vehicles)

440

http://www.saf ercar.gov

http://www.saf ercar.gov

－

＊

＊

＊

＊２００５

ＡＣＵ

The publications shown below can be purchased from HelmIncorporated. You can order in any of three ways:

Detach and mail the order form on the right half of this pageCall Helm Inc. at 1-800-782-4356Go online at

If you are interested in other years or models, contact Helm Inc.at 1-800-782-4356.

(credit card orders only)

Valid only for sales within the United States. Canadianowners should contact their authorized Acura dealer.

Authorized Manuals

Purchasing Factory Authorized Manuals (U.S. only)

Authorized

Manuals

441

ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-782-4356

OR

(NOTE: For Credit Card Holder Orders Only)

MINIMUM CREDIT CARD PURCHASE $10.00

Form Description

2005-2006 Acura RL

Service Manual

2005-2006 Acura RL

Electrical Troubleshooting Manual

2005-2006 Acura RL

Body Repair Manual

2006 Acura RL Owner’s Manual

2006 Acura RL

Navigation System Manual

2006 Acura RL

Maintenance Journal

2006 Acura RL Quick Start Guide

Order Form for Previous Years

Indicate Year and Model Desired

Publication

Form Number

61SJA01

61SJA01EL

61SJA30

31SJA610

31SJA710

31SJAM10

31SJAQ10

ACU-R

Price

Each

$80.00

$50.00

$44.00

$42.00

$29.00

$12.00

$12.00

FREE

PUBLICATION NUMBERVEHICLE MODEL

Name YearQty

Price

Each

Total

Price

GRAND TOTAL

HANDLING CHARGE

Mich. Purchases

Add 6% Sales Tax

TOTAL MATERIAL

$6.95

Monday-Friday 8:00 A.M. 6:00 P.M. EST

By completing this form you can order the materials desired. You canpay by check or money order, or charge to your credit card. Mail toHelm Incorporated at the address shown on the back of the order form.

Prices are subject to change withoutnotice and without incurring obligation.

Orders are mailed within 10 days. Pleaseallow adequate time for delivery.

Prices are subject to change without notice and without incurring obligation.

www. helminc. com

－

－

－

ＳＨＩＰ

ＴＯ

ＰＡＹＭＥＮＴ

This manual covers maintenance and recommendedprocedures for repair to engine and chassis components.It is written for the journeyman mechanic, but is simpleenough for most mechanically-inclined owners to under-stand.

This manual complements the service manual byproviding in-depth troubleshooting information for eachelectrical circuit in your vehicle.

This manual describes the procedures involved in thereplacement of damaged body parts.

Authorized Manuals

Service Manual:

Electrical Troubleshooting Manual:

Body Repair Manual:

442

NOTE: Dealers and Companies please provide dealer or company name,and also the name of the person to whose attention the shipment shouldbe sent. For purchases outside U.S.A. please write to the address shownbelow for a quotation.

P.O. BOX 07280·DETROIT, MICHIGAN 48207·1-800-782-4356

Customer Name Attention

Apartment Number

State & Zip CodeCity

Daytime Telephone Number

Check or money order enclosed payable to Helm Inc U.S. funds only.Do not send cash

MasterCard

VISA Check here if your billing address is differentfrom the shipping address shown above.

Account Number Expiration: Mo. Yr.

CUSTOMER SIGNATURE DATE

Street Address No P.O. Box Number

( )

These Publications cannot be returned for credit without receiving advance authorization within 14days of delivery. On returns, a restocking fee may be applied against the original order.

CONTINUED

....................................Accessories . 303ACCESSORY (Ignition Switch

.....................................Position) . 147............Accessory Power Sockets . 188

......................................AcuraLink . 256Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)

.....................................Indicator . 237...................................Operation . 239

Adaptive Front Lighting System..........................................(AFS) . 139

....................Additives, Engine Oil . 363.............................Airbag (SRS) . 11, 27

............................Air Conditioning . 194.......................Air Pressure, Tires . 384.......................Alcohol in Gasoline . 296

......................................Antifreeze . 366Anti-lock Brakes (ABS)

...............................Indicator . 64, 324...................................Operation . 323

..............Anti-theft, Audio System . 232Anti-theft Steering Column

............................................Lock . 147.........................................Ashtrays . 189

................................Audio System . 203

Auto Control Mode, Starting........................................Engine . 311

..........Automatic Climate Control . 201.......................Automatic Lighting . 137

...Automatic Seat Belt Tensioners . 22.............Automatic Speed Control . 234..............Automatic Transmission . 313

..........................Capacity, Fluid . 426...............Checking Fluid Level . 368

.......................................Shifting . 313Shift Lever Position

...............................Indicators . 313................Shift Lever Positions . 313

....................Shift Lock Release . 318

BatteryCharging System

...........................Indicator . 62, 409............................Jump Starting . 403

..............................Maintenance . 390..........................................Cover . 391

............................Specifications . 427..............................Before Driving . 295

..................................Belts, Seat . 10, 21

.........................Beverage Holders . 186..................................Booster Seats . 53

BrakesAnti-lock Brake

........................System (ABS) . 323.............Break-in, New Linings . 296

...........................................Fluid . 369.......................................Parking . 183

.................System Indicator . 63, 411........................Wear Indicators . 322

.............................Braking System . 322.................Break-in, New Vehicle . 296

Brightness Control,...............................Instruments . 141

......................Brights, Headlights . 136Bulb Replacement

..........................Back-up Lights . 378.......................Front Fog Lights . 376

...............Front Position Lights . 375........Front Side Marker Lights . 375

.................................Headlights . 372............................Specifications . 427

............Turn Signal Lights . 374, 375.....................................Built-in-key . 160

Index

A

B

IND

EX

I

..............................Bulbs, Halogen . 372

............................Capacities Chart . 426.............Carbon Monoxide Hazard . 56

....................Cargo, How to Carry . 305..............CAUTION, Explanation of . ii

.........................................CD Care . 228.......................CD Error Message . 229

...................................CD Changer . 219................................Ceiling Lights . 192

........................Certification Label . 424.................................Chains, Tires . 387

....................Changing a Flat Tire . 398Changing Oil

........................................How to . 364......................................When to . 349

...Charging System Indicator . 62, 409............Checklist, Before Driving . 310

.....................................Child Safety . 38..............................Booster Seats . 53

...................................Child Seats . 45Important Safety

...............................Reminders . 38..........................................Infants . 42

..........................Larger Children . 52.........................................LATCH . 47

......................Risks with Airbags . 39.............................Small Children . 44

.........................................Tethers . 51.........Where Should a Child Sit? . 39

.......................................Child Seats . 44.........................................LATCH . 47

..........Tether Anchorage Points . 51................Childproof Door Locks . 150

Cleaning...................................Seat Belts . 379

...............Climate Control System . 194........................CO in the Exhaust . 432

............Cold Weather, Starting in . 311Collision Mitigation Brake System

(CMBS).....................................Indicator . 329...................................Operation . 325

......................Compact Spare Tire . 397.................Console Compartment . 187.................Consumer Information . 438

.............Controls, Instruments and . 59Coolant

........................................Adding . 366....................................Checking . 301

.........................Proper Solution . 366...................Temperature Gauge . 70

Crankcase Emissions Control........................................System . 432

................Cruise Control Indicator . 66............Cruise Control Operation . 234

...................................Cup Holders . 186.............Customer Service Office . 438

.........................Customize Settings . 81................Door/Window Setup . 119

.......KEYLESS ACCESS Setup . 105...........................Lighting Setup . 112

.................................Meter Setup . 91...........................Position Setup . 100

........................Setting to Default . 82...............................Wiper Setup . 130

................DANGER, Explanation of . ii...................................Dashboard . 4, 60

..............Daytime Running Lights . 138.......................................Indicator . 66

.................................Dead Battery . 403............Defects, Reporting Safety . 440

..............Defogger, Rear Window . 142

Index

D

C

II

＊

CONTINUED

..............Defrosting the Windows . 200..........................Differential Fluid . 426

....................................Dimensions . 426.............Dimming the Headlights . 136

Dipstick..........Automatic Transmission . 368

..................................Engine Oil . 301........................Directional Signals . 136

........Disc Brake Wear Indicators . 322.....................Disposal of Used Oil . 365

Doors............Locking and Unlocking . 148

..................Lockout Prevention . 148.................Monitor Indicator . 13, 79....................Power Door Locks . 148

........DOT Tire Quality Grading . 428...........Driver and Passenger Safety . 7

.......................................Driver’s ID . 81...........................................Driving . 309

....................................Economy . 302Driving Position Memory

........................................System . 156

..............................Economy, Fuel . 302

..................................Emergencies . 393.............Battery, Jump Starting . 403...........Brake System Indicator . 411

................Changing a Flat Tire . 398.....Charging System Indicator . 409

..................Checking the Fuses . 415.......Hazard Warning Flashers . 141

............................Jump Starting . 403.....Low Oil Pressure Indicator . 409...Malfunction Indicator Lamp . 410

Opening the Fuel Fill Door................................Manually . 412

..................Overheated Engine . 406.......................................Towing . 421

.........................Emergency Brake . 183....................Emergency Flashers . 141

......................Emergency Towing . 421..........Emergency Trunk Opener . 150

.......................Emissions Controls . 432.............Emissions Testing, State . 435

Engine............Check Starting System . 312

...............Compartment Covers . 362....Coolant Temperature Gauge . 70

.........................If It Won’t Start . 402

Malfunction Indicator................................Lamp . 62, 410

.........................................Oil life . 349........Oil Pressure Indicator . 62, 409..............Oil, What Kind to Use . 363

...............................Overheating . 406............................Specifications . 427............................Speed Limiter . 318

.......................................Starting . 311...................Engine Speed Limiter . 318

......................Ethanol in Gasoline . 296.Evaporative Emissions Controls . 432

...............................Exhaust Fumes . 56Exhaust Gas Recirculation

........................................System . 433Expectant Mothers, Use of Seat

........................................Belts by . 19

...................................Fan, Interior . 196.........................................Features . 193

....................Filling the Fuel Tank . 297

Index

E

F

IND

EX

III

＊＊

................Gas Mileage Improving . 302.........................................Gasoline . 296...........................................Gauge . 70

.....................Low Fuel Indicator . 66................Octane Requirement . 296

........................Tank, Refueling . 297................Gas Station Procedures . 297

.............................................Gauges . 70...Engine Coolant Temperature . 70

...............................................Fuel . 70GAWR (Gross Axle Weight

.......................................Rating) . 342............Gearshift Lever Positions . 313

......................................Glove Box . 185GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight

.......................................Rating) . 342

.............Halogen Headlight Bulbs . 372

..........................HandsFreeLink . 278............Hazard Warning Flashers . 141

HeadlightsAdaptive Front Lighting System

......................................(AFS) . 139........................................Aiming . 372

..................Automatic Lighting . 137.........Daytime Running Lights . 138

..................High Beam Indicator . 66....................Lights On Indicator . 64

..........Low Beams, Turning on . 136.......................Reminder Chime . 136

........Replacing Halogen Bulbs . 372..........High beams, Turning on . 136

...................................Washer . 134............................Head Restraints . 152

...............................Heated Mirror . 155...................................Heater, Seat . 174

.............High Altitude, Starting at . 311HomeLink Universal

................................Transceiver . 252.......................Hood, Opening the . 299

................................................Horn . 133

Filters...............................................Oil . 364

...........Flashers, Hazard Warning . 141...................Flat Tire, Changing a . 398

.....................................Floor Mats . 380Fluids

..........Automatic Transmission . 368..........................................Brake . 369

..........................Power Steering . 370..................Windshield Washer . 368

.....................................Fog Lights . 138........................Four-way Flashers . 141

............................Front Airbags . 11, 29......................................Front Seat . 151....................................Adjusting . 151

.......................................Heaters . 174

...................................Airbags . 11, 29...........................Air Ventilation . 175

.................................................Fuel . 296......................Fill Door and Cap . 297

...........................................Gauge . 70.....................Low Fuel Indicator . 66

................Octane Requirement . 296Opening the Fuel Fill Door

................................Manually . 412...............................Oxygenated . 296

........................Tank, Refueling . 297......................Tighten Fuel Cap . 298.....................Fuses, Checking the . 415

Index

G

H

IV

TM

CONTINUED

.................Jacking up the Vehicle . 399.......................................Jack, Tire . 398

................................Jump Starting . 403

................................................Keys . 145................Keyless Access System . 159...............Keyless Access Remote . 160

...........Keyless Memory Settings . 166

.......................Label, Certification . 424...............Lane Change, Signaling . 136

........................Lap/Shoulder Belts . 21

...Identification Number, Vehicle . 424Ignition

............................................Keys . 145.........................................Switch . 147

............Timing Control System . 433......................Immobilizer System . 146

.........Important Safety Precautions . 8.........................................Indicators . 62

ABS (Anti-lock Brake............................System) . 64, 323

Aduptive Front lighting..................System (AFS) . 69, 139

Brake (Parking and Brake............................System) . 63, 322

................Charging System . 62, 409Collision Mitigation Brake

..............System (CMBS) . 69, 325.............................Cruise Control . 66

DRL (Daytime Running......................................Lights) . 66

Electronically Controlled Power..........Steering System (EPS) . 68

.....................................Fog Light . 66...................................High Beam . 66

........Key (Immobilizer System) . 64.....Keyless Access System . 68, 172

.....................................Lights On . 64......................................Low Fuel . 66

................Low Oil Pressure . 62, 409Low Tire Pressure

...........................Indicator . 67, 335.............Malfunction (MIL) . 62, 410

.......................................Message . 68..............Seat Belt Reminder . 21, 62

..................Security System . 69, 233......................................SH-AWD . 67

...........................Side Airbag Off . 63...............................................SRS . 63

Turn Signal and Hazard...................................Warning . 65

..VSA (Vehicle Stability Assist) . 65VSA (Vehicle Stability Assist)

.........................Activation . 65, 339.........Indicators, Instrument Panel . 61

...............................Infant Restraint . 42......................................Infant Seats . 42

..........Tether Anchorage Points . 51...................Inflation, Proper Tire . 383

.................................Inside Mirror . 154.............................Inspection, Tire . 384

............................Instrument Panel . 61......Instrument Panel Brightness . 141

................Interface Dial . 195, 203, 256...............................Interior Lights . 192

........................................Introduction . i

Index

J

K

L

I

IND

EX

V

........................Lights On Indicator . 64Lights

....................Bulb Replacement . 372.......................................Indicator . 61

......................................Position . 136................................Turn Signal . 136

.....................................Load Limit . 341....LOCK (Ignition Key Position) . 147

Locks.....Anti-theft Steering Column . 147

........................Childproof Door . 150............................Fuel Fill Door . 297

..................................Glove Box . 185...............................Power Door . 148

.........................................Trunk . 149......Trunk Pass-through Cover . 153

........................Low Coolant Level . 301.........................Low Fuel Indicator . 66

...Low Oil Pressure Indicator . 62, 409...Lubricant Specifications Chart . 426

..........................Luggage, Storing . 305

..................................Maintenance . 347................................Main Items . 357

........................................Minder . 349Owner’s Maintenance

...................................Checks . 356.................................Record . 359-360

..........................................Safety . 348.............................Schedule . 349-358...................................Sub Items . 358

.Malfunction Indicator Lamp . 62, 410...........Memory, Driving Position . 156

.............................Message Display . 78..........................Message Indicator . 68

...............................Meters, Gauges . 70...................Methanol in Gasoline . 296

........................Mirrors, Adjusting . 154.................................Modifications . 303

...............Modifying Your Vehicle . 304................................Moonroof . 179-182

................................................MP3 . 225.............Multi-Information Display . 71

...................Neutral Gear Position . 314..................New Vehicle Break-in . 296

...................NOTICE, Explanation of . i...............Numbers, Identification . 424

...Octane Requirement, Gasoline . 296.........................................Odometer . 72

...............................Odometer, Trip . 72Oil

........................Change, How to . 364......................Change, When to . 349......................Checking Engine . 301

...............................Life, Engine . 349..............Pressure Indicator . 62, 409

Selecting Proper Viscosity......................................Chart . 363

.....ON (Ignition Switch Position) . 147Onboard Refueling Vapor

....................................Recovery . 432............................................OnStar . 265

............................Outside Mirrors . 155....Outside Temperature Indicator . 73

....................Overheating, Engine . 406....Owner’s Maintenance Checks . 356

.........................Oxygenated Fuels . 296

..............................Paddle Shifters . 315

Index

O

PM

N

VI

＊

＊

＊＊

CONTINUED

............Panel Brightness Control . 141........................Park Gear Position . 314

...........................................Parking . 314...............................Parking Brake . 183

Parking Brake and Brake.................System Indicator . 63, 411

..Parking Over Things that Burn . 434...................................PAX System . 389

.............................PGM-FI System . 433........................Power Door Locks . 148

...............Power Socket Locations . 188............................Power Windows . 177

.........Pregnancy, Using Seat Belts . 19

.........Protecting Adults and Teens . 13...Additional Safety Precautions . 20

.....Advice for Pregnant Women . 19........................Protecting Children . 38.......................Protecting Infants . 42

.......Protecting Larger Children . 52.........Protecting Small Children . 44

Using Child Seats with.....................................Tethers . 51

.............................Using LATCH . 47

...................Radiator Overheating . 406.............Radio/CD Sound System . 203

...........................Readiness Codes . 410..Rear Lights, Bulb Replacement . 378

..........................Rear View Mirror . 154...............Rear Window Defogger . 142.............Reclining the Seat Backs . 151

.......................Reminder Indicators . 62...........................................Remote . 160

Replacement Information................Engine Oil and Filter . 364

..........................................Fuses . 413................................Light Bulbs . 372

....................................Schedule . 349...........................................Tires . 383

.............................Wiper Blades . 381Replacing Seat Belts After a

............................................Crash . 25...Reserve Tank, Engine Coolant . 301

...............................Restraint, Child . 38..................Reverse Gear Position . 314

......................................Roof Rack . 307................................Rotation, Tire . 385

................................Safety Belts . 10, 21.........Safety Defects, Reporting . 440

.................................Safety Features . 9.........................................Airbags . 11

.....................................Seat Belts . 10.............Safety Labels, Location of . 57

...............................Safety Messages . ii.................Satellite Digital Radio . 213

...................................Seat Belts . 10, 21...............Additional Information . 21

.Automatic Seat Belt Tensioner . 22.....................................Cleaning . 379

.............................E-pretensioner . 23................Lap/Shoulder Belt . 17, 21

................................Maintenance . 25Reminder Indicator and

................................Beeper . 21, 62...................System Components . 21

...............Use During Pregnancy . 19..................................Seat Heaters . 174

..................Seat Position Memory . 156.........................Seat Ventilation . 175

IndexIN

DE

X

R S

VII

＊

......................Seats, Adjusting the . 151............................Security System . 233

.....Sequential Sports Shift Mode . 315..........................Paddle Shifters . 315

...............................Serial Number . 424...........................Service Intervals . 349

......Service Manual, Purchasing . 441.........Service Station Procedures . 297

........................................SH-AWD . 320..Torque Distribution Monitor . 320

.......................................Indicator . 67...Shift Lever Position Indicators . 313

........................Shift Lock Release . 318..............................Side Airbags . 11, 32

How the Side Airbag off......................Indicator Works . 35

...How Your Side Airbags Work . 32................Side Curtain Airbags . 11, 34

How Your Side Curtain..........................Airbags Work . 34

Side Marker Lights, Bulb.........................Replacement in . 375

.............................Signaling Turns . 136.....................................Snow Tires . 387

................................Sound System . 203

Spare Tire......................................Inflating . 397

............................Specifications . 427....................Specifications Charts . 426

................................Speed Limiter . 318.......................................Spotlights . 192

..........SRS, Additional Information . 26...Additional Safety Precautions . 37..How the SRS Indicator Works . 34

How Your Airbags............................Work . 29, 32, 34

........................SRS Components . 26..................................SRS Service . 36

.............................SRS Indicator . 34, 63START (Ignition Switch

.....................................Position) . 147.......................Starting the Engine . 311

...................Auto Control Mode . 311In Cold Weather at High

..................................Altitude . 311................With a Dead Battery . 403..............State Emissions Testing . 435

........Steam Coming from Engine . 406Steering Wheel

..............................Adjustments . 143...........Anti-theft Column Lock . 147

......................Position Memory . 156Steering Wheel Buttons/

.....................................Switches . 230...................Stereo Sound System . 203....................Storing Your Vehicle . 392

......................................Sun Visors . 188Supplemental Restraint

................................System . 11, 26

......................................Servicing . 36.........................SRS Indicator . 34, 63

...................System Components . 26..................................Synthetic Oil . 363

.Taking Care of the Unexpected . 393Technical Descriptions

......DOT Tire Quality Grading . 428.....Emissions Control Systems . 432

Three Way Catalytic.............................Converters . 434

.......................Temperature Gauge . 70........Temperature, Inside Sensor . 202

....................Temperature, Outside . 73..............Tether Anchorage Points . 51

Index

T

VIII

CONTINUED

Unexpected, Taking Care..........................................of the . 393

....Uniform Tire Quality Grading . 428........................Unleaded Gasoline . 296

.......Used Oil, How to Dispose of . 365

Three Way Catalytic.................................Converters . 434

Tilt/Telescopic Steering.........................................Wheel . 143

....................................Timing Belt . 371

....................................Tire Chains . 387.........Tire, How to Change a Flat . 398

Tire Pressure Monitoring System..................................(TPMS) . 335

Monitoring Tire Pressure..................................Reading . 387

...........TPMS System Warning . 335...............................................Tires . 383

..............................Air Pressure . 384........................................Chains . 387

.........................Checking Wear . 384..........................Compact Spare . 397

......DOT Tire Quality Grading . 428......................................Inflation . 383

..................................Inspection . 384..............Michelin PAX System . 394

...................................Replacing . 386......................................Rotating . 385

...........................................Snow . 387............................Specifications . 427

...................Tools, Tire Changing . 398

Torque Distribution Monitor.................................(SH-AWD) . 320

Towing.....................................A Trailer . 341

....Equipment and Accessories . 342.............................Weight Limit . 341

.............................................TPMS . 335.............................Trailer Loading . 341

......................Trailer Towing Tips . 345Transmission

Checking Fluid Level,..............................Automatic . 368

...........................Fluid Selection . 369..............Identification Number . 424.............Shifting the Automatic . 313

.....................................Treadwear . 397

.......................................Trip Meter . 72..............................................Trunk . 149

..................Emergency Opener . 150...............................Opening the . 149

.......Open Monitor Indicator . 13, 79..................................Turn Signals . 136

.................Vehicle Capacity Load . 306......................Vehicle Dimensions . 426

....Vehicle Identification Number . 424Vehicle Stability Assist (VSA)

....................................System . 339...VSA Activation Indicator . 65, 339

.........................VSA Off Switch . 340........VSA System Indicator . 65, 339

.............................Vehicle Storage . 392.................................................VIN . 424

..................................Viscosity, Oil . 363

IndexIN

DE

X

V

U

IX

＊

＊

＊＊

.............WARNING, Explanation of . ii.........Warning Labels, Location of . 57

....................Warranty Coverages . 439Washer, Windshield

........Checking the Fluid Level . 368...................................Operation . 134

Wheels.............Adjusting the Steering . 143............Alignment and Balance . 385

..........................Compact Spare . 397...............................Nut Wrench . 399

Windows.............................Auto Reverse . 178

................Operating the Power . 177.........................Rear, Defogger . 142

Windshield.....................................Cleaning . 134...................................Defroster . 197

.....................................Washers . 134Wipers, Windshield

.......................Changing Blades . 381...................................Operation . 134

........Summer/Winter Position . 135..............................................WMA . 225

....................................Worn Tires . 384.....Wrecker, Emergency Towing . 421

......................XM Satellite Radio . 213

::

U.S. onlyCanada only

Index

X

W

X

Service Information Summary

Gasoline:

Fuel Tank Capacity:

Recommended Engine Oil:

Automatic Transmission Fluid:

Rear Differential Fluid: Brake Fluid:

Power Steering Fluid:

Transfer Assembly Fluid:

Tire Pressure (measured cold):

Spare Tire Pressure:4.5 US qt (4.3 )

Oil change capacity (includingfilter):

Premium unleaded gasoline,pump octane number of 91 orhigher.

API Premium grade 5W-20detergent oil (see page ).

SAE 90 or SAE 80W-90 viscosityhypoid gear oil, API serviceclassified GL4 or GL5 only.

SH-AWD clutch case

Capacity:SH-AWD differential case

0.77 US qt (0.73 )

Honda ATF-Z1 (AutomaticTransmission Fluid) preferred, ora DEXRON III ATF as atemporary replacement.

Honda Power Steering Fluidpreferred, or another brand ofpower steering fluid as atemporary replacement. Do notuse ATF (see page ).

Honda Heavy Duty Brake FluidDOT 3 preferred, or a DOT 3 orDOT 4 brake fluid as a temporaryreplacement (see page ).

Front:32 psi (220 kPa , 2.2 kgf/cm )

Rear:30 psi (210 kPa , 2.1 kgf/cm )

60 psi (420 kPa , 4.2 kgf/cm )

Honda ATF-Z1 (AutomaticTransmission Fluid) preferred, ora DEXRON III ATF as atemporary replacement (see page

).

19.4 US gal (73 )

2.8 US qt (2.7 )363

370

369

368

2006 rl online reference owner's manual...

Documents